JP2019063642A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes start pockets for receiving a game ball driven onto a game area. When the game ball enters the start pocket, lottery processing for a jackpot is performed with a predetermined winning probability. When winning a jackpot as a result, a jackpot game for granting privilege to a player is performed. However, in the Pachinko machine, a special symbol gate 2500 is arranged, and the jackpot game is started on condition of passage of a game ball through the special symbol gate 2500.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 151

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine").

  Conventionally, as seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which determination processing for a big hit is performed in response to the game ball entering the starting opening.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the starting opening. Then, when there is a ball entry to the starting opening, determination on the big hit is performed with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, when the big hit is won, the player is played a big hit game in which a large amount of game balls are paid out.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the same document 1, when the determination process for the big hit is performed, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Next, an expected effect is performed as to whether or not the plurality of symbols variably displayed in this manner are stopped and displayed in a special symbol combination that indicates that the jackpot has been won. As a result, the player enjoys the above expectation effect as to whether or not the special symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and enjoys this, and the result of the above determination processing is obtained from the symbol combination finally displayed in the stopped state. You will be able to recognize and play games.

JP 2008-012352 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, since the jackpot probability is often set low, even as a display symbol on the liquid crystal screen, a monotonous fluctuation without the appearance of a special symbol combination that suggests that the jackpot was won Sometimes there are things that are displayed repeatedly. And in this case, some players may think that the big hit will not be won unless such a disgusting flow changes, and as a result, the game is stopped due to the game being discontinued. The operating rate at the aircraft could be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and has an object of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing a novel gaming effect and suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game.

  In order to achieve such an object, in the invention according to claim 1, it is arranged in the game area where the game ball is hit, the starting opening which can receive the game ball hit in the game area, and the game area. The winning opening by which the game ball can be easily accepted by the operation of the predetermined opening / closing means, the lottery means for performing the lottery based on the reception of the game ball to the start hole, and the result of the lottery by the lottery means When there is a game control means for controlling such a bonus game in which acceptance of the game ball at the big winning opening is facilitated by the operation of the predetermined opening / closing means, result information about the result of the lottery by the lottery means And effect control means that can be controlled as indicated by the display effect in the predetermined effect display device, wherein the first contact with the operation of the condition device and the operation of the condition device If the second control is included, and the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a hit, the game control means performs the bonus game by executing the first game and the second game. The first condition involving the operation of the condition device is the condition that allows the bonus game to be executed although the period is not completed regardless of which is the period in which the bonus game is not executed. There is provided a closed state maintaining control means which differs between when the hit is won and when the second hit without the operation of the condition device is won, and the effect control means comprises the lottery means. When a hit is obtained as a result of the lottery, the display effect of the hit is performed regardless of whether the hit is the first hit or the second hit, and the closed state maintenance control hand A bonus effect control means for performing a challenge bonus effect on whether the predetermined opening / closing means is operated based on which of the first and second hits is won when execution of the bonus game is permitted through control by Make it a gist.

  In the above configuration, when a hit is obtained as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, regardless of whether the hit is the first hit or the second hit, the display effect at the hit is performed, and the hit time is reached. After the display effect is performed, when the bonus game is permitted to be executed through the control by the closed state maintaining control means, the predetermined opening / closing means operates based on any win of the first hit and the second hit. I made it a challenge bonus presentation about what to do.

  According to such a challenge bonus effect, the player is given a higher probability that the winning probability of the first winning with the activation of the conditional device is added to the winning probability of the second per second without the activating of the conditional device. It is possible to execute a series of effects at the time of making the player aware of the fact that the winning balls can be paid out (in other words, that the predetermined opening / closing means is operated). Therefore, it is avoided that only the monotonous loss variation is repeatedly displayed by the winning probability of the first hit set low, and the decrease in the game fun is suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the above configuration, when the first hit involving the operation of the condition device is won in executing the bonus game separately from the challenge bonus effect in such predetermined effect display device, and the condition device The bonus game according to which hit is started also by confirming whether the predetermined opening / closing means has operated under which end condition the second hit not having the operation of has been won. It can be easily grasped. That is, in this case, the player can select one of the method of confirming the closing condition of the closed control period in which the bonus game is not executed and the method of confirming the challenge bonus effect in the predetermined effect display device. Such a variety of effects can suppress the decline in the amusement of the game.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left unit of the side speaker illumination decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right unit of the side speaker illumination decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp lighting unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp lighting unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp lighting unit from diagonally front lower. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) later. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electric decoration unit, and shows it with a top lamp base from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp | ramp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotation lamp | ramp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a saucer unit. It is a rear perspective view of a saucer unit. It is a top view of a saucer unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view shown in the state which removed the back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown behind, in the state where the back plate of a plate unit and the ball unit for balls were removed. It is a disassembled perspective view shown disassembled for every main component of a pan unit and showing it from the front. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows the pan unit main body in a pan unit from the front. FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball extraction mechanism in a pan unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball extraction mechanism in a pan unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a saucer unit. It is a bottom view in the state where the operation button unit substrate of the operation button unit in a saucer unit was removed. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in a saucer unit from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a saucer unit. It is a sectional view of a handle device attached to a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle device and the striking-ball launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a striking-ballistic launch apparatus. (A) is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the dish unit, (B) is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a second ball outlet and a flow of gaming balls in the dish unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the laterally long ball | bowl inflow port in a pan unit, and a storage pan. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows a glass unit from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main part before attaching a part. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a main part frame main part before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the body frame which attached parts. It is a cross-sectional top view of a pachinko machine cut by the horizon line of the middle (main control board box part) of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a main part frame which shows the structure by the side of a main part frame to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder, cut in the longitudinal direction in an assembled state. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front component, game panel, and panel holder etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally back. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the main control board box fixed to the board substrate holder for the panel from diagonally behind. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the panel substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control substrate box of FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. FIG. 7 is a schematic view of a function display sticker. FIG. 10 is a partial view of a function display sticker on the game board through the game window. They are the perspective view (A) of the whole batting launching device, and the perspective view in the state where a firing motor part was removed (B). It is an exploded perspective view of a hit ball launcher. They are a front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a firing motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the ball striking launch device and the firing rail in the state which is not operating the operation handle part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher and the firing rail in the state which is operating the operation handle part. It is the top view (A) of the slide member provided in a bat firing device, a front view (B), the perspective view (C) seen from the front, and an AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B). They are a perspective view (A), a top view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B), and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship of a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball | bowl passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball | bowl passage unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows a relationship with a ball | bowl passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball | bowl passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the award ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between a delivery motor and the sprocket as a delivery member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the passage of a prize ball unit, and a drive relation. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul opening. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul opening. It is a rear perspective view which shows the relationship between a lock device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut in a horizontal direction at a position slightly below the longitudinal center of the pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view showing a detailed relation between a lock device and a side wall of a main part frame. It is a side view (A) of a lock device, and a perspective view (B) seen from the front side. A perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device (A), a perspective view (B) of a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device (B), (C). It is an exploded perspective view of a lock device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding lever for glass doors, and the sliding lever for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the board | substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes a main part of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the frame substrate holder. It is a rear view of a board | substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit of the state which removed the delivery control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of rear view of a pachinko machine which shows wiring etc. of a delivery control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board for describing the cross-sectional location of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 137. It is a pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back in the state where the cover body was opened. It is a side view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the open side of a cover body. It is a pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the pivotal support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in the state where the cover body concerning a second embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the delivery control board box which carries out polymerization contact with the lower part of a cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inner side of the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left rear. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main component, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at what was disassembled from diagonal back. It is the perspective view which disassembled each apparatus with which a game panel is mounted | worn, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the side prize-winning opening member diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at center characters obliquely from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center part into every main member and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the frame member of center goods, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the base plate of center goods from diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of center goods from diagonally from front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the starting opening unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the drive mechanism part of the starting opening unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the principal part of the drive mechanism part from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which looked at the sub liquid crystal unit diagonally from the front. It is the side view which looked at the mounting state of the sub liquid crystal unit from the right side. It is the perspective view which disassembled the sub liquid crystal unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which shielded the front of the sub liquid crystal unit by the 1st item unit and the 2nd item unit. It is a front view which shows the state in which the front of the sub liquid crystal unit was open | released. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st character unit from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st character unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the right movable part unit of the 1st character unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd character unit from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the 2nd item unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a right view which shows the movable part unit of a 2nd character item unit. It is the perspective view which disassembled the movable part unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the drive part of the 2nd character unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive part diagonally from back. It is a right view which shows the operation | movement of the movable part unit with respect to a sub liquid crystal unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the back unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the shutter type | mold thing of the back unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the shutter type goods and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the left inner shutter of the shutter type character and was seen diagonally from the front. They are the perspective view which looked at the shutter inside a left diagonally from back, and the principal part enlarged view. They are the perspective view which looked the decoration board of the shutter in the left side diagonally from the front, and the principal part enlarged view. It is the perspective view which looked at the right inner shutter of a shutter type | mold thing from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the shutter outside the left of a shutter type | mold thing, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the shutter outside the right of a shutter type | mold thing from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the drive part of the shutter type | mold thing, and was seen diagonally from the front. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a shutter type character article, in which the shutters are opened as viewed obliquely from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower side thing unit from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the lower side thing unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the lower drive part unit of the lower side thing unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the distribution production | presentation apparatus of the lower drive part unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the distribution part of the distribution effect apparatus, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked the rocking | fluctuation drive part of the distribution effect apparatus diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the rocking drive part from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism of the lower drive part unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism and was seen from diagonally back. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which supplies a game ball to a distribution effect apparatus. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which raised the distribution effect apparatus. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which made the distribution part of the distribution effect apparatus incline to the left. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which inclined the distribution part of the distribution effect apparatus to the right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game-medium supply mechanism of the lower side thing unit obliquely from the front. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the gaming medium supply mechanism disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the gaming medium supply mechanism disassembled and viewed obliquely from behind; It is the perspective view which looked at the channel | path formation unit of the lower side accessory unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the channel | path formation unit from diagonally back. It is a perspective view which shows the operation | movement by the return channel of a channel | path formation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the operation | movement by the discharge passage of a channel | path formation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the other structure in a back box unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled another structure and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the horizontal decoration unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the movable decoration part of the horizontal decoration unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the horizontal base member and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a block diagram which shows especially a real-time clock function among the functions of a peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply disconnection occurrence. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening prize winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit game start processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit game processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory | storage means for special symbols. It is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is a table | surface which shows each characteristic for every classification of big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern table which may be normally selected in an external disadvantageous game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a submain process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration symbol variation start processing (Step S1210). It is a flow chart which shows an example of decision processing (Step S1225a) of stop design in the 1st production mode. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decision processing (Step S1225b) of a stop design in the 2nd production mode. (A) is a diagram for explaining the extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit, (b) is a diagram for explaining the extension effect pattern at the time of the small hit, (c) is a challenge bonus effect pattern for the big hit It is a figure for demonstrating, (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus presentation pattern at the time of a small hit. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” is received from the main control MPU 4100 a side. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” is received from the main control MPU 4100 a side. (A) is a table which shows the big hit expectation degree etc. in the 1st production mode, etc. separately for each production content series, and (b) is the challenge bonus rush expectation degree in the 2nd production mode Etc. are tables showing the presentation content series separately. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "01H" in the 1st production mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "02H" in the 1st production mode.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame constituting the pachinko machine, a main frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of the game hall and an open frame pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 4 and the game window 101 and the game window 101 in which the player can visually recognize the game area 605 pivotally supported by the body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable and formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is hit. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing bracket 14 for reinforcing the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the lower front of the outer frame 2. In addition to the game board 4 being detachably attachable to the main body frame 3 as described above, the ball firing device 650 (see FIG. 5) and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body A substrate unit 1100 provided with various control substrates for controlling electrical components provided on the frame 3 and a power supply substrate is attached and covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main frame 3 A cover 1250 is detachably provided. Furthermore, in addition to the plate unit 300 described above, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the game window 101. In addition, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same rectangular size when viewed from the front, so that the main body frame 3 can not be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 10 (A), a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 12 (A) (B), a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D (C) , E-E cross-sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support bracket of the outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 extending in the vertical (upper and lower) direction. , 13 are assembled in a square shape by connecting them with a connecting member 19 for connecting their respective ends. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape having a level difference between the center and the left and right, and an engagement notch in which a protruding center portion is formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 The side frame plates 12 and 13 are fitted on the side surface of the left and right portions of which the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the flat surface of the left and right portions. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  Then, in this state, the insertion hole 21 and the connecting member 19 which are formed in the both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and the both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame 11 respectively are one step lower (Two in the case of illustration) connection holes 22 (the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 of FIG. (In the illustrated case) and is fastened with a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connection screws 23 from the upper or lower side, and further, a plurality (two or more) In the illustrated case, two (two in the figure) mounting holes 24 and a plurality (three in the case of the figure) of connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 are made coincident with each other. In the illustrated case, the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening them with the three connection screws 26 and 27). 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, among the three connection screws 26 and 27, one connection screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 to the connection member 19, but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. It directly connects with the member 19 from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wooden as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 Is made of an extruded sheet of lightweight metal such as aluminum alloy. The reason why upper frame plate 10 and lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wooden as in the prior art is that when pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island in a row in a game arcade, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical surface of the island. Although it is necessary to carry out a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by striking a nail on the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that the nail is easy to strike. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be formed thinner while maintaining the strength compared to the conventional wood, so the inner side of the side frame plates 12 and 13 When viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to each other, the lateral width can be widened. Therefore, the game board 4 having a large dimension in the left-right direction can be attached to the main frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of aluminum alloy flat plates, sufficient rigidity can not be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plates 12 (the side frame plates 13 have the same structure as well. A space 28 (the space 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib on the inner side of the rear part of T.) is drawn out and formed to increase the thickness h1 of the rear part There is. Of course, this thickness h1 has a size equal to or slightly smaller than that of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 which is one step lower than the groove portion 29 (the side The groove 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG. From the groove portion 29 to the front end portion of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12B to 12D, the inner side surface thereof is a flat plate in which the other portion of the left and right portions one step lower However, the flat portion has a shallow recess for material reduction. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, a recess 30 (a side frame in which the hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted into the opposite surface (outside surface) where the groove 29 is formed. The recess 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the side frame plate 12 on the pivotal support side formed as described above, the drooping piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is provided on the upper side of the side frame plate 12 in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19. The mounting holes 31 for fixing with the fixing screws 32 are formed at the same time and are made to coincide with the mounting holes 69 formed in the vertical contact pieces 72 of the lower support fitting 66 at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing fitting 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the front portion of the side frame plate 12 below the mounting hole 33.

  On the other hand, in the side frame portion 13 on the open side, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connection member 19, an attachment hole 37 for attaching the closing projection 38 with the attachment screw 39 is drilled in the upper portion. The mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is drilled, and the mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 at the lowermost position with the fixing screw 44 is further provided. It is formed.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the closing projections 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3. And lock the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and pivot it to one side, as will be described in detail later. The engagement can be released to open the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2.

  In addition, the cover reinforcement fitting 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the lower side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface at the time of closing. The surface and sides of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the open upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15 of the outer frame 2.

  By the way, it is attached along one side upper surface of upper support fitting 45 and cover reinforcement fitting 14 which also has a function of connecting upper frame plate 10 and side frame plate 12 as a structure for pivotally supporting body frame 3 so as to open and close freely. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hook 47 which is formed by being bent toward the center of the tip from the side of the support projection 46 in the support projection 46 projecting forward. An axial support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper axial support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed in a shape projecting forward, but a support projection 68 is projected upward from this projecting portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 The support hole formed in FIG. 72) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main frame 3 with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support bracket 66, By pivotally supporting the support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 in the support hole 47, the shaft can be supported in a freely open / close manner.

  The upper support fitting 45 is mounted on the mounting step 49 formed concavely on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the support side. The mounting screw 51 is inserted from the top by aligning the mounting holes 48 (two in the case of illustration) and the mounting holes 50 (two in the case of illustration) formed in the mounting step 49 with one another. The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by fixing to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, there is a hanging piece portion 53 that abuts the outside of the side frame plate 12, and in the hanging piece portion 53, a mounting hole is bored. The upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 are fixed and the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 are connected via the upper support fitting 45 by fixing them with the fixing screw 32. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state in which the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 are aligned as described above. The mounting screw 71 is inserted into the mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66 so that it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is a side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 which are the constituent members with the connecting member 19. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength is high and the square shape is robust It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement between the connecting member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 described above, the left and right of the connecting member 19 are lowered in the groove 29 when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Because one part of the part is fitted in, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 becomes strong, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Also, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, the upper support fitting 45 is mounted at a predetermined position as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of each frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 on a pachinko island stand (not shown), adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lender. Also, when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, a lock member 80 is rotatably pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 in an openable / closable manner. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support projection 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at its tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support projection 46. The hanging wall 46a is formed to be bent into two. The hanging wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and can improve the appearance by making the lock member 80 described below invisible when viewed from the front, and further improving the appearance. The lock member 80 is used as a portion to which the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 abuts or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outward from the support protrusion piece 46. Further, the support wedging hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed by being bent so as to be further inclined toward the center of the tip slightly from the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed toward the inner side It is done. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support wedge hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 504.

  Further, the hanging wall 46a described above is formed by being bent at a right angle along the outer edges of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the front inlet end of the support hole 47 and the support hole 47. Is bent inward at the front end of the inlet end portion to form a stop drooping portion 47a. Further, a mounting hole 46b is formed substantially at the center of the support protruding piece 46, and the lock member 80 is rotatably supported by the rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46b. The lock member 80 is molded of synthetic resin, the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and the arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is set up. Further, an attachment hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in the state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support projection 46, as shown in FIG. 14B, the tip contact of the elastic piece 80c The part is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46a, and the stopper part 80a closes the inclined hole part of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80 a does not close the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedge hole 47. That is, in the normal state, a space into which the pivot support pin 504 of the upper pivot support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 47.

  By the way, the state in which the support pin 504 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 and the end side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop drooping portion 47a of the inlet end In the usual axially supported state where there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a), the support weir 47 formed by bending The respective centers of the pivotal support pin 504 located in the end space portion of the inclined hole portion and the end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a are in a state of being shifted in the diagonal direction and facing each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 504 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 47. Since the load on the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is formed in an arc shape so that the lock member 80 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 80b is operated and rotated. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arc tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support eyelet 47 and abuts on the arc-shaped tip surface 80e, the acting force F is A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the arc-shaped end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arc-shaped end surface 80e, and an inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support hook 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the stopper of the lock member 80 Since the moment for rotating the tip of the portion 80a in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) freed from the support protrusion 46 does not work, the pivot pin 504 has an inclined shape of the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support hook 47 State of being held between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and the elastic integrally formed of synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c, and to prevent the support pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 for a long period of time. Even if the distal end of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 46 by applying an excessive force, one side of the distal end of the stopper 80a Does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 47 a and thus does not rotate further, the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support protrusion 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the center of the arc of the arc-shaped end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80). Although there has been described the case where no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip end face 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced, and the pivoting position of the locking member 80 by the rivet 81 is on the inside of the support projecting piece 46, the pivoting pin 504 inclines the support hook 47 When an acting force F is applied in a direction to come out along the inclination of the hole portion and abuts on the arc-shaped end face 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arc-shaped end face 80f The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) acting on the part, and the component acting on the contact portion between the pivot pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole of the support rod hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment works by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise direction), but even if the lock member 80 rotates, one end of the stopper portion 80a Since only the sides abut the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protrusion 46 and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point which can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 is pulled out along the slope of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. A rotational moment for rotating the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 of the action force F and the end faces 80e and 80f when F is applied and abuts on the end faces 80e and 80f. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where no rotation occurs or a rotational moment causing the tip of the lock member 80 to rotate to the outside of the support protrusion 46 Also, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 80a stops and the hanging portion 47 Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface of the stopper portion 80a is not arc-shaped, the tip of the lock member 80 is directed to the outside of the support projecting piece 46 at a position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotational moment to be rotated is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. The applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because only one end of the stopper portion 80a abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a even when 80 rotates. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, the support projections 68 of the lower support fitting 66 in the support holes (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main frame 3. Needs to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 80 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 80c, the pivot pin 504 can be inserted into the support hook hole 47. Then, when the pivotal support pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivotal support pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not abut Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 47 at the same time. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the pivot pin 504 so that the pivot pin 504 does not fall out of the support hook hole 47. Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hook hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 46 so that the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support hook hole 47, so that the support pin 504 is supported. It can be removed from the hole 47. After that, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support projections 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, the upper support fitting 45 can be mounted very easily on the back surface, and since it has an extremely simple structure, it is possible to reduce the number of failures and reduce the manufacturing cost. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support wedge hole 47 and abuts on the tip faces 80e and 80f The tip of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support projection 46 at a position where the rotational moment for rotating the lock member 80 is not generated by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the tip and the tip faces 80e and 80f. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment occurs, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and it is integrally made of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the formed elastic piece 80c and to prevent the support pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 for a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner periphery is in a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp illumination unit 200 attached to the top of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a dish unit 300 attached to the bottom of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100; A glass unit 450 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 to close the game window 101, and a security cover 470 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 to cover the rear lower portion of the glass unit 450 And have. Although the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described in detail later, the left and right sides of the game window 101 are provided with side speaker electronic decoration units 120. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the plate unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 on the left side (open side) of the plate unit 300 in a front view, for performing a game ball hitting operation.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 23 to FIG. FIG. 23 (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit. FIG. 31 (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the joint unit in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame base main body having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically long and polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker electronic decoration unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame 140 made of metal fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. And a ball feeding unit 170 for feeding the game balls fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the tray unit 300 to the ball striking device 650 one by one, fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and The operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting table 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to the lower left decoration substrate 190 fixed to the lower left side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and the ball removing path 393 of the pan unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball removal path cover 191 for closing the ball removal path opening 112 formed in the position, a door decoration drive substrate 192 fixed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 below the game window 101, and a door decoration drive A door decoration drive substrate cover 193 covering the substrate 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal board 194 fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring housing groove 110b formed on the rear side of the housing 110 and capable of containing the wiring from the lower left decorative substrate 190 and the handle relay terminal plate 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 composed of metal sheet metal by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support top lamp electric decoration unit 200, dish unit 300 grade, etc. while being carried out.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs 190a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 so that the left end portion of the plate unit 300 described later can be lighted and decorated. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the electric decoration parts and electric parts (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board etc., the speakers 121 and 391, the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400) provided in the door frame 5. A door relay board in which wiring from the switch, ball unit 301, operation button unit 370, etc. is collected and connected, and wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is mounted on the back surface of the main frame 3 It is connected to a winning ball payout control board 1186 via a 1102 etc. and a main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of a main control board box 624 attached to the game board 4.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 etc. The game window 101 of a shape is formed in the form which offsets upwards generally. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and a width of the left and right side sides, the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 143 The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area wider than conventional pachinko machines can be easily formed. It has become.

  In addition, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, the prize ball passing hole 111 through which the prize ball communication ball 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates on the upper part of the pivoting side (left side in front view) A ball extraction path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball extraction path 393 in the pan unit 300 below the passage opening 111 and a ball feed unit 170 for mounting the ball feed unit 170 on the open side (right side in front view) The feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later is inserted near the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are respectively formed so as to penetrate the door frame base main body 110.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101, the mounting opening 116 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and the left and right mounting opening 116 respectively. A speaker opening 117 for escaping the rear ends of the side speakers 121 disposed on the outer side and below the left and right lower sides of the side speaker illumination unit 120 described later is respectively formed to penetrate.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, the front side peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 is indented to the front side along the inner periphery of the game window 101 and the front outer periphery of the glass unit 450 can contact; A wire receiving groove 110b which is formed on the lower side and formed on the front side at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 and can receive a wire, and the cam insertion opening 115 opens to attach the concave joint unit 180 toward the front And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed to project backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585 of the above. The amount of protrusion of the door frame protrusion 110 d to the rear is formed to be larger than the amount of protrusion of the door frame protrusion 110 e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110 h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp illumination unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, in the door frame base main body 110, a large number of mounting bosses for fixing the side speaker illumination unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the plate unit 300, etc., and a large number of mounting holes are formed. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker illumination unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front face of the door frame 5 (light emission decoration) and is disposed at four corners of the game window 101. The left side speaker illumination unit 120L which can emit predetermined music, sound effects, etc. to the player by the side speaker 121, and is arranged on the axis support side (left side in front view) of the gaming window 101. And the right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the game window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes, in each of the left and right units, a vertically long illumination portion 122 and an acoustic portion 130 disposed on the top and bottom of the illumination portion 122 and having a side speaker 121, and the left and right are symmetrical. It is a structure.

  Specifically, as shown in an exploded manner in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination portion 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a longitudinally long semi-cylindrical transparent side illumination lens 123 and a side illumination lens 123. Of the transparent side illumination reflector 124 which is disposed on the rear side of the vehicle and which forms a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123, the side illumination decoration base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124, and The side decoration lens 126 is formed so as to wrap the upper end and the lower end of the side decoration substrate 126 fixed to the rear side, the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 from the front side respectively and attached to the side illumination base 125 Side illumination flash cover 127 supporting the 123 and the side illumination reflector 124, and the side illumination flash cover The flash lens 128 has a light-transmitting property to close the flash opening 127a of the lens 27 from the rear side, and the flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front of the side illumination base 125 .

  The electric decoration part 122 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a capable of emitting various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side electric decoration board 126, and high brightness above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a The white LEDs 126b are mounted respectively. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front and rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration substrate 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on the light source 126 can be emitted forward through the opening 125 a of the side illumination base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side illumination reflector 124.

  In the electric decoration part 122, inside the transparent cylinder of the side electric decoration lens 123 and the side electric decoration reflector 124, the entire inner circumference of the side electric decoration lens 123 and a part of the inner circumference of the side electric decoration reflector 124 As described above, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that makes transmitted light or reflected light appear pearly or colorful, and when viewed from the player side, the side illumination lens 123 is formed by the side lens sheet 123a. And in the transparent cylinder (pipe) formed of the side illumination reflector 124, it can be made to take an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged.

  Furthermore, in the electric decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to several LED126a of the side decoration board | substrate 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 into three groups in an up-down direction The dividing wall 124b is provided to prevent the light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, by the dividing wall 124b, the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 can be clearly divided into three, that is, the upper middle, the lower and the lower one. Therefore, by causing the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decoration substrate 126 to emit light appropriately, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light entirely or partially, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower portions. It is possible to

  Further, in the side illumination reflector 124, a lens recess 124c recessed from the front side is formed at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b in the side decoration substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens from the front side is formed in the lens recess 124c. 122a (see FIG. 28 and FIG. 29) is inserted. The electric decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electric decoration lens 123 and the side electric decoration reflector 124 by making only the LED 126 b emit light strongly before making the LED 126 a emit light by the sub lens 122 a and the LED 126 b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light-emitting effect in which only both ends light up and then light up.

  Furthermore, in the electric decoration part 122, a flash light 129a (for example, super high brightness white LED etc.) capable of emitting strong light is attached to the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side electric decoration flash cover 127 By making the flash light 129a emit light, it is possible to emit a flash to the player side.

  The sound unit 130 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a substantially disc made of a speaker ornament 131 disposed at the foremost portion and having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a, and a punching metal closing the speaker opening 131a of the speaker ornament 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed on the rear side of the speaker cover 132, in cooperation with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and having a circular speaker front support opening 133a, and a speaker of the decoration spacer 133 Mainly provided with a side speaker 121 arranged to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting opening 134a fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side .

  As shown in the figure, in the sound unit 130, the shapes of the speaker decoration 131, the decoration spacer 133, and the back pressing member 134 are different depending on the mounting position. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the sound unit 130 at the upper left in the front view has the speaker decoration 131 formed in a cylindrical shape, and has a decoration portion 131b extending outward from the left side The decorative spacer 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134b to be combined with the decoration part 131b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic portion 130 further includes a hinge cover 135 disposed above the back pressing decorative portion 134 b of the back pressing member 134 and covering the lower side than the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support portion 146 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 There is. Moreover, in the acoustic unit 130 at the lower left in a front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having the decoration part 131 b, and the spacer decoration part 133 b in which the decoration spacer 133 is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131 The back holding member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, in the acoustic section 130 at the upper right in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the acoustic unit 130 at the lower right in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration portion 133b that abuts on the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131 The back holding member 134 is formed in a ring shape. The sound unit 130 at the lower right is further provided with a decorative base 136 on the further rear side of the back pressing member 134, having a back pressing member fixing port 136a through which the back pressing member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front. .

  The four side speakers 121 in the side speaker illumination unit 120 of the present example are disposed at the four corners of the game window 101, as shown in the figure, and for the head of the player who is likely playing Are arranged at the upper, lower, left, and right positions, so 2.1ch surround sound signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, lower speaker 391 described later added to each side By sending a signal or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example mainly takes charge of a mid range to a high range, and the lower speaker 391 takes charge of a low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforcing sheet metal]
Next, as shown mainly in FIGS. 24 and 25, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 is an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the upper side back surface of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 143 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110 A lower reinforcing metal plate 144 attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101 is mutually tightened with a screw or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has an upper shaft supporting portion 146 having a shaft pin 145 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 And a lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, whereby the door frame 5 is mounted to the main body frame 3. It is provided to be openable and closable.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edges It is a lower bent piece 149 which is bent backward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent piece 150 which is bent backward at both sides of the upper long side edge is formed. However, a portion sandwiched by the upper bending projections 150 on both sides thereof is a vertical bending projection 151 extended in the vertical direction. Although the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 149 is not very large, and the lower bent protrusion 149 is not engaged with the groove portion or the recessed portion to form the concavo-convex engagement, and is formed to enhance the strength. On the other hand, although the amount of protrusion of the upper bending protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bending protrusions 149, the intrusion of the incorrect tool from the lower part is somewhat prevented, but rather the lower reinforcement in this embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the configuration of the sheet metal 144 is the vertical bending projection 151.

  The vertically bent projecting piece 151 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 The upper end piece of the vertically bent projecting piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451 c formed along the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 in the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-back direction) . In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 is formed which protects the outer periphery of the bottom surface of the prize ball passage hole 111 formed in the door frame base main body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an open side outer bending projection 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 and The open side inner bent pieces 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent pieces 154 are formed to extend rearward more than the open side outer bent pieces 153. Further, on the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141, bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 which are bent backward on both sides of the long side are respectively formed. Furthermore, a bearing side L-shaped bent projecting piece 157 is formed on the bearing side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to extend rearward at the outer end of the long side thereof. In addition, a hook cover 158 that is in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is attached to the rear lower portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting stand, ball feed unit]
Next, the mounting base 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, the mounting table 160 is attached to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100 as shown in FIGS. 18, 24 and 25, and is transparent synthetic resin like the crime prevention cover 470. It is formed in the shape of a long rectangular parallelepiped whose front is open. In order to smoothly guide the balls fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting platform 160 fires by the rear surface of the mounting platform 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. A ball flight guiding surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, in the mounting table 160 according to the present embodiment, an opening 162 for the prize ball passage opening through which the rearward projecting portion of the prize ball passage hole covering portion 152 formed on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated It is formed, and a ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed at the lower side on the open side. An area in an oblique direction from the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guiding surface 161.

  Further, in the middle lower part of the mounting table 160, a cover notch 164 for inserting a finger when removing the ball removal path cover 191, the door decoration drive board 192 and the door decoration drive board cover 193 described later is formed. In addition, on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160, a standing wall 165 which is vertically provided is formed. As shown in FIG. 18, when the security cover 470 is attached, the standing wall 165 abuts against the front surface of the security cover 470 to restrict the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward.

  Further, the mounting table 160 is provided with a security projection 166 which is provided obliquely rearward from the lower side of the above-mentioned ball flight guiding surface 161 to the opening for the ball passing hole 162. As described above, the crime prevention projection 166 and the crime prevention space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 are provided with the inner ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and It constitutes an engaging portion.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 has a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171a of the main body 171. A feed member 172, and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311 c of the pan unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in correspondence with the reciprocation differential of the hitting ball 687 of the hitting and firing device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515 through the strike delivery port 171 b formed in the main body 171.

  In the figure, reference numeral 174 denotes an E ring, which prevents the ball feeding member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171, and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feeding member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Subsequently, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base main body 110 and can slide in the lateral direction in the state where the slide body 182 and the slide body 182 are accommodated. It is comprised from the cover body 184 which covers the front surface of the unit mounting recessed part 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base main body 110 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose front face is open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened on the rear face. Further, a pair of attachment holes 110 f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed at one substantially diagonal corner of the joint unit attachment recess 110 c. Furthermore, on the upper and lower sides of the inner surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c, arc-shaped contact protrusions for contacting the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 to allow the slide body 182 to move smoothly. In FIG. 31 (B), only the contact convex portion 110g on the lower side is shown, and the contact convex portion 110g on the upper side is not shown.

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit attachment recess 110 c so as to be accommodated movably in the left and right direction in the space formed by the joint unit attachment recess 110 c and the cover member 184. It is formed in an open rectangular box shape, and is disposed on the rear surface wall below the two guide projections 182a which project rearward by a predetermined amount and are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction and the guide projections 182a on the right side in rear view A plate-like slide protrusion 183 protruding rearward and a wire through cylinder portion 428 of a handle device 400 described later are pierced on the left side in a rear view with respect to the slide protrusion 183 between the two guide protrusions 182a. And a rectangular cylinder member through opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183 a which is obliquely cut in the traveling direction (right direction in rear view) at the time of sliding. Further, on the front wall of the slide body 182, a cam engaging concave portion 182c in which a cam 416 fixed to the tip end portion of the rotating shaft 415 in the handle device 400 is accommodated is formed in a U shape by a rib. And, a cam contact portion 182d is formed as an arc-shaped rib so that a portion of the vertical part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c protrudes into the cam engagement recess 182c and the portion abuts against the cam 416 It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose front face is open, and a cylindrical boss-like guide projection 182a which is provided on the front face of the slide body 182 is inserted in the front face thereof. Of the two horizontal guide holes 194a for guiding the movement of the slide, the insertion horizontal hole 184b through which the slide projection 183 provided on the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear of the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle portion 410. It projects outward from the position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c which the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 attached to the end and inserted from the cam insertion opening 115 faces and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a formed mounting hole 184d. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit attachment recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the attachment hole 110f of the joint unit attachment recess 110c through the attachment hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit attachment recess 110c, the slide body 182 is accommodated in the joint unit attachment recess 110c, and the cover body 184 is covered from the front in that state. At the time of coating, the guide projection 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. After coating, the slide body 182 is housed inside by screwing the mounting hole 110 f with a screw via the mounting hole 184 d, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2 B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32 (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit from diagonally front and bottom It is. FIG. 34 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) later. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown together with the top lamp base, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the central rotation lamp in the top lamp illumination unit.

  The top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotary lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) aligned in the left-right direction, as also shown in FIG. The sizes of these rotary lights 244, 264, 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp illumination unit 200 is fixed to the front of the box-like top lamp base 210 and to the front of the top lamp base 210 and is fixed to the top front of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed Top lamp reflector unit 220, left turn light unit 240 attached to the front of top lamp reflector unit 220, right turn light unit 260, center turn light unit 280, left turn light unit 240, right turn light unit 260, Mainly provided with rotary lamp covers 201, 202 and 203 attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220 respectively covering the front of the central rotary lamp unit 280, and a reflector inner 204 covering the lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit approximately at the center See Figure 34)

  The top lamp illumination unit 200 further includes a top lamp power supply substrate 205 fixed to the front right of the top lamp base 210, and two top lamp decoration driving substrates 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. It is further equipped. The top lamp power supply substrate 205 includes the substrates 224, 226 and 231 and the LEDs 244a, 266a and 231a in the top lamp illumination unit 200, the motors 245, 265 and 285 of the rotary light units 240, 260 and 280, and the substrates 248. , 268, 288, and 296, and an LED 453a of a glass unit 450, which will be described later, is relayed to supply power from a power supply substrate 1136 (described later). In addition, the top lamp decoration drive substrate 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, the motors 245, 265, 285 of the respective rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. Driving is to be driven based on a control signal from a peripheral substrate 4010 (peripheral control substrate 4140) described later.

[1-2 B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right sides substantially follow the upper side and the left and right sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the game window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape which is horizontally long and partitioned at the middle in the front-rear direction. The mounting boss 110h of the door frame base main body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery of the top lamp base 210, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i protrudes rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the front side. A plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting bosses 211 each having an insertion hole through which a predetermined screw can be inserted. The tip of the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted from the rear into the mounting boss portion 211, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. Is fixed to the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side of the upper lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp illumination unit 200) is mounted and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  In addition, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed bosses 212 having an insertion hole through which a predetermined screw can pass while the rear end of the fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 is engaged. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixing boss 221 j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side via the fixing boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other It has become.

  Furthermore, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply substrate 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end in front view. Is viewed from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further, on the left and right of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, substrate mounting portions 214 are respectively provided, and to the substrate mounting portion 214, the top lamp decoration driving substrate 206 is mounted.

[1-2 B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Subsequently, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of this embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 which can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front and is open at the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder in which three rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 are mounted side by side on the front surface, and a large space is projected forward between a central rotary lamp 284 and left and right rotary lamps 244, 264. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b which descends downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines rearward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical portion 221a, and in the inclined portion 221b, three rectangular openings aligned in the vertical direction are formed (see FIG. 33). ). Further, the reflector base 210 is provided with vertically elongated bulging portions 221e that project forward at the left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f is formed at the front surface of the bulging portion 221e to be vertically elongated. As illustrated, the reflector base 211 is shaped such that the mounting positions of the three rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 are recessed rearward by the two cylindrical parts 221a and the inclined parts 221b and the two bulging parts 221e. It has become.

  Further, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape in which the space between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (the position where the central rotation lamp 284 is disposed) is recessed rearward, and Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening 221g penetrating substantially trapezoidal in a front view is formed on the left and right across the approximate center in the left-right direction. Further, the reflector base 221 is provided with a rotary lamp mounting so that the front ends of the rotary lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 provided with the rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221 h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 221i that project rearward and which engage with the mounting bosses 211 of the top lamp base 210 and a plurality of bosses that engage with the fixed bosses 212 of the top lamp base 210 and project backwards. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with a mounting boss 221k directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without the top lamp base 210.

  The top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 fixed to a substantially central position in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lenses 222. A pair of lens sheet 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted on the front, a reflector base 210 The transparent round lens 225 inserted from the rear side into the cylindrical portion 221a in the rear to close the opening 221c, and the rear side of the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a placed on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin, and has three curved lens portions 222a, which are substantially trapezoidal and curved and closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and three inclined portions 221b of the reflector base 221. It comprises a divided lens portion 222 b for closing the opening 221 d and a round lens support portion 222 c in contact with the rear end of the round lens 225. In addition, while the diffused lens part 222d of the shape of a saw is formed in the upper and lower sides of the curved lens part 222a, while being able to emit light in the aspect different from the curved lens part 222a, the light from the front side Can be diffusely reflected.

  In the top inner lens 222, a projection piece 222e which protrudes in a plate shape from the rear side to the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d and an upper and lower projection pieces support the lens sheet 223 on the rear side A support recess 222f is formed. As illustrated, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged in a row corresponding to the projecting pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222 and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222 The positions are also distributed. Thus, the curved lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222 and the diffusion lens portion 222d can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that shows transmitted light from the LED 224 a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources and the like in a pearl shape or a colorful shape. Also, the LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration substrate 226 is an ultra-high brightness LED, and can emit strong flash light.

  Furthermore, in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top side lens 227 closing the vertically long slits 221f formed in the left and right bulging portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and the top side fixing the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side A lens holder 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 which is fixed on the rear side of the reflector base 221 to hold the lens sheet 229 And a top side substrate 231 on the front surface of which is mounted a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the top side lens 227 on the front side via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed of a transparent resin in a V shape in plan view, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at the upper and lower ends respectively, and the locking piece 227b at the lower end is a reflector base After being locked with the lower end of the slit 221 f at 221, the locking piece 227 a at the upper end is attached to the reflector base 221 by pressing it with the top side lens presser 228. Further, the lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the above-mentioned lens sheet 223, and is also formed in a curved shape as shown in FIG. By being attached to 221, it is possible to take on the appearance that a cylindrical fluorescent tube is disposed behind the top side lens 227.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and the light from the LED 231 a of the top side substrate 231 fixed to the rear side through the inside of the frame Light can be emitted to the front surface through the lens 227.

[1-2 B-3. Rotating light unit]
Next, three rotary light units 240, 260, 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotation lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241 a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the position where the opening 241 a protrudes to the front side from the rotation lamp attachment opening 221 h of the reflector base 221 The rotary lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and the substantially annular rotation arranged coaxially with the opening 241 a of the rotary lamp unit base 241 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 241. A rotary lamp base gear 243 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 242 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 242 and its lower surface so as to hang from the rotary lamp base gear 243 And the rotary lamp attachment opening 221 of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotary lamp base gear 243. Left rotation light motor 245 and left rotation light motor which are arranged on the rear side of the axis and fixed to the lower surface of rotation light unit base 241 so that rotation shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of rotation light unit base 241 A transmission gear 246 fixed to the rotary shaft 245a of the H.245 and engaged with the rotary lamp base gear 243, covering the whole of the rotary lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmission gear 246 from above and rotating the rotary lamp base gear 243 , And is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 247 coaxially with the rotating part holder 247 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and heading toward the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left-turning lamp substrate 248 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotation light unit 240 has a rotation light unit cover 249 covering the rotation part holder 247 from above, a left rotation position detection sensor 250 for detecting the rotation position of the rotation light 244, and a left rotation position detection sensor 250. And a left rotational position detection substrate 251.

  The rotary lamp unit base 241 of the left rotary lamp unit 240 descends downward at a position on the upper side of the opening 241a and a mounting step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a. It has an attachment portion 241c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211, and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a and fixing the left rotary light motor 245, and rotates from above in the attachment step 241b. The part base 242 is fitted. In addition, the rotational portion base 242 detects the left rotational position at a predetermined position on the shaft support port 242 a having a small diameter coaxially with the opening 241 a of the rotary lamp unit base 241 and the outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 243 A substrate support portion 242b supporting the lower end of the substrate 251, and a wire locking portion 242c disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and locking a wire connected to the left rotary lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than the shaft support port 242 a of the rotary unit base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 242 a of the rotary unit base 242. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 243a that is vertically smaller and smaller than the gear barrel, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the pivot support 242a of the rotary portion base 242, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the pivot support 242a. The shaft 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support 242a. Further, in the left rotation lamp unit 240, by detecting the rotation position detection piece 243b of the rotation lamp base gear 243 by the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the rotation position of the rotation lamp 244 can be detected. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 247 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the pivot support opening 242a of the rotary unit base 242 and can be inserted into the pivot support hole 243a of the rotary light base gear 243. The holder barrel of is formed. The outside diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder barrel into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary lamp base gear 243, the rotary lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the left rotation lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotation lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 242a of the rotation portion base 242, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotation lamp base gear 243 and the shaft support hole 243a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotation portion holder 247. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotation lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotation portion holder 247. Further, although not shown, a substrate support portion for supporting the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 is formed on the lower surface of the rotation portion holder 247 at a position corresponding to the substrate support portion 242b of the rotation portion base 242 thereof. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is held and fixed by the rotating portion base 242 and the rotating portion holder 247.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotary lamp 244 of the left rotary lamp unit 240 is arranged below the transparent disk-shaped rotary lamp lens 252 disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 243, and below the rotary lamp lens 252. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotary lamp 244 is plated on the surface with metallic luster, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b bored in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d which extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 243.

  In the rotary lamp 244, the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 252 faces from the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotary lamp lens 252 is formed with an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 253d into the insertion hole 252a and fixing the mounting boss 253d to the rotary lamp base gear 243, the rotary lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotary lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is supposed to be held fixed. Further, the reflector cover 254 of the rotary lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on a side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253 c in the reflector 253 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotation lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a protrudes to the front side from the rotation lamp attachment opening 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221 The rotary lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be at the same position, and the substantially circle disposed coaxially with the opening 261 a of the rotary lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 261 An annular rotary unit base 262, a rotary lamp base gear 263 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 262 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 262, and hanging from the rotary lamp base gear 263 The rotary lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the rotary lamp mounting of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotary lamp base gear 263 A right rotation light motor 265 disposed on an axis line on the rear side of 221 h and fixed to the lower surface of the rotation light unit base 261 such that the rotation shaft 265 a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation light unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotation shaft 265 a of the motor 265 and engaged with the rotary light base gear 263, covering the whole rotary light base gear 263 and a part of the transmission gear 266 from above and rotating the rotary light base gear 263 The rotary unit holder 267, which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to the rotary lamp unit base 261, is fixed to the lower surface of the rotary unit holder 267 coaxially with the rotary lamp base gear 263 and is directed to the lower rotary lamp 264 And a right-turning light substrate 268 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting toward the light.

  In addition, the right rotation light unit 260 includes a rotation light unit cover 269 that covers the rotation unit holder 267 from above, a right rotation position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotation position of the rotation light 264, and a right rotation position detection sensor 270 And a right rotation position detection substrate 271.

  The rotary lamp unit base 261 of the right rotary lamp unit 260 has a mounting stepped portion 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a in the upper surface thereof, and descends downward at a position rearward of the opening 261a. A mounting portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d disposed on the rear side of the opening 261a and fixing the right rotation light motor 265 are provided, and the mounting step portion 261b rotates from above The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotation portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the shaft support port 262a coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotary lamp unit base 261 and having a small diameter on the outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 263 A substrate support portion 262b supporting the lower end of the substrate 271; and a wire locking portion 262c disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and locking a wire connected to the right rotary lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than the shaft support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 263a that is smaller in diameter than the gear barrel and penetrates vertically, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And 263b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the axial support port 262a of the rotary portion base 262, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the axial support port 262a. H. 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the shaft support 262a. Further, in the right rotation lamp unit 260, the rotation position of the rotation lamp 264 can be detected by detecting the rotation position detection piece 263b of the rotation lamp base gear 263 by the right rotation position detection sensor 270. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 267 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the pivot support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262 and can be inserted into the pivot support hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263. The holder barrel of is formed. The outer diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the bearing hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder barrel into the bearing hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263, the rotary lamp can be turned. The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the right rotation lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotation lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 262a of the rotation portion base 262, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotation lamp base gear 263 and the shaft support hole 263a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotation portion holder 267. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotation lamp base 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotation portion holder 267. Further, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 267 is provided with a substrate support unit for supporting the upper end of the right rotational position detection substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 262b of the rotary unit base 262 on the lower surface thereof. The right rotation position detection substrate 271 is nipped and fixed by the rotating portion base 262 and the rotating portion holder 267.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotary lamp 264 of the right rotary lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotary lamp 244 of the left rotary lamp unit 240, and is a transparent disc-like member disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 263. The rotary lamp lens 272, the reflector 273 disposed under the rotary lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 263, and the reflector cover 274 covering the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotary lamp 264 is plated on the surface with metallic luster, and has a disk-like base 273a, an opening 273b bored in the center of the base 273a, and a base 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d which can extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 263.

  In the rotary lamp 264, the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 272 faces from the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotary lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 273d into the insertion hole 272a and fixing the mounting boss 273d to the rotary lamp base gear 263, the rotary lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotary lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is supposed to be held fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotary lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on a side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c in the reflector 273 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is the front side from the rotary lamp attachment opening 221h at the center in the horizontal direction of the reflector base 221. The rotary lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be projected to the same position and coaxially with the opening 281 a of the rotary lamp unit base 281 is fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281 A substantially circular annular rotary unit base 282, a rotary lamp base gear 283 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 282 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 282 and suspended from the rotary lamp base gear 283 And the rotation of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotation lamp base gear 283. A central rotary lamp motor 285 disposed on an axis line on the rear side of the lamp attachment opening 221h and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281 so that the rotary shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 fixed to the rotation shaft 285 a of the central rotation light motor 285 and engaged with the rotation light base gear 283, covering the entire rotation light base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 from above and The rotary unit holder 287 is supported in cooperation with the rotary unit base 282 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary unit holder 287 coaxially with the rotary unit holder 287 coaxially with the rotary lamp base gear 283 and fixed to the rotary lamp unit base 281. And a central rotary lamp substrate 288 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light toward the lamp 284.

  In addition, the central rotary light unit 280 includes a rotary light unit cover 289 covering the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 for detecting the rotational position of the rotary light 284 and a central rotational position detection sensor 290 And a central rotational position detection substrate 291.

  The rotary lamp unit base 281 of the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a mounting stepped portion 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a in the upper surface thereof, and descends downward at a position rearward of the opening 281a. A mounting portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d disposed on the rear side of the opening 281a and fixing the central rotary light motor 285 are provided. The part base 282 is fitted. Further, the rotational portion base 282 detects a central rotational position at a predetermined position of an axial support port 282 a having a small diameter coaxially with the opening 281 a of the rotary lamp unit base 281 and an outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 283 outside the outer periphery. A substrate support portion 282b supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; a wire locking portion 282c disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and locking a wire connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear whose outer diameter is larger than the shaft support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282, extends downward from the lower surface, and is a shaft support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 283a that is smaller in diameter than the gear barrel and penetrates vertically, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And 283b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the spindle support 282 a of the rotary portion base 282, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the spindle support 282 a. A shaft 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the shaft support 282a. Further, in the central rotary light unit 280, the rotational position of the rotary light 284 can be detected by detecting the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotary light base gear 283 by the central rotational position detection sensor 290. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the axial support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282 and can be inserted into the axial support hole 283 a of the rotary lamp base gear 283. The holder barrel of is formed. The outer diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the bearing hole 283a of the rotary lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder barrel into the bearing hole 283a of the rotary lamp base gear 283, the rotary lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the central rotary lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotary lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 282 a of the rotary portion base 282, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 283 and the shaft support hole 283 a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotary unit holder 287. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotary lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotary unit holder 287. Further, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit for supporting the upper end of the central rotational position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotary unit base 282 on the lower surface thereof. The central rotational position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed by the rotating portion base 282 and the rotating portion holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the size of the rotary light 294 of the central rotary unit 280 is set to an intermediate size between the rotary light 244 of the left rotary light unit 240 and the rotary light 264 of the right rotary light unit 260, A transparent disk-shaped rotary lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotary lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 covering the The reflector 293 of the rotary lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening 293b bored in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 283.

  The rotary lamp 284 is configured such that the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 292 faces from the opening 293 b of the reflector 293, and the rotary lamp lens 292 is formed with an insertion hole 292 a through which the mounting boss 293 d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 293 d into the insertion hole 292 a and fixing the mounting boss 293 d to the rotary lamp base gear 283, the rotary lamp lens 292 is narrow between the rotary lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is supposed to be held fixed. The reflector cover 294 of the rotary lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on the side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c in the reflector 293 294a is formed.

  By the way, as shown in the figure, the central rotary lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of side surfaces formed on the front three sides of the rotary lamp unit cover 289 between the rotary unit holder 287 and the rotary lamp unit cover 289. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted from the rear side into the notch 289a, and a cover decoration substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted on the surface It is further equipped. The lower end of the cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are respectively supported by the grooved lens support portion 287 a and the substrate support portion 287 b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287. The upper end is supported by the grooved lens support portion and the substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, by emitting the LED of the cover decoration substrate 296, the front end of the rotary light unit cover 289 of the central rotary light unit 280 can be lighted and decorated.

[1-2 C. Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 40 is a front perspective view of the pan unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the pan unit. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the disc back plate of the pan unit removed, and FIG. 45 is a rear perspective view showing the disc back plate of the pan unit and the ball holding unit removed. Further, FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the pan unit divided into main component parts from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the rear. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body in the dish unit from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removing mechanism in the pan unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball extracting mechanism in the pan unit from behind. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the pan unit with the operation button unit substrate of the operation button unit removed. FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the pan unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion and the joint unit constituting the handle device, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Furthermore, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting and launching device provided on the main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a striking-ballistic launch apparatus. Further, FIG. 62A is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls in the dish unit, and FIG. 62B is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of gaming balls in the dish unit. It is. Further, FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a laterally long ball inlet and a storage pan in the pan unit.

  The dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can be paid out from a winning ball unit 800 described later and can store gaming balls, and a hit ball launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 170 the stored gaming balls. Can be supplied to As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plate unit 300 is open at the top and the back and covers the plate 310 having a storage plate 311 capable of storing a predetermined amount of gaming balls, and covers the front of the plate 310. A first ball removing mechanism capable of discharging all of the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 of the plate unit main body 320, the plate unit main body 320, and the plate back plate 340 covering the rear surface of the plate 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage plate of the tray 310 and discharging it, and a ball lending machine (CR unit not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 And an operation button unit 370 fixed to the upper surface of the dish 310 and operable by the player according to the gaming state (playing situation), and the dish unit main body 320 below the dish 310. dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower speaker 391 larger than the side speakers 121 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right corner of the plate unit main body 320 It mainly includes a handle base 303 disposed, and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover which covers electric wiring connected to the dish electric decoration board 336 in the dish unit main body 320 described later. Further, as shown in the drawing, on the left side in a front view of the back plate 340, a lower left decorative substrate 190 for emitting and decorating the left end of the plate unit main body 320 is disposed.

  The ball unit 301 in the plate unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the plate back plate 340 substantially at the center in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and is arranged beside the ball button 301a and the ball button 301a. A return button 301b and a loan remaining indicator (not shown) disposed between the rental ball button 301a and the return button 301b and displaying the number of remaining cash and prepaid cards on the ball lending machine are provided. In this ball lending unit 301, after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and pressing the ball lending button 301a, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be put into the bowl unit 300 Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the storage tray 311, and when the return button 301b is pressed, the remaining amount of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder or prepaid card inserted is returned There is.

  The main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the plate unit 300 are used when the player participates in the game content (game effect) performed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like provided on the game board 4. It is an operation.

[1-2C-1. Dish]
First, as shown in the drawing, the tray 310 in the tray unit 300 has a storage tray 311 of a predetermined depth which is approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view and is opened upward and backward, and in the storage tray 311. A second ball outlet 312 disposed at a predetermined position in the bottom and penetrating in the vertical direction, continuing from the right end of the storage tray 312 to the storage tray 311 and being disposed downstream of the third inclined surface 311 c The first ball pulling path 313 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) capable of guiding the game ball to almost directly below the second ball pulling opening 312 and the upper right side of the storage plate 311 in a substantially rhombic shape The operation button unit mounting recess 314 to which the button unit 370 can be attached, and the first ball releasing button 351 of the first ball removing mechanism 350 is opened in a substantially circular shape on the rear side of the operation button unit mounting recess 314 Ball withdrawal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage dish 311 in the dish 310 is disposed on the front of the ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a which is lowered toward the right and front in plan view, and the right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b which is continuous with the rear of the head and lowers toward the right and the rear, and a right end of the second inclined surface 311b is continuous toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340 An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d which is continuous with a front portion of the right end of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end of the second inclined surface 311b and which is lowered toward the right and the second inclined surface 311b; And a fifth inclined surface 311e which is continuous with the right end of the four inclined surfaces 311d and which becomes lower toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43 and the like).

  In addition, the storage plate 311 is disposed between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c, with the partition wall 311f rising upward from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e and incapable of crossing the gaming ball. And a sixth inclined surface 311g which is lowered toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is disposed between the first inclined surface 311 a and the second inclined surface 311 b. Also, the second ball outlet 312 is normally in a closed state by the second ball extracting shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of the present embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half of the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as illustrated. The second inclined surface 311 b has a pentagonal shape such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1⁄4 of the length of the storage tray 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311 c The third inclined surface 311 c has a horizontally long zoning shape in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the fourth inclined surface 311 d has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the length of the second inclined surface 311 b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311 b. Furthermore, the fifth inclined surface 311 e extends from the left end to a right direction from the left end by a predetermined distance substantially in parallel with the third inclined surface 311 c and then extends obliquely toward the rear third inclined surface 311 c The partition wall 311f extends along the third inclined surface 311c with the front end (right end) extending rearward toward the right end of the rear end, as a whole, as a whole. It is formed in reverse character shape, and the partition wall 311f is formed along the rear side end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage tray 311 includes the left end and the front end of the first inclined surface 311 a, the front end of the fourth inclined surface 311 d, and the front end of the fifth inclined surface (right end The storage tray 311 is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the tray 310 by the outer peripheral wall 311h. Further, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that is directed forward as it goes to the right at the front end of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the gaming ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 onto the first inclined surface 311a abuts against the position facing the ball inlet 341 on the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. It distributes on five inclined surfaces 311d. In addition, the fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope where the gaming balls having flowed into the storage plate 311 from the ball inlet 341 can be climbed up, and the direction thereof is after climbing to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e. To change in the direction (left direction) of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example allows the gaming ball, which has flowed in from the ball inlet 341, to once divert to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flows to the third inclined surface 311c serving as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g of the storage tray 311 has a steep inclination angle as compared with the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of gaming balls are arranged on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. The ball supply port 342 can be easily aligned in a line in the left-right direction. A stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls, and to charge the static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion descends downward and descends downward to the rear right side. It is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball removal path 313, and by being continuous with the first ball removal path 313, a flow path that is folded back in the left-right direction is formed. At the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removal path 313, the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. The ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340 is opened as desired for the slide 356. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down the third inclined surface 311 c are distributed to the ball supply port 342 by blocking the flow down by the first ball removal slide 356.

  In the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 310, the first ball is placed on the side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction, and a first ball to be described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313 with the slide groove 316a interposed therebetween. A flange portion 316 b for locking the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Dish unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the plate unit main body 320 in the plate unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the plate unit 300, covers the front surface of the plate body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and backward. A box-shaped main body portion 321 is provided. The main body portion 321 is configured such that about 3/4 of the left side in a front view bulges forward, and the lower speaker unit 390 is housed inside (rear side) of the bulged portion It has become. Further, the main body portion 321 has a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 at the center right of the front surface of the bulging portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball release button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed to penetrate therethrough. Furthermore, in the main body portion 321, an oval handle base attachment port 321d for attaching the handle base 303 to the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e disposed above the handle base attachment port 321d and facing a cylinder lock 1010 described later. And a duct-shaped duct opening 321f that opens on the right side surface of a portion bulging forward on the left side of the handle base attachment port d, and a compartment-shaped ball discharge port 321g that opens to a lower portion substantially in the left-right direction. Have.

  In the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300, the front back plate 322 which covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body 321 from the front side, and the speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 A plate-like right cover 323 arranged on the front corresponding to the speaker opening 321a and made of punching metal and cut off at four corners, and arranged substantially in the center of the front of the right cover 323 smaller than the right cover 323 and having a metallic luster on the surface Of the plate-shaped right ornament base 324 which has been plated, the right ornament 325 which is disposed approximately at the center of the front of the right ornament base 324 and is smaller than the right ornament base 324 and the main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-shaped plate which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321 and which is made of punching metal and whose four corners are cut off The left cover 326 and a plate-like left decoration base 327 which is disposed approximately at the center of the front of the left cover 326 and smaller in size than the left cover 326 and plated with metallic luster, and the front of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape which is disposed substantially at the center and which is smaller than the left decoration base 327 and has a plate-like left decoration 328 and the periphery of the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321 And a front main body 329 of the A plurality of through holes 322a penetrating the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 so as to be seen are formed in the front back plate 322 of the plate unit main body 320, and the through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decoration base 323 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be favorably transmitted to the outside through (not shown).

  Further, the plate unit main body 320 of this example is fixed to the front left of the main body 321 with the main left decoration base 330 fixed on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190 and the front of the main left decoration base 330 and plated with metallic luster It further has a main body left decoration 331 subjected to processing. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can emit light and decoration by the LED 190 a of the lower left decoration substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321, and a duct notch 333a where the duct cover faces from the surface; It further includes a main body right decoration 333 which covers the entire right side surface of the portion bulging forward in the portion 321 and is plated with a metallic luster on the surface.

  Further, the pan unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a disposed along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 having a metallic luster plated surface. An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guiding part 335a disposed in the main body part 321 below the main body decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body decoration 334, and arranged under the upper decoration lens 335 And a dished electric decoration board 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED 336a of the dish electric decoration board 336, the decoration on the main body decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be lighted and decorated through the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, etc., the back plate 340 of the plate unit 300 is entirely formed in a horizontally long plate shape, disposed in the upper left corner in a front view and having a horizontally long segment shape in the front-rear direction The ball inlet 341 penetrating through, the ball supply port 342 arranged at a predetermined distance away from the ball inlet 341 in the lower right direction and through which gaming balls can pass, and the rear in communication with the ball inlet 341 Mainly equipped with a square cylinder-shaped award ball contact 343 extending to the end. The ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340 is opened toward the inside of the storage plate 311 of the plate 310 as shown in FIG. 43 and the like, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311 a of the storage plate 311 The length is approximately the same as the length of the Further, the ball supply port 342 is disposed at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c of the storage tray 311 at a position corresponding to the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. In addition, the prize ball contact 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341, and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. It has a length, and the rear end penetrates the prize ball passage port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 to communicate with the outlet 921 of the lower end (front end) of the flow lower end (front end) of the front guiding passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  Further, the back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the winning ball communication ball 343 is reserved a predetermined amount rearward with respect to the ball inlet 341, and between the ball flow hole 341 and the winning ball communication ball 343. Further, the ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 which extends along the entire length in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341 and through which gaming balls can flow. The game ball having circulated the prize ball communication box 343 can be made to flow into the downstream side of the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311 by the shelf portion 344.

  Furthermore, the back plate 340 corresponds to the ball removal path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the ball flow path opening 345 penetrating in a substantially L shape and the ball flow at the upper left of the ball removal path opening 345 in front view And a latch opening 346 disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and through which the rear end of the latch unit 366 of the second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted. Between the ball insertion port 347 disposed in the upper right corner and penetrating in a substantially sectioned shape in a front view and the ball inlet 341 and the wiring insertion port 346, the ball unit 301 is disposed on the upper side of the back plate 340 And a ball unit mounting portion 348 for the game.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, as shown in FIG. 44, FIG. 45, FIG. 50, etc., the first ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 includes a first ball removing button 351 pressed by the player and a first ball removing button 351. A first ball release button base 352 slidably supported in the vertical direction and inserted from below to the first ball removal button mounting port 315 of the bowl 310, and a plate on the top of the first ball removal button base 352 Supported by the first ball release button decoration 353 to which the first ball release button 351 is fixed so as to protrude upward with the body 310 interposed, the first ball release button decoration 353 and the first ball release button base 352 Shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball drawing mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 311 which is the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in a front view of the lower end of the first ball drawing button 351 354 times Inverted L-shaped first ball-extracting crank 355 in which one end is brought into contact with the lower end of the first ball-extracting button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first ball-extracted crank 355 The first lower end of the plate body 311 is slidably supported substantially in the left-right direction by the first lower end mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 311 and the third inclined surface 311 c of the disc body 310 and the first open path 313 And a first ball removing spring 357 for urging the first ball removing crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 can be slid in the left-right direction by being inserted into the slide groove 316 a of the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 in the disc body 310. In this state, by rotating the first ball removing crank 355, the lower end on the other end side of the first ball removing crank 355 is slid in the left-right direction. When the first ball removing slide 356 slides in the left-right direction, the tip end portion advances and retracts into the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish 310 and the first ball removing path 313. The game ball having flowed through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342 by advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, and the flow path is set back from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls distributed in the third inclined surface 311 c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball release spring 357 is engaged with the first ball release crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball release button 351 with the pivot shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A ridge portion 355a is formed. The first ball release spring 357 has its upper end locked to the flange 355a of the first ball release crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball release mechanism support 316 in the disc body 310. By stopping the first ball removing crank 355, the position at which the first ball removing slide 356 closes the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313, and the first ball removing button 351 is the most It can be biased to turn in the direction of the raised position.

  In this first ball removing mechanism 350, when the player presses the first ball removing button 351, the first ball removing crank 355 is in contact with the lower end portion of the first ball removing button 351 via the contact pin 355b. Rotates against the biasing force of the first ball release spring 357 so that one end moves downward, and the other end moves away from the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removal path 313. Move to Then, the first ball removing slide 356 moves along with the lower end of the first ball removing crank 355 in a direction away from the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removing path 313, and the tip of the first ball removing slide 356 The third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball pulling path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from within the flow path of the boundary portion, and all gaming balls in the third inclined surface 311 c, ie, the storage plate 311, are It can discharge | emit outside via the removal path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removing button 351 is released, the first ball removing crank 355 is rotated by the biasing force of the first ball removing spring 357, and the first ball removing button 351 is raised, and the first ball is released. The tip of the extraction slide 356 advances into the flow path of the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball extraction path 313 to close the flow path, and on the third inclined surface 311 c (in the storage tray 311). The game balls can be supplied to the ball striking device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removing mechanism 360 in the plate unit 300 is a second ball projecting forward from the second ball removing button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the plate unit main body 320. A second ball removal slide 362 supported by a lower speaker unit 390 (described later) slidably supported by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and a front and rear of the second ball removal slide 362. Rod-shaped second ball removing crank 363 which is pivotally supported about the shaft extending in the left and right direction by the lower speaker unit 390 by the lower speaker unit 390 and the disc body 310 by the rotation of the second ball removing crank 363 Pivoting about an axis extending vertically between a closed position closing the second ball outlet 312 and an open position opening the second ball outlet 312 A second ball release spring 364 for urging the second ball release shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball release opening 312 is closed, and a second ball release spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball release shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal opening 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball release shutter 364 A second ball-scissoring base 367 having a portion 367a and fixed to the lower side of the tray 310, slidably holding the rear end of the second ball-sliding slide 362, and supporting the latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removing mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) rotatably supporting the second ball removing crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removing slide 362 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a which is opened upward at the rear end and into which the lower end of the second ball removing crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes backward from the rear end An engagement protrusion 362 b engageable with the engagement claw 366 a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removing crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion thereof is inserted from above into the transmission groove 362 a of the second ball removing slide 362 and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390. When the second ball removing slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362 a, and the second ball removing crank 363 rotates. The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 is moved in the opposite direction to the lower end portion.

  In addition, the second ball removing shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removing slide 362 as shown, and the second ball removing port 312 of the disc body 310 and the opening 367 a of the second ball removing base 367 are A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) planar viewable closeable plate-shaped closing portion 364a and a rod-shaped buttock extending from the closing portion 364a to one side in the left-right direction (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51) And 364b, and is formed in a substantially P shape as a whole. In addition, while the tip of the collar portion 364b is pivotally supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction by the disc body 310 and the second ball drain base 367, the second ball lift shutter 364 is rotatably supported by the collar portion 364b. An upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 abuts on a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction on the rear side of the second ball removal crank. Further, the front end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is engaged with the rear base end portion of the collar portion 364 b of the second ball release shutter 364. Although the illustration is omitted, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked to the locking boss which is suspended downward from the lower surface of the disc body 310. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to be in the closed position (the position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal opening 312.

  In addition, the second ball removing base 367 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 can pass the upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 between the opening 367 a and the position at which the second ball removing shutter 364 is pivotally supported. The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 axially supported on the lower side of the second ball removing base 367 through the slit 367 b is provided with a slit 367 b extending in the front-rear direction, the upper surface of the second ball removing base 367 It can come in contact with the collar portion 364b of the second ball release shutter 364 disposed at the In addition, the second ball removing base 367 is formed in a shallow plate shape as shown in the figure, and can be formed with the plate body 310 so as to form a storage space for storing the second ball removing shutter 364. There is. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball release shutter 364 is smaller and lower than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the second ball release shutter 364 is pivoted to make the second ball release opening 312 The game ball is prevented from entering between the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 even when the is in the open state.

  In the second ball removing mechanism 360 of this embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removing button 361 projecting forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removing slide 362 slides backward, and The second ball removing crank 363 is rotated such that the lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 is moved rearward while being guided by the transmission groove 362 a of the double ball removing slide 362. Then, by rotating the second ball removing crank 363, the upper end moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end, and the second ball removing shutter 364 abuts on the upper end of the second ball removing crank 363. However, against the biasing force of the second ball removing spring 365, the closing portion 364a is pivoted to move forward about the tip of the collar portion 364b. Thus, when the closing portion 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the disc 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 is opened. The gaming ball stored on the upstream side of the tray unit 300 is discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball opening 312.

  The second ball removing mechanism 360 of the present embodiment is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second ball removing button 361 is pushed to engage the engaging projections 362b at the rear end of the second ball removing slide 362 with the latch unit 366 as a pair. When it abuts between the engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a close and engage so as to sandwich the engaging projection 362b, and the second ball removing spring 365 resists the biasing force of the second ball removing spring A state in which the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in an open (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball outlet shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 is opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusion 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 The closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 can be returned to the position for closing the second ball removal opening 312.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the plate unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310 in the plate unit 300 as shown in FIGS. A pair of an octagonal main button 371 with four corners cut off in a plan view and a left subbutton 372L and a right subbutton 372R in a plan view disposed symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371, respectively. The sub button 372, the operation button unit base 373 which holds the main button 371 and the sub button 372 slidably in the vertical direction and is inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and Plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface, and operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  Further, the operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 for detecting the operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L for detecting the operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub for detecting the operation of the right sub button 372R. And a button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub-button sensor 377L, and the right sub-button sensor 377L are each a photo sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and are fixed at predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375. .

  The operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a main button receiving recess 373a which has a substantially rhombic shape in plan view and can receive the main button 371 from above, and a main button receiving portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b formed on the inner peripheral surface and extending in the vertical direction, the upper part of which is opened to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed on the bottom of the main button recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d for guiding light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 which is opened with a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a and which is disposed below, The button 372 is formed at a diagonal corner of the major axis with a pair of sub-button receiving recesses 373e that can receive the button 372 from above. Plate-like top plate portion 373g forming the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and plate-like drooping so as to surround the outer periphery from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g A side wall portion 373 h is mainly provided.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is opened by the top plate portion 373g and the side wall portion 373h, and a plurality of main button accommodation concave portions 373a are formed at predetermined positions of the top plate portion 373g. Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub button accommodation recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. Further, in the operation button unit base 373, the main button housing recess portion 373a is formed thick in a portion where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are enhanced. At the same time, the respective light guide openings 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a are formed in a cylindrical shape which is long in the vertical direction, respectively, even by the outer peripheral wall of these cylindrical light guide openings 373d. The main button receiving recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 forms an upper surface of the main button 371 and supports the main button lens 371a having translucency, and the main button lens 371a, and a cylinder whose upper and lower sides are opened. -Shaped main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder which wraps around the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via a mounting screw 371d And 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 abuts on the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end abuts on the bottom surface of the main button recess 373a of the operation button unit base 373 The main button spring 371 is biased to move upward.

  The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape whose plan view is octagonal and the lower surface is open, and the front surface side is smooth, while a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back surface side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be widely diffused, and the entire surface of the main button 371 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, the main button base 371b has an outer shape on the upper end side of the octagonal shape similar to that of the main button lens 371 as shown in the figure, but a conical shape in which the lower end side narrows downward from the substantially middle part in the vertical direction. The lower end portion of the operation button base 373 extends downward from the opening 373c formed in the bottom of the main button receiving recess 373a and directly above the LED 375a group disposed at the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. It can be located in The main button base 371b includes main locking claws 371f extending downward from two opposing sides, and a plurality of vertically extending guide ribs inserted into the guide grooves 373b of the operation button unit base 373. It has 371g. When the main locking claw 371 f of the main button base 371 b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373 a of the operation button unit base 373, the main button 371 is a main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button receiving recess 373a from coming out by the biasing force of the key.

  Furthermore, the main button base 371b is configured to be able to attach the vibrating body 371c to the inside of one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and at the portion where the vibrating body 371c is attached. Inside, a detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed.

  When the main button 371 in this example is pressed downward against the biasing force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371h of the main button base 371b is between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the main button sensor 376. The operation is detected by the main button sensor 376. Further, when the main button 371 detects an operation by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is operated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. As well as being able to recognize that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the main button 371. A light shielding plate 375b is attached to the operation button unit substrate 375 for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to the light from the mounted LED 375a.

  Further, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 supports the sub button lens 372 a having a substantially isosceles right-angled triangle shape in plan view and the light transmitting property, and the sub button lens 372 a on the upper surface of home base shape in plan view. A sub-button base 372 b accommodated in the sub-button accommodation recess 373 e of the operation button unit base 373 and disposed below the sub-button lens 372 a between the sub-button base 372 b and the bottom surface of the sub-button accommodation recess 373 e And a sub-button spring 372c that biases the button base 372b in a direction to raise it. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 has sub-locking claws 372d hanging downward from the back and forth across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-like guide wall 372e hanging downward from the long side of the home base shape. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall 372e.

  In the sub button 372, the sub locking claw 372d is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button accommodation recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. By locking 372 d to the locking portion, it is possible to prevent the sub button 372 from coming out of the sub button accommodation recess 373 e by the biasing force of the sub button spring 372 c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the biasing force of the sub button spring 372 c, the detection piece 372 f of the sub button base 372 b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377 An operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape having a substantially rhombic plan view shape, and the main button lens 371 a of the main button 371 and two sub buttons 372 An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372 can pass is formed, and a translucent decorative member lens 374b is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . A mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed at a diagonal corner of the long axis, and the mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373 are formed. The operation button unit 370 is attached and fixed to the plate 310 by a predetermined attachment screw. In the present example, a screw concealment 378 that hides the two attachment holes 374c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and the rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is less likely to be broken even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. Further, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or a failure occurs. , Can be easily removed and replaced from the upper side of the plate body 310. Furthermore, since the lower part of the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later via the plate body 310, impact resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 etc. The property is further enhanced, and not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire plate unit 300 is less likely to be damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 has a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speakers 121 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100; A box-like speaker box 392 is mainly provided, which holds the speaker 391 at a position on the front right side in front view and on the rear side of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 of the dish unit main body 320. The lower speaker unit 390 of this embodiment is a bass reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the opening 392a, and it is possible to emit more deep bass to the diameter of the lower speaker 391 It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a position desired for the duct opening 321f of the main body portion 321 in the plate unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 by the vibration of the lower speaker 391 is It comes in and out through the duct opening 321f. In addition, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by the drive (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 so that the flow of air (wind) from the lower speaker 391 can be applied to the player's hand, so that the player can feel and feel unprecedented. There is. By sending an acoustic signal with a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321 f, and is matched with the vibrating body 371 c of the main button 371. This makes it possible to enjoy tactile effects that are not found in conventional gaming machines.

  Further, the speaker box 392 is disposed downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction port 312 of the dish 310 on the rear surface thereof, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction port 312 A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the played game ball to the lower part of the substantially center of the speaker box 392 in the left-right direction. The ball removal path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape whose rear is opened, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball removal path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the plate unit 300 The back side is closed by a ball removal path cover 191 which closes the ball removal path opening 111 of 110. In addition, the game balls distributed in the ball releasing path 393 are discharged downward from the dish unit 300 from the ball discharge port 321g of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320.

  Further, the speaker box 392 includes a second ball slide holding hole 394 for slidably holding the front end of the second ball slide 362 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360 in the upper left side in a front view, And a second ball pulling mechanism support portion 395 disposed on the rear side of the double ball pulling slide holding hole 394 and supporting a second ball pulling mechanism support 368 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360. The second ball removing mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removing slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removing mechanism support portion 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 and the like, the handle device 400 in the pan unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower surface of the open side of the door frame 5, and a door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. The joint unit 180 is assembled with the back surface of the joint member 180 and cooperates with a rotary shaft 415 that rotates in response to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 410, and changes the rotary motion of the rotary shaft 415 into a sliding motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is mounted on the handlebar support cylinder portion of the cylindrical handle base 303 so as to project forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. It is inserted and fixed to 303a. The handle support cylindrical portion 303 a is formed so as to be inclined toward the outside (right side) in a plan view as viewed from the top of the pachinko machine 1, and hence the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylindrical portion 303 a. Also in a plan view, the door frame is inclined outward (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) to open the door frame It will be attached and fixed to 5. As described above, by inclining the operation handle portion 410 outward in plan view, the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410, and there is an advantage that the user can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation. In the present embodiment, as described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an angle, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilient force of the bat firing device 650 is A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. In addition, after the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support cylindrical portion 303a, the operation handle portion 410 is formed by connecting the handle support cylindrical portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) with a screw or the like. It can not be pulled out from the handle support cylindrical portion 303a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported between the front grip member 412, the rear grip member 413, the front grip member 412, and the rear grip member 413. An operation member 414, a linear cylindrical rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 which is fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. In the rear grip member 413, a small diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylindrical portion 303a and a large diameter portion at the front of the small diameter portion are integrally formed, and an axial through hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 penetrates It is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotary shaft 415 penetrated to the shaft through hole 418 through the bearing bush 417 penetrates the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 fixed to the front side of the rear grip member 413 and The shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center is fitted.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a protrusion for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 and a mounting hole (both not shown) are provided, and the single-shot button 421 is swingably supported. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and the touch sensor 420, the firing stop switch 422 and the one-shot button 421 are attached to the protrusions, the mounting holes and the swing pin. Then, in the state where they are attached, a wiring through cylinder having a wiring through hole 419 formed on the side of the axial through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422. It derives from the portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal board 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414, a biasing spring 425 is provided so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415, and this biasing spring 425 always always rotates the rotation operation member 414. It is made to return to the position of. Furthermore, the switch contact convex portion 427 is provided to protrude on the outside of the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414, and when the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 425, the switch contact The convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422, and when the turning operation member 414 is turned by the player, the switch contact protrusion 427 is the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 Let go away and turn it on. In addition, since the single-shot button 421 can be swung with the firing stop switch 422 ON, pressing the single-shot button 421 enables the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to be turned OFF. ing.

  Conductive plating is applied to the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414, and when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414, the touch sensor 420 detects the contact. Then, when the player turns the rotation operation member 414 so that the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects a touch, the shooting motor 695 (see FIG. 91) of the bat firing device 650 described later. ) Is rotationally driven.

  Further, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a ball shape, and is brought into contact with the cam of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later. The portion 182 d is pressed to slide in one direction. And in this embodiment, the inclined attachment in plan view of the operation handle portion 410 as described above is achieved by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 to the handle support cylindrical portion 303 a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110 c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182c of the slide body 182. In this case, the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5 by attaching the operation handle portion 410 in an inclined manner in plan view, but the cam engagement concave portion 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Because of the space width, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engagement recess 182c. In the storage state, as shown in FIG. 59A, the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the cam-like cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is supposed to be located in space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the above-described state, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 rotates accordingly, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), The slide body 182 is in one direction (right side direction in the case of FIG. 59) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and one outer surface of the cam 416 (the outer surface of the rotation front). Slide to That is, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 is converted to the sliding movement of the slide body 182. Therefore, in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. 59A, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 and the end side of the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 in the advancing direction The rotation results in a distance S2 larger than the distance S1. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by the distance of "S2-S1". Then, the slide movement of the slide projection 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650, as shown in FIGS. 57, 60, 61, and the biasing spring 684 of the ball striking device 650. By adjusting the tension of FIG. 91), the strength of the biasing force of the hitting ball 687 can be adjusted to obtain the resilience of the player's desired batting ball. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the striking device 650 will be described in detail after the description of the striking device 650.

  The wire drawn from the inside of the operation handle portion 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through cylinder portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c is axially supported along the lower surface of the back surface of the door frame 5. And is then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the dispensing control substrate 1186 that is collectively attached to the substrate unit 1100 attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Operation effect of dish unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 62 and 63. In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 described later flow into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 through the full ball unit 900 and the prize ball contact 343 of the back plate 340. The gaming balls having flowed in from the ball inlet 341 first flow into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side in front view are lower, and the gaming balls having flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 are along the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. It comes in contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341 of the outer peripheral wall 311 h surrounding the front outer periphery of the storage tray 311. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved shape with respect to the surface of the plate back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the gaming ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the gaming ball, which flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and is reflected to the right by the outer peripheral wall 311h, passes the fourth inclined surface 311d and enters the fifth inclined surface 311e. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side in the front view, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle of the fifth inclined surface 311e is such that the gaming ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a can be uphill. The game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper part (right end in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while going up the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is divided by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f from the front side to the rear side around the right end, and the gaming ball entering the fifth inclined surface 311e is around it The fifth inclined surface 311e is returned to the fourth inclined surface 311d side disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to substantially follow the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f surrounding the.

  The gaming ball having entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e circulates to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d. It enters from the inclined surface 311 b to the right third inclined surface 311 c and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the plate back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311 c. It has become. That is, the gaming balls having flowed into the storage plate 311 from the ball supply port 341 do not directly go from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e through the fourth inclined surface 311d, the ball is led to the third inclined surface 311c through the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. It is possible to divert the game ball which has flowed in from 341.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored by effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls stored in a state of little storage like the conventional pachinko machine may block the ball inlet 341 In the game, the game is interrupted because the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is activated to stop the payout of the game ball or the game ball launch operation on the ball launcher 650 is stopped. Can be well prevented.

  By the way, many gaming balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, and the ball inlet 341 is closed by the gaming balls stored, and the prize ball communication ball 343 of the plate back plate 340 and the prize When the gaming balls stay in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 operates to stop the payout of the gaming balls from the winning ball unit 800 or Since the player can stop the game ball firing operation on the ball launcher 650, and the game can not but be stopped when the ball launcher 650's firing operation is stopped, the player holds When the game balls stored in the plate 311 become an appropriate amount, the first ball release button 351 and the second ball release button 361 are operated to arrange the game balls from the storage plate 311 below the plate unit 300 Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In the present embodiment, when the full tank switch 916 is activated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball firing device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game balls from the inside of the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pressing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the plate unit 300. Slide to release the closing between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball releasing path 313, and allow the gaming ball of the third inclined surface 311 c to flow down to the first ball extracting path 313, It can discharge | emit from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 via the extraction | drawer path 393. By operating the first ball release button 351, the gaming balls can be removed from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c at the lowest position in the storage tray 311, so that all gaming balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. It can be done. However, in the ball removal by the operation of the first ball removal button 351, since the gaming balls are aligned in a line on the third inclined surface 311c, there is a problem that it takes time for the ball removal.

  Then, when the second ball removing button 361 disposed on the front left side of the plate unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removing shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 is moved and the second in the storage plate 311 is moved. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the gaming ball on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312, and the ball unit from the ball outlet 321g via the ball outlet path 393 It is possible to discharge below 300 (see FIG. 62 (B)). The second ball outlet 312 is an opening several times larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, as shown in the figure, so that many gaming balls can be quickly discharged at one time. Therefore, the presence of the two buttons of the first ball release button 351 and the second ball release button 361 allows the player to select the length of time for which the ball is to be released. Also, when a big hit occurs during the game, a large amount of balls will be paid out to the plate unit 300, and if this is left to continue the game, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the plate unit 300 (see FIG. Although the payout operation is stopped due to the function of 111) being stopped or the bullet action is stopped and there is a big hit, there is a possibility that the hitting action of the game ball is stopped and the game can not be continued In such a case, by operating the second ball release button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed and the supply of the balls to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit is maintained. It is possible to continue.

  Further, in the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removing button 361 is operated, the second ball removing shutter 364 is held at the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removing mechanism 360, and the second ball removing port A state 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and the game balls on the first inclined surface 311 a are almost gone, the game balls flowing from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. And the second inclined surface 311b on the downstream side of the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the second ball outlet 312 while reflecting on the outer peripheral wall 311h and circulating in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311 c is consumed by the firing operation of the ball launcher 650, the second inclined surface 311 b, as long as the game ball flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage tray 311, The gaming ball is supplied to the third sloping surface 311 c via the fourth sloping surface 311 d and the fifth sloping surface 311 e, and the firing operation of the gaming ball is stopped to increase the number of gaming balls that have flowed in to the third sloping surface 311 c. Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, it is possible to always secure a certain amount of gaming balls in the storage tray 311 and continue the game even with the second ball outlet 312 open. ing. That is, even in a state in which the game balls are continuously paid out during the big hit game etc., the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of the game balls in the storage tray 311.

  In the plate unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage plate 311 of the plate 310 has a bottom surface continuous with the first inclined surface 311a, the second inclined surface 311b, and the third inclined surface 311c. While it becomes lower toward the right direction (the ball supply port 342) when viewed visually, the ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340 is a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction Therefore, a step is supposed to be formed between the bottom of the reservoir plate 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in front view. ing. The difference in level between the bottom of the storage plate 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 is almost uniform at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341 There is also a slightly higher step. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the winning ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As the difference in level is small, the potential energy (falling energy) of the gaming ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is also small, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is broken. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the storage amount of gaming balls in the storage tray 311 increases and many gaming balls are stored also on the first inclined surface 311 a, the ball entrance 341 from the ball inlet 341 The game balls flowing into the storage plate 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 from the side, and the forces in the lateral direction acted on the respective game balls pushed the game balls together. It becomes a state. In this state, when the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the gaming balls are arranged in the vicinity of the upstream of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the gaming balls are pushed against each other to reduce the fluidity of the gaming balls and clogging may occur. However, in this example, as described above, the ball inlet 341 is in the left-right direction Since it is made into the extended rectangular shape, the game ball from prize ball contact 343 can flow directly into the 2nd slope 311b through shelf part 344, and can supply a game sphere to the 3rd slope 311c. (See FIG. 62 (B)).

  In addition, since the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the gaming ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 at the right side of the center of the ball inlet 341 in the lateral direction, The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and it is suppressed that the game balls push each other in the lateral direction, and the fluidity of the game balls is It is possible to prevent the lowering, and the game balls flowing in from the top (especially the game balls in contact with the front of the back plate 340) are urged to move in the lateral direction, naturally It is possible to eliminate clogging of the ball (see FIG. 63).

  Thus, even if the amount of gaming balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases, the storage tray 300 of this example has the gaming balls paid out from the winning ball unit 800 as a shelf of the ball inlet 341 of the horizontally long. Since the game balls are made to flow to the upper side of the gaming balls stored in the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, clogging of the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 can be favorably prevented from occurring. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player by continuing the game without worrying about the game balls in the tray 311.

[1-2 D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit disassembled and shown from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the figure, the glass unit 450 has an opening larger than the game window 101, and is formed of a synthetic resin, and has an annular octagonal unit frame 451 and two front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 451. A transparent glass plate 452 and a strip-shaped glass decorative substrate 453 disposed along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a open on the rear side and into which the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b opening from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 in the approximate center in the front-rear direction, a terminal plate support 451d projecting leftward from the upper end on the left in front view, and an outer periphery closer to the center in the vertical direction It has a stop piece 451e which respectively protrudes in the left and right direction from the position, and a locking projection 451f which respectively protrudes outward in the left and right direction from both ends of the lower side.

  In addition, the glass decoration substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-shaped and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the surface side (the inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decoration substrate and fixed to the glass decoration relay terminal plate 454 supported by the terminal plate support 451 d of the unit frame 451 and the end portion of the glass decoration substrate 453 to the glass decoration relay terminal plate 454 And a terminal plate holder 456 covering the terminal plate support 451 d of the unit frame 451 supporting the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In the glass unit 450, with the glass decorative substrate 453 inserted in the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the glass plate 452 is adhesively fixed on the front and back of the unit frame 451. Then, in the glass unit 450, the engagement groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bending projection piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, The locking projection 451 f is fitted from the rear side into the glass unit support stepped portion 110 a of the door frame base main body 110, and then can be detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the locking lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can emit light and decorate between the two glass plates 452 by appropriately emitting the LED 453 a of the glass decoration substrate 453, and an atmosphere different from that of the conventional pachinko machine ( The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to have the gaming window 101 of the mood).

[1-2 E. Security cover]
Then, the crime prevention cover 470 in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.21 and FIG.22. The crime prevention cover 470 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 described above to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 4, and as shown in the drawing, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape to cover the lower part of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing sheet metals 142 and 143, and the upper side is an arc-shaped abutting recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4 And a rear projection 474 is provided to project rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, in the state where the crime prevention cover 470 is attached, a crime prevention rear end projection piece 475 is formed so as to be inclined and formed on the back surface on the shaft support side. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, the crime prevention front projection 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 with the crime prevention cover 470 attached is provided in a protruding manner. A mounting elastic piece 473 to be formed is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5 by attaching the attachment elastic piece 473 to the attachment opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the front protrusion 472 for crime prevention faces the lower back single side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. As shown in FIG. Further, the front end of the security front projection piece 472 is in contact with the vertical bending projection piece 151. In addition, although the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting backward, when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the pivotally supported side of the post-crime projecting piece 474 is Although the lower side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 is in a state of facing and facing, the half on the open side of the projecting piece 474 is the rail crime formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 It will be in the state where it is inserted in the groove 607, and the security rear end projection 475 will be in a polymeric position along the upper surface of the security projection 608 formed on the pivoting side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76) ).

  Thus, in the state where the crime prevention cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention structure by the door frame protrusion 110 d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the crime prevention protrusion 166 and crime prevention space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by and, even if it is attempted to invade an illegal tool from below the glass unit 450, the intrusion of the illegal tool from the lower front side of the crime prevention cover 470 due to the superposition of the front projection 472 and the unit frame 451. Is prevented, and the superposition of the projection 474 after the crime prevention and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 prevents the entry of the unauthorized tool from the lower side of the rear surface of the crime prevention cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of the illegal tool from the obliquely lower side of the pivoting side of the door frame 5, the overlapping structure of the security projection 608 and the security rear end projecting piece 475 prevents the intrusion of the incorrect tool into the outer rail 602. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-security protrusion 474 makes it possible to prevent the entry of unauthorized tools into the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-mentioned open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 against the intrusion of the improper tool from the diagonally lower side of the open side of the door frame 5, The concavo-convex engagement of the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-security projection piece 474 can further prevent the entry of unauthorized tools into the game area 605 of the game board 4. In addition, the vertical surface between the crime prevention protrusion 474 and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 on the back side of the crime prevention cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball, it also has a function of preventing the striking of the hitting passage against the glass plate 452 which flies or reverses the guiding passage portion.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching a component, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching a component, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before attaching a component 70 is a side view of 500, FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before the parts are attached, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame 3 with the parts attached FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the main frame 3 mounted with parts pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main frame 3 with parts mounted, FIG. And FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 portion), as viewed from the back of the main body frame 3 with parts attached. .

  In the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hit ball launch device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for paying out a prize ball, a tank rail member 740 and a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the door frame 5 to the main frame 3, a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and a main frame Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided in 3 and a power supply board 1136 are provided together and a cover 1250 covering the rear opening 580 are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the various components described above are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, upper and lower support brackets 503 and 509 (both shown in FIG. 71) for supporting the main frame 3 on the outer frame 2 at the upper and lower sides on one side of the main frame main body 500 are attached. When the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 are attached to the shaft support bracket mounting steps 501, 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The side is substantially coplanar with the upper side and the side of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower side and the side of the main frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower side and the side of the lower shaft support 509 (Fig. See 73). Here, the upper shaft support 503 and the lower shaft support 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. FIG. The upper shaft support bracket 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and the upper end side thereof protrudes forward, and the shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward. A door shaft support hole 505 is drilled on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support fitting 509 has an attachment portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally protruded on the lower end side and a slightly upper portion thereof. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 to the lower support bracket 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is a part of the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 to the main body frame 3 is configured. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support projection 68 of the lower support bracket 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower shaft support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. An axial support hole 508 for inserting the projecting axial pin 147 is bored.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recessed portion 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4 An area slightly recessed below the gaming board installation concave portion 510 is a plate portion 511. Further, the front upper side and the front open side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed to have a predetermined width so as to face the back of the door frame 5, and the front upper side is The upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by the projection projecting in parallel in the lateral direction, and the side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outside on the front open side of the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed by an inner wall which is an inclined surface whose rear end is connected to the first side wall 540, and the front side support side of the left side viewed from the front is the front upper side or the front open Unlike the side part, it is not formed to have a predetermined width facing the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front side supporting side part of the main body frame main body 500 is forward compared to the front upper side part and the front open side part. The shaft support 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large amount of protrusion.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed in the front upper side is bent toward the rear on both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the upper side back of the door frame 5 The bent pieces 155 and 156 to be inserted are respectively inserted. Further, the side crime prevention groove 582 and the crime prevention recess 583 formed on the front open side are folded backward at both long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the back of the open portion of the door frame 5. The open side outer bending projection piece 153 and the open side inner bending projection piece 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Furthermore, the front end L-shaped bent protrusion piece 157 of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 is mounted on the back support side 587 of the front side support side. The parts are in contact.

  And, with the above-mentioned structure, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of inserting an illegal tool such as a piano wire from the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Especially, the open side where the illegal act is most easily performed It has a structure that can prevent cheating on the side and the upper side where cheating is likely to occur next. Of course, prevention of cheating due to the contact between the support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support L-shaped bent piece 157 works well, but in most cases the support side is Between the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 as compared with the upper side and the open side, since the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected by the support brackets 45, 66 and the pivot brackets 503, 509. It is difficult to make a gap in For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure is used. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition, the front upper side, the front open side, and the front shaft support side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 have upper, middle, lower portions of the front open side other than the above-described configuration. A door hook hole 549 is made to penetrate through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a lock device 1000 described later attached to the open side back surface of the main body frame 3 and popped forward, In addition, a disc positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed on the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front pivot side. Furthermore, on the inner front surface slightly lower position of the plate positioning projection 576 of the front shaft support side, with the door frame 5 closed, the L-shaped bending protrusion 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 Two upper and lower restriction projections 577 into which the tip is inserted are provided in a protruding manner. The action of the control protrusion 577 is as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole in which the end of the game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement unit 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed approximately at the center of the game board placement unit 512, the game board A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the fourth direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the rail mounting bosses 514 are projected from the center portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end portion on the open side with a predetermined interval, and the rail mounting bosses 514 71) is screwed in place. In addition, a rail connecting member 516 is provided in a projecting manner on the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the firing rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 It is adjacent to the connection passage 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of the line 603.

  In addition, the upper end portion of the game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) of an oval shape for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 to the side position of the rail connection member 516 (the position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely downward. That is, the game board fixture 519 is rotatably provided centering on the fixture mounting boss 517, and is rotated clockwise in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board placement unit 512 and the game board is mounted. The fixing tool 519 is pressed to the front of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. In addition, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by rotating the game board fixing tool 519 in the counterclockwise direction and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 can not be rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower side of the open side of the plate portion 511 is provided with a cuboid propelling device attachment portion 520 which is provided in a bulging shape on the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 is fixed to the mounting part 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This point will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 is formed in the front wall portion of the above-mentioned launcher attachment portion 520, in which a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that cooperates with the slide projection 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is accommodated. At the adjacent position of the handle connection window 522, a shaft hole 523 is opened in which the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the hitting ball 687 faces. Further, in the upper wall portion of the launcher attachment portion 520, a weir through opening 521 for projecting the striking rod 687 of the striking launcher 650 upward is cut out, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the weir penetrating opening 521 The cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 penetrates is formed in the front of the.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 68, a ball extraction passage 524 extending downward from the upper portion on the support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 is formed. . The ball removal and discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball removal and connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71) described later from the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 into the inside of the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 is provided to project rearward above the above-described launcher attachment portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. It is inserted to facilitate the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Further, mounting holes 527 for mounting the substrate unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate portion 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the substrate unit 1100 correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fixed with screws. In addition, a projecting device mounting boss 529 for attaching the ball hitting and projecting device 650 is projected rearward in the concave inside of the projecting device mounting portion 520, and further, in the lower end on the open side, as shown in FIG. As shown, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide protuberance piece having a tapered distal end for guiding the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 is projected toward the rear.

  In the plate portion 511, in addition to the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 70, a ball connection opening 530 which is an opening of the upstream end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 524 is formed . The downstream end of the ball connection passage 880 is connected to the ball connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball removal connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full tank mounting portion 531 for mounting the full tank unit 900 (see FIG. 71) described in detail later will be orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engaging groove 532 is formed on the front of the full unit mounting portion 531 and engages with the engaging piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full unit 900. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full unit mounting portion 531, an outlet for blocking the prize balls discharged from the outlet 921 of the full unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened. A switching device 579 is provided.

  Although this outlet opening and closing device 579 will not be described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening and closing plate is lowered by the lever abutting on the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, since the contact with the lever is lost, the opening and closing plate is raised to close the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the winning balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall from the outlet 921. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole is vertically formed at a position corresponding to the upper side of the launch portion of the launch rail 515, which is the game board placement portion 512 formed along the upper edge of the plate portion 511. A fastening link 534 for forming a fastening band 619 in the front part of the fastening hole 533 is formed. The fastening link 534 is a mechanism for preventing removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. The game board installation concave portion 510 is provided on the first side wall 540 provided on the back side from the inner side face on the pivotal support side and the above-mentioned upper side portion and the open side side face surface, and on the rear side from the first side wall 540 The main body frame 3 is constituted by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 provided on the rear side from the second side wall 541, and the fourth side wall 543 provided on the rear side from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are formed in a concave shape that is enclosed.

  Note that the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed so that the upper side and the right side (side of the pivot support side) are straightly extended rearwardly with a step when viewed from the rear side. The open side is formed in a step shape (see FIG. 75) which inclines inward as it goes from the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543. This is the rearmost end of the fourth side wall 543 when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 is formed straight backward on the left side (open side). May come in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 and may not open smoothly, so the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side It is something that can be done.

  Also, at the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the open side first side wall 540, but using the lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided on the rear end side of the first side wall 540 In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the first side wall 540 on the open side and the fourth side wall 543 are formed in the shape of inclined steps. Furthermore, also in the dimension of the step of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to abut the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. Therefore, although it is formed with a certain large step, the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  The side walls 540 to 543 described above are formed to have depth widths d1, d2, d3 and d4 respectively as shown in FIG. 69, and in the case of this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4 and in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 Rear projecting portions of various game devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the peripheral back surface of the game board 4. A rear side wall for accommodating a rear projection of the gaming apparatus provided parallel to the first side wall 540 and extending parallel to the first side wall 540 rearwardly from the first side wall 540 with a step portion contacting the rear side wall; It is what constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the amounts of backward projection of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper surface on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed to be substantially at the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thus, the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, the game Even in the case where a game apparatus in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4 is attached, the rearward projecting portion of such a game apparatus can be accommodated easily.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, the rear side wall 544 is open side on the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (pivot side) of the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 An upper rear surface wall 545 and an axially supported rear surface wall 546 as a rear surface wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The front surface of the axially supported rear surface wall 546 is flat (see FIG. 67), and a ball passage unit 770 and a prize ball unit 800, which constitute a ball discharging mechanism, are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is supposed to be Therefore, it is sufficient for the inward projecting width dimension of the axially supported rear face wall 546 to have a width for attaching the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800.

  Further, the upper rear surface wall 545 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740 to be described later is attached to the rear surface, so the lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, the width of the upper rear wall 545 to the inside is sufficient if it has the height width of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Further, the open side rear surface wall 544 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a rear surface supporting cylindrical support 575 for supporting a cover 1250 described later. Therefore, it is sufficient for the inward protrusion width dimension of the open side rear surface wall 544 to have a width dimension that forms the cover body support cylindrical portion 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open side rear surface wall 544, the upper rear surface wall 545, and the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 protruding inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4 Since the size of the space formed by 543 is secured, for example, even when a game apparatus is attached in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the game board 4, such a game apparatus The rear projecting portion can be stored easily. The inner side of the open side rear surface wall 544, the upper rear surface wall 545, and the pivotal support rear surface wall 546 is a rear surface opening 580, and the rear surface opening 580 is openably closed by a cover 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 penetrates on the flat portion on the open side. Locking holes 548 (in FIG. 68) in which three middle lower positions are opened, and locking projections 1004 of the locking device 1000 described later are engaged with the upper, middle, and lower portions of the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Also, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, but a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for screwing the attachment is at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper and middle. In addition, the attachment by the screw of the lock device 1000 is not only the upper part and the middle, but also the screw attachment portion 1003 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the lock attachment hole 547 formed in the upper vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526 And the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 on the left and right of the upper front of the first side wall 540, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and A guide arc projection 552 to be in contact is provided in a protruding manner, and a relief recess 551 communicating with a notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 described later is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed in a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the attachment collar 733 of the award ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the award ball tank 720 communicates with the relief recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the ball stored in is increased, it functions so that it does not depress and ball clogging occurs. Further, when the award ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear end wall of the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the fourth side wall 543 substantially match when viewed from the front side of the award ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4) See). The above-mentioned guide arc projection 552 lifts the main frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2, and the lower side of the main frame 3 and the decorative cover plate A clearance is formed between them and 15 to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting an unauthorized device from the clearance.

  Further, a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 is formed on the upper rear surface wall 545 described above along the opening edge of the rear surface opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall A rail locking groove 554 is formed in a bent portion 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking projections 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in these rail locking grooves 553, 554. Further, a rail hooking elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear surface wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. When the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the projecting pieces 749 and 750, the rail hooking elastic piece 555 is at the downstream upper end of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact from above.

  When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail hook elastic piece 555 is pushed backward, and then the tank rail member is released to release the locked state of the rail locking grooves 553, 554 and the locking projections 749, 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is bored on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and an earth wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 etc.) is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The relief hole 556 is drilled to release the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is formed inside the tank rail member 740. While being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wire connected to a grounding connector provided on the power supply substrate 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the pivoting side rear face wall 546, and the ball passage unit is interposed between the standing walls 560. 770 and the award ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guiding protrusion 561 is provided in a bent shape so as to extend slightly from the uppermost stream portion between the left and right standing walls 560 to a position slightly above the midstream portion. When the ball passage unit 770 described later is attached, the award ball guide projection 561 is projected backward on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 so that the projecting height thereof gradually decreases toward the downstream side. , And corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770, and guides the winning balls in a row. In addition, a passage unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball passage unit 770 with a screw and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are protruded on the left and right of the award ball guiding projection 561 and a ball cutting switch described later A switch corresponding protrusion 563 is provided to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit attachment boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion which engages with a hook-like engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engagement portion of the award ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560. , And a lock elastic claw 564 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800, and the rotation shaft 808 (FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800. A relief hole 566 is formed in which the end of the reference is received. Further, a relief motor relief opening 572 is formed below the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the winning ball unit 800 faces the relief motor relief opening 572. (See FIG. 71). The prize ball unit 800 locks the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed on the lowermost end of the back surface wall 546 on the back side, and is supported by the engagement projection 565 and the elastic claw 564 for locking on the back side. It is designed to be removably attached to the face wall 546. The detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  Further, a cover contact groove 567 into which the open end of the cover 1250 is formed is formed at the open end of the axially supported rear face wall 546, and the lower end of the cover contact groove 567 is formed. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body contact groove 567 is formed with a stop hole 568 corresponding to the stop hole 1253 (see FIGS. 74 and 139) of the cover body 1250. The rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover 1250 by fastening with a screw. Further, a U-shaped locking protrusion 570 is projected from the locking wall 569, and the locking protrusion 570 is attached to the cover 1250 with the cover 1250 closed with respect to the main frame 3. By opening the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and locking a lock such as a padlock to the locking projection 570, only the person in charge having the key of the padlock opens the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 has been demonstrated, when the door frame 5 is closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engaging grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) are formed in which the door frame projecting pieces 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 directed backward are inserted. There is. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described launcher attachment portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the pivotal support side. The door frame protrusion 110 d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 is provided so as to project rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110 e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, at the lower part of the open end, a door frame protrusion 110d having a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed. The above-described door frame protrusions 110d and 110e and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 form an outer protrusion and an engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the firing rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the firing device mounting portion 520 are formed to protrude, but the firing device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 The arrangement positions of the plate portion 511 are deviated to the open side, and further, they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. Therefore, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the area from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are disposed to the open side is the back surface of the door frame 5 and the launcher attachment portion Since 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are in close contact with each other, the incorrect material such as the piano wire which has slipped through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engaging groove 585 as described above It is extremely difficult to further slip through the space between the launcher attachment portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 to reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, the door frame 5 is closed because there is no portion projecting from the surface of the plate portion 511 in the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher attachment portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not disposed The space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire which has slipped through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 described above easily simplifies the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. Since the mounting table 160 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the door frame 5 does not allow the incorrect tool to pass upward through the space 586, the space 586 is closed with the door frame 5 closed. The crime prevention protrusion 166 which intrudes into is formed. The crime prevention projection 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the pivoting side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention projection piece 166 provided to the mounting stand 160 in a projecting manner. Then, the crime prevention projection 166 and the crime prevention space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and an engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the body frame 3.

  As described above, the main unit frame 3 has the game board 4, the hit ball launcher 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, the substrate unit A cover 1100 and a cover 1250 are attached, which will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of the game board]
The schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 89. FIG. 76 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4 80 is a magnified perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4 FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder, cut in the longitudinal direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 83 is a front component mainly constituting the game board. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 as viewed obliquely from the rear, with the game panel, the panel holder, and the like disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the main control board box fixed to the board substrate holder, as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 85 disassembled into a board substrate holder, a drawer holder, and a main control board box and viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 87 is a schematic view of a disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board viewed through the game window.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment includes a transparent plate-shaped gaming panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the gaming panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and the gaming panel 600 via the panel holder 630. It comprises a front component 601 attached to the front surface so as to surround the game area 605, and a function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 etc.) fixed to the rear side of the front component 601. On the surface of the game panel 600, various game devices and a large number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, the front component 601 is attached to the front of the panel holder 630 after the game apparatus and the obstacle nail are provided, but the front component 601 has a circular hollow inside so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 605 And the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and the arc surface from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side passing the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602, the outer rail An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of the end portion 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow preventing member 604 of the stopper 620 on the upper side is provided. The outer rail 602 is obliquely formed with a connecting passage portion 609 which is connected to a rail connecting member 516 which is provided at the beginning end portion of the firing rail 515 as an extension of the firing rail 515 and adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 610 is formed. A metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the far port 610 to the stopper 620.

  In addition, when the hitting ball which vigorously slides the outer rail 602 collides, the stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so as to repel the hitting ball to the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the batted ball that has been fired at one end and taken into the game area 605 from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a crime prevention projection 608 is provided on one side of the lower part of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The crime prevention projection 608 overlaps in the vertical direction with the crime prevention rear end projection 475 projected on the crime prevention cover 470 as described above in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, and the shaft of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 It is intended to prevent the entry of unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the support side.

  In the middle of the lower part of the inner rail 603, an out port 606 is provided, and between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow preventing member 604, the shot hit is up to the game area 605 A hitting ball which constitutes an induced guiding path but is returned to the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the far port 610 and guided to the far ball entrance 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. The tray unit 300 is again discharged into the tray unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. Further, a rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the blocking portion 620. The rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the crime prevention protrusion 474 which is provided on the crime prevention cover 470 as described above in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed enters. Improper engagement of the piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the open side of the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlapping in the vertical direction due to the concavo-convex engagement of the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the crime prevention post 474 Finally, it prevents the entry of tools.

  By the way, on one side of the game board 4, a positioning recess 611 fitted to the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed, and on the other side of the game board 4, the board formed on the main body frame 3 A game board stopper 614 inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The game board stopper 614 is configured such that the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. In order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the positioning recess 611 is inserted obliquely from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning projection 576. The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and its end is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed . Thereafter, the game board fixture 519 is rotated to fix the lower front of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main unit frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, it may be removed in the reverse procedure of the above procedure.

  Moreover, the game board 4 in this embodiment has a structure which prevents the unauthorized removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 very easily. That is, as shown in FIG. 76 and FIG. 80, at the lower end opposite to the passage notch portion 613 below the game board 4, an attachment notch 616 penetrating the front and back of the game board 4 is formed A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component member 601.) A fastening bar 617 is horizontally fixed in the lower part of the mounting notch 616 in a horizontal direction. In the fastening bar 617, a band groove-like fastening portion 618 is formed substantially at the center of the fastening bar 617. On the other hand, as the detachment preventing mechanism provided on the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board placing portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3. A fastening hole 534 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper side of the part, and a fastening link 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 is extended (FIG. reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recessed portion 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board mounting portion 512 as shown in FIG. While being in the state, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening link 534 are in the same state. Then, with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening rod 534 are in agreement, the tip of the fastening band 619 generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch portion 616 And lead downward into the fastening hole 533 and lead it forward so that its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. Then, an unnecessary tip portion protruding forward from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut off. In this way, as long as the fastening band 619 is not cut, the game board 4 can not be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the fixing of the game board fastener 614 and the game board fixture 519 etc. is released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using the fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, the game It can be easily understood that the panel 4 has been removed and any fraud has been performed. Such an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism can prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main frame 3.

  In addition, the outer shape of the game board 4 is formed with notches 612 on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guiding passage 920 of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the far port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right of the front component 601, there is provided a sticker sheet sticking section 615 for sticking a certificate sheet for proof confirmation. Further, on the upper side of the lower right sticker sheet sticking portion 615 of the front component 601, a function indication seal 649 is stuck.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, balls downstream of winning balls in various game devices (for example, the general winning openings 2004 and 2101, the starting openings 2001 and 2002, the special winning opening 2003, etc.) provided in the gaming area 605 A liquid crystal control substrate 4500 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151 etc.) as a display device disposed substantially at the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 A peripheral substrate box 622 in which the peripheral control substrate 4140 is housed is attached.

  Further, on the back surface of the game board 4, a board substrate holder 623 for board is fixed below the back box 621. The board substrate holder 623 has a space (a width in the front-rear direction is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so that the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 are collected in front of the board substrate holder 623. Is formed, and a drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom of the space. The drop port 629 merges at a rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in a substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 also has a main control board box 624 containing a main control board 4100 for controlling the game operation on its back side, a payout control board 1186 and a power board 1136 provided on the board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal board 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 which are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the substrate unit 1100 simply by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3.

  Further, the board substrate holder 623 for a panel is formed with a bonding guide protrusion 628 which protrudes rearward from the space between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The bonding guide projections 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the substrate unit 1100 side and the game board 4 side when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 as described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the bonding guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be connected naturally (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component, game panel, panel holder, panel back plate]
Subsequently, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82 to 84. The game board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a plate-shaped game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin for holding the game panel 600 detachably from the front. And an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 630 to partition and form the outer periphery of the game area 605 and to guide the game balls into the game area 605. A front component 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 are mainly provided.

  As shown, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601 a and positioning projections 601 b that project rearward on the rear surface side. The positioning bosses 601a and the positioning projections 601b can be positioned with the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 which are disposed on the rear side, which will be described in detail later.

  The outer shape of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 is a polygonal shape slightly larger than the game area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, etc. . The thickness of the game panel 600 is thinner than that of the panel holder 630, and is set to a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently held even if a fault nail (not shown) is planted.

  In this game panel 600, there are a plurality of fitting holes 600a arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating in the front-rear direction Each one is provided. The fitting holes 600 a and the long holes 600 b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engagement steps 600c which are recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 600c is formed by cutting out approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 600, and is disposed outside the game area 605, similarly to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b, It is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

  In addition, the gaming panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 603 to the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Furthermore, in the game panel 600, a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed so that the center character 2300, the attacker unit 2000, etc. are provided (see FIGS. 159 and 160). In addition to the above, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. These openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game panel 600, and since the outer periphery of the game panel 600 is connected, the strength of the game panel 600 is obtained by the openings 600e. To prevent the

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size including the game panel 600 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and the thickness of a member (for example, game board base etc.) made of wooden plywood in the game board of the conventional pachinko machine It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (about 20 mm in this example). In the panel holder 630, a holding stepped portion 630a detachably holding the game panel 600 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the back and forth in approximately the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding stepped portion 630a. It mainly includes a through hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 600, and the front surface of the game panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It becomes almost the same plane as. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 630a has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the gaming panel 600. By this clearance C, even if the game panel 600 is relatively expanded or contracted due to a temperature change or a temporal change, the expansion or contraction can be absorbed. The clearance C may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, from the front of the holding step portion 630a toward the front. It has a plurality of projecting pins 630c which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b of the game panel 600. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 630 c into the fitting holes 600 a and the long holes 600 b of the game panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the game panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engagement claw 630d and an engagement piece 630e which are engaged with the engagement step 600c at a position corresponding to the engagement step 600c of the game panel 600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claws 630d are disposed on the upper holding steps 630a of the panel holder 630 and correspond to the upper engaging steps 600c in the game panel 600. It projects forward from the front surface of the holding step 630 a and is resiliently engaged with the engagement step 600 c. The engagement claw 630 d is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engaging piece 630e is disposed on the lower holding step 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engaging step 600c in the game panel 600, and is played between the front of the holding step 630a. In a state where a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted is formed, the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 is configured to extend along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) by a predetermined amount. The game panel 600 is detachably held on the panel holder 630 by engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement piece 630e.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a boss insertion hole 630f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided on the front component member 601 can be inserted. In this boss insertion hole 630f, the positioning boss of the front component member 601 The panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other by inserting 601 a.

  In the panel holder 630, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 84, a mounting support portion 630g having a form in which a predetermined amount is recessed in the front side so as to leave the lower side slightly lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction Is equipped. With this mounting support portion 630g, the rear surface of the panel holder 630 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end above the predetermined range from the lower end to the rear peripheral side protruding backward, and the amount of depression ( Depth) is about 2.5 mm (in this example) which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 630g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 can be pachinko machine 1 It can be installed and installed reliably in the game board installation recess 510 of

  Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630, it is formed on the lower side of the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635 An accommodation recess 630h is further provided, and an engagement portion 630i which is disposed so as to penetrate in the accommodation recess 630h in the front-rear direction and can engage an engagement claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h releasably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by locking the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 635 is a panel It is formed to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 630.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j which are disposed in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. It is arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 630j (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter is provided according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 630j. 630 j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 630l that open to the rear side in at least a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the lightening portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these lightening portions 630l are not formed in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within the range In the above, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component 601 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface. The launched game balls are smoothly guided. In addition, as illustrated, the panel holder 630 is formed with a lightening portion 630 l so that the mounting holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 630 is maintained. The grid-like ribs are formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 630 is provided with a positioning portion 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and the game panel 600 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 630, an opening 630n communicating with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o communicating with the far port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the lightening portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height, and the rear surface of the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630 A plurality of screw holes 635a which can be accommodated so as to be substantially flush with each other and which are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the planar rear surface and which can screw predetermined screws can be arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight loss recess 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw holes 635a and the positioning holes 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting holes 630j and the positioning holes 630k in the panel holder 630. Further, in the panel back plate 635 as well as the panel holder 630, the portion where the screw holes 635a and the positioning holes 635b and the like are formed is formed into a boss shape by the recessed portion 635d and supports them or the panel back plate In order to maintain the strength of 635, grid-like ribs are formed. Furthermore, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

  The panel back plate 635 is integrated with the panel holder 630 by being accommodated in the accommodation recess 630 h of the panel holder 630 and by locking the locking claw 635 c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630 i of the panel holder 630. In that state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this manner, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged in a predetermined array on the entire outer periphery of the through hole 630b on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630. Mounting holes such as 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are disposed, and by the presence of these mounting holes, a predetermined member can be mounted and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the present example, the game panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630 a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claw 630 d and the engaging piece 630 e By engaging the engagement step 600c, the game panel 600 can be held by the panel holder 630, and the front side of the game panel 600 and the front surface of the panel holder 630 become substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set in the conventional obstacle nail planting device in the state where the game panel 600 is held in the panel holder 630 without remodeling the obstacle nail planting device used more It is possible to suppress such cost increase.

  Further, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component 601, the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. varies depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing game panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 can be used as a common part, and the panel holder 630, the front component 601, etc. can be made recyclable. The pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 4 capable of supporting various types of machines can be realized only by exchanging only one.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of mounting holes 630j are provided in advance in the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement, various types of back unit 2000, board substrate holder 623 for a panel, etc., which are attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630 The panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 630j even if the mounting and fixing positions of predetermined members are different. It can be made into parts.

  In the present embodiment, in the game board 4, the transparent game panel 600 forming the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630, but like the conventional pachinko machine, the game panel While making 600 integral with the panel holder 630, you may make it form with wooden plywood, such as a veneer board.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and FIG. The board substrate holder 623 for a panel is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and as shown in the figure, it is in the form of a box whose front and upper sides are open. And the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600 can be discharged from substantially the center in the left-right direction downward. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting a main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 623 for the panel, and on the side (right side in rear view) of the main control board box mounting portion 623a. A sealed portion 623 b corresponding to the sealing portion 624 a provided in the main control substrate box 624 is formed. In addition, a drawer holder 636 for supporting the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623 for panel.

  The main control board box 624 in this example is supported by the main control board box attachment portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box attachment portion 623a. It seals to the side sealed part 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board holder 623 for panel in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box attachment portion 623a. It is possible to visually determine whether or not it has been removed illegally.

[1-3A-3. Function Display Unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, this function display board 640a includes segment displays SEG1 and SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. The first special symbol display 641 is assigned to the segment display SEG1, and the second special to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures etc as a special symbol, the first start of the attacker unit 2000 described later When the gaming ball wins in the mouth 2001 (see FIG. 158), the segment display SEG1 variably displays a predetermined special symbol, and when the gaming sphere wins in the second starting opening 2002 (see FIG. 160), the segment display SEG2 It is designed to change and display a predetermined special symbol.

  In addition, the first special symbol storage indicator 643a is assigned to the LED1, the first special symbol storage indicator 643b is assigned to the LED2, and the second special symbol storage indicator 644a for the LED3 and the second special symbol storage for the LED4. Indicators 644 b are respectively assigned. The first special symbol storage indicator 643 lights up or blinks with the number of balls of the winning game ball as the hold number when the gaming ball which has won the first starting hole 2001 is not used in the variable display of the special symbol There is. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory display 643a lights up and the first special symbol memory display 643b is extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the first special one When the symbol storage indicator 643 is lit together and the holding ball is 3 spheres, the first special symbol storage indicator 643a blinks and the first special symbol storage indicator 643 b is lit, and when the holding sphere is 4 spheres the first The special symbol storage indicator 643 blinks together. On the other hand, when the game ball which has won the second starting opening 2002 is not used in the variation display of the special symbol, the second special symbol memory display 644 is lit or blinked with the number of balls of the game ball which wins as the hold number. It has become. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory display 644a lights up and the second special symbol memory display 644b is extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the second special When the symbol storage indicator 644 is lit together and the holding ball is 3 spheres, the second special symbol storage indicator 644a flashes and the second special symbol storage indicator 644b is lit, and when the holding sphere is 4 spheres the second The special symbol memory display 644 blinks together.

  Furthermore, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED that can turn on red / green / orange, and can also be turned on in combination of these red / green / orange. When the game ball passes through a gate 2201 of a gate member 2200 described later, the LED 5 is designed to display a variable pattern of a predetermined normal symbol by displaying the color to be lit as a normal symbol.

  Also, a symbol storage indicator 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9 respectively. When the game ball which has passed the gate 2201 is not used in the variation display of the normal symbol (when performing the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 645 and when opening and closing the wing 2337, the gate 2201 In the game ball which is not used for the variable display of the normal symbol immediately by having passed through, the normal symbol memory display 646 is turned on with the number of balls of the passing game ball as the hold number. Specifically, when the holding ball is one ball, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. Normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are extinguished, and when the holding balls are three balls, normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are lit and normal symbol memory lamps 646b are extinguished, and when the holding balls are four spheres, normal symbol memory display All 646 lights up.

  Also, a game state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED that can turn on red / green / orange, and can also be turned on in combination of these red / green / orange. The LED 10 is configured to notify that the game state is in probability fluctuation or a small hit by displaying the lighted color as the game state.

  Furthermore, two for displaying the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2003 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (special hit)” on the LEDs 11 and 12 A round indicator 648 consisting of two LEDs is assigned. That is, the round indicator 648 is a portion where two LEDs are lighted to indicate the number of rounds in the big hit game when the accessory continuous operation device is operated.

  Thus, the segment displays SEG1 and SEG2, and the LEDs 1 to 12 mounted on the function display substrate 640a are the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, A second special symbol memory indicator 644, an ordinary symbol indicator 645, an ordinary symbol memory indicator 646, a game state indicator 647, and a round indicator 648 are respectively assigned to display various functions, segment indicator SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, the second special symbol memory indicator 644, the ordinary symbol indicator 645, the ordinary symbol memory The display 646, the game state display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That. Also, these LEDs 1 to LED may be assigned different functions according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol memory display 644, in order to variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, respectively, Alphanumeric characters and figures are displayed using the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the normal symbol indicator 645, the ordinary symbol memory indicator 646, the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648, and different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned thereto Etc. are displayed as a special symbol.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol storage indicator 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and LEDs 12 assigned to the round indicator 648 is a fixed value 6.

  The function display substrate 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with a screw (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back of the front component 601 of the game board 4 with a screw (not shown). In the front component member 601, segment display openings 601c are formed at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display substrate 640a, and the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 87, in the front component member 601, the LED insertion holes 601d are provided at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display substrate 640a, and the cover member 640b is a front component member 601. The LED 1 to the LED 12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when mounted on the back surface of the disc. The LED insertion holes 601 d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that lights lit or blinked of the LEDs 1 to 12 are not mistaken as lights lit or blinked of the adjacent LEDs. The contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by lighting or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display sticker attaching part 601 e for attaching the function display sticker 649. In addition, the recessed part 601f is formed in the function display seal sticking part 601e. A tool such as a minus driver is inserted into the recess 601f to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649 pasted. Here, it is conceivable to provide a projection on the function display seal 649 in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, but when opening and closing the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3, the projection is pulled for some reason As a result, the function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker sticking part 601e. So, in this embodiment, when opening and closing the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 by forming the recessed part 601f in the function display seal sticking part 601e, the function display seal 649 is prevented from peeling off from the function display seal sticking part 601e. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function Display Sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display stickers 649 in the gaming machine 4 are printed by grouping them into groups Grp1 to Grp3 every function display on the surface thereof, and in the non-play area of the game board 4 It is stuck on a function indication seal sticking section 601e formed on a certain front component member 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 is composed of a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol memory display 643, and these first special symbol display 641 and first special symbol memory display It is divided in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1 which can visually recognize 643 and is printed on the function display seal 649. The first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory so that the area surrounded by the solid line SL1 can be visually recognized as the display by the first special symbol display 641 or the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various types of information on the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 are displayed. For example, when the first start opening 2001 is start-up winning, the first special symbol display 641 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, or the first special symbol memory display 643 takes the number of balls of the winning game ball as the hold number. It lights up or blinks. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory display 643 can be obtained. It is possible to convey to the player that various pieces of information relating to the variable display of the special symbol by the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 2001 are shown. Thereby, the player changes the special symbol by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 by visually observing the group Grp1 which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1 and printed on the function display sticker 649. Various information on the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 is composed of a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol memory indicator 644. These second special symbol indicator 642 and second special symbol memory It is divided in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2 which makes the display 644 visible and is printed on the function display seal 649. The second special symbol display 642, second special symbol memory so that the area surrounded by the solid line SL2 can be visually recognized as display by the second special symbol display 642 or lighting or blinking by the second special symbol memory display 644. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information regarding the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 are displayed. For example, when the game ball wins the start to the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, or the second special symbol memory display with the number of balls of the winning game ball as the hold number The lamp 644 lights up or blinks. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol memory indicator 644 into one group Grp2, these second special symbol indicator 642 and the second special symbol memory indicator 644 It is possible to convey to the player that various pieces of information regarding the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 are shown. Thereby, the player changes the display of the special symbol by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 by visually observing the group Grp2 which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649. It is possible to easily confirm various information on

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 is composed of an ordinary symbol display 645 and an ordinary symbol storage indicator 646, and a solid line SL3 for visualizing the ordinary symbol indicator 645 and the ordinary symbol storage indicator 646. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. The area surrounded by the solid line SL3 has a transparent position corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage indicator 646 so that lighting by the normal symbol indicator 645 and lighting by the normal symbol storage indicator 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 variably displays the presence or absence of the opening and closing of the blade 2337 as a predetermined normal symbol, and when the blade 2337 changes from the closed state to the open state, the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 2002 It will be easier. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes the first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol memory display 644, and the ordinary symbol memory display Stars are printed to distinguish them from the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648. In this group Grp3, various information on the gate 2201 can also be displayed. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display 645 variably displays a predetermined normal symbol, or the normal symbol storage display 646 lights up with the number of balls of the game ball passed as the hold number. In this manner, by grouping the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage indicator 646 into one group Grp3, various types of the normal symbol indicator 645 and the ordinary symbol storage indicator 646 related to the variation display of the normal symbol are displayed. The player can be informed that information is being shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information related to the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 88, in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 in which the gaming state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized at positions corresponding to the gaming state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648, respectively. It is divided and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that lighting by the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are partitioned in a state surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649, and the gaming state indicator 647, the round indicator The position corresponding to 648 is divided and printed in a state of being surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 which the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can visually recognize.

  Thus, in the function display seal 649, the functions of the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display substrate 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as in the groups Grp1 to Grp3, etc. The content is printed and partitioned. In addition, even if a star is printed on the normal symbol display 645, etc. and the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2 and LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are It is easy to understand.

  The correspondence between the function and the printed content is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a seal management number 649a, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the seal management number 649a is printed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize from the game window 101 via the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey information that is not necessary to the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the recessed portion 601f provided in the function display sticker attaching portion 601e is also formed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is for preventing an operation error in which a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 erroneously attaches a different function display seal when assembling the pachinko machine 1. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and the modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are linked to the seal management number 649a and managed. Thus, when the seal management number 649a is checked, the stock of the function display stickers 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, recent pachinko machines have been shortened in their development period as their life cycles have been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for notifying that the number of times that the special winning opening 2003 changes from the closed state to the open state is 15 times. In the case where the number of starting openings is reduced from two to one in the case of adding the specification, the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be dealt with by using the common function display substrate 640a. . In order to change the contents to be printed on the function display sticker with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the functions of the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and LED1 to LED12 described above and the contents printed on the function display seal The correspondence relationship of is printed on the function indication seal as a seal management number. Thus, for example, at the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, before the worker of the line affixes the function display seal 649 to the game board 4, whether the specification of the pachinko machine 1 corresponds to the function display seal 649 or not It can confirm by visually observing seal management number 649a, and it can prevent that the function display seal 649 which does not correspond to the specification of the pachinko machine 1 is stuck. The function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement of productivity.

[1-3 B. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. 90 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hitting and launching apparatus 650 and a perspective view (B) of a state in which the firing motor portion is removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting and launching apparatus 650. FIG. 93 is a front view (A) showing the relationship between the ball hitting and launching device 650 and the firing rail 515, and a perspective view (B) of the firing motor portion. FIG. 93 is a ball hitting and firing in the state where the operation handle portion 410 is not operated. FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the launch rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking launcher 650 and the launch rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and an AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the hitting and firing apparatus 650 It is.

  The hitting and launching apparatus 650 pivotally supports the hitting bowl 687 rotatably on the firing base frame 651, and mounts on the firing base frame 651 a firing motor 695 for giving a reciprocating rotation to the hitting bowl 687. The projection base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 for adjusting the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 for applying a biasing force to return to the above.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the firing base frame 651 is formed of a synthetic resin into a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 is fitted substantially at the center thereof A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed on the upper side and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball 687 when the hitting ball 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. Also, a slide guide hole 655 in the form of a long narrow groove is formed above the rear of the firing base frame 651 (the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515). 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is for guiding a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding on the rear end upper portion of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is a guide bush 681 fixed to a lock hole 662 formed on the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682 in a guide long hole 680 formed on the front of the slide rod 677 By penetrating the Further, as shown in FIG. 92, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

  In the front part of the upper side of the firing base frame 651, a flange is formed with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operation piece opening 657 is formed in the flange above the bearing cylinder 652. There is. The weight 173 of the ball feed member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the striking ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 in the operation piece opening 657. The actuating piece 658 which abuts on the mounting portion 660 which is provided on the rear upper part of the opening edge of the actuating piece opening 657 is pivotably provided by a locking pin 659. The actuating piece 658 is formed in a "字" shape, and the base plate of the rear end of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by the stop pin 659 and pivots integrally with the hitting ball 687 in the arc portion below from the pivotal support portion. The upper side portion swings the ball feed member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocation of the hitting ball 687 while in contact with the actuating piece contact portion 693 protruding from the 690, and the swinging motion of the ball feed member 172 strikes the ball supply port. The hitting balls flowing out of 171 b are supplied one by one to the launching position of the launching rail 515.

  Furthermore, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 incorporating the firing motor 695 to the firing base frame 651 are projected at a total of three locations, two at the lower rear and one at the upper front. And a boss 663 for a rocking piece into which the shaft hole 673 of the lower end of the rocking piece 672 connected with the slide member 710 is slid to slide the slide rod 677 rearward of the lower portion of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the metal plate 665 is in close contact with the shot base launcher 650 in order to increase the rigidity thereof. Therefore, through holes 666, 667, 668, 669, corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the rocking piece boss 663 in the metal plate 665. 671 is formed, and a laterally elongated elliptical through hole 670 through which the connection convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also penetrated. After the metal plate 665 configured as described above stores the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656, the through holes 666 to 671 correspond to the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by closely fitting and screwing the firing base frame 651 in a penetrating or matching manner.

  The tip end portion of the rocking piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached has a head extending from the through hole 671. The shaft hole 673 of the rocking piece 672 is inserted through the head portion. The swinging piece 672 is swingably supported around the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in the shape of a vertically long wedge, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the slightly long hole shape in which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle Connection holes 674 are formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 which abuts on one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Then, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663, and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with a washer The swinging piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The mounted swinging piece 672 is configured such that the upper portion thereof swings around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Also, on the upper front surface of the metal plate 665, a horizontally elongated slide rod 677 is slidably mounted in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 protruding from the rear upper portion of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665 and the guide long hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is penetrated to fix the set screw 682 in the set hole 662. The slide rod 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is provided at one end (rear end) thereof with an abutted portion 679 which abuts on the abutment portion 675 of the swinging piece 672 described above, and the other end (front end) is one end of the biasing spring 684 A spring locking portion 683 is provided in a protruding manner for locking the locking wheel 685.

  Although the bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 is fitted to the bearing cylinder 652 so as not to come off. The lower end portion of the ball striking rod 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and at the same time the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with a working piece abutting portion 693 which abuts on the working piece 658 on the front and back side, and a spring for holding the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on its front side. A locking portion 692 is provided in a protruding manner, and a motor contact protrusion 691 which is engaged with and disengaged from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided in a protruding manner on the front side in the rear. At the upper end of the striking ball stick 687, a synthetic resin bite 688 is fixed, and the firing position is formed by the lower end of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 fixed above it. I am about to rush into

  On the other hand, on the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651, the shooting motor 695 housed in the motor cover 694 is attached. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 has a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 inside, and the motor mounting boss 661 enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion. And a mounting portion in which a mounting fixing hole 699 for mounting is formed integrally with the reverse rotation preventing cam 698 and the motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 formed integrally inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation preventing cam 698, and it engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) which is pivotably fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 to be a firing motor The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent a failure that the motor cam 697 rotates in the reverse direction and the motor cam 697 and the motor contact protrusion 691 mesh with each other and the ball striking device 650 can not be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball-like shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball 687 while engaging and disengaging with the motor contact protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the main structure of the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 which is stored in the slide member storage space 656 and slides as described above is formed in a rectangular shape whose rear is open, and an elliptical convex portion 711 having an oval shape is protruded on the front surface thereof. In addition, a circular connection protrusion 712 is provided at the rear of the elliptical protrusion 711. Further, on the upper surface and the lower surface, slide contact projections 713 having a circular arc shape in cross section are provided so as to project at both ends so as to slide in the slide member storage space 656 easily. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided on the lower surface of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the near side of the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction, and protrudes slightly inward from the upper surface and the lower surface of the first inclined surface 715 A sandwiching piece 716 is formed, which has a predetermined distance between its tips. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 to be inclined in a V-shape in a side view toward the back. Thus, in the state where the slide projection 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end side of the slide projection 183 on the inclined side 183a abuts the side wall in the slide direction front. In the state, it is in a state of being inserted between the upper and lower holding pieces 716. Although the space 718 is formed on the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, the space 718 does not particularly function.

  In the state where slide member 710 configured as described above is stored in slide member storage space 656, as shown in FIG. 92A, an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of slide member storage space 656. While the insertion space 714 is formed to face the connection opening 664 of a shape, the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. It is illustrated as being in contact, but in the normal state it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship between the strength of the slide member 710 and the biasing spring 684 of the hitting and firing apparatus 650 will be described. The slide member 710 is at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 92A). When in the position abutted against the inner wall of the space), as shown in FIG. 93, the swinging piece 672 connected to the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. Therefore, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swinging piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left direction in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swinging piece 672 The abutted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 abuts. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball 687 is weak even if the hitting ball 687 is reciprocated by the rotation of the firing motor 695, and the hitting ball in the firing position is elastic. Even if it is emitted, it does not reach the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves in the direction of the left space inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swinging piece 672 swings and tilts about the lower shaft hole 673, the contact between the contact portion 675 and the abutted portion 679 causes the slide rod 677 to move in the other direction (rightward in FIG. 94). Slide towards. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball 687 becomes stronger when the hitting ball 687 is reciprocated and rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, and the hitting ball in the firing position is It is strongly bombarded to reach the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the resilience of the ball can be adjusted according to the amount of sliding of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the elastic force by the hitting and firing device 650, but the movement of the slide member 710 is determined by the rotation of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 described above. It is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 which moves in response to the turning operation of the movement operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, by rotating the pivoting operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, the cam 416 in the form of a fixed ball fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 also rotates. 182 slides in the interior of the joint unit mounting recess 110c in one direction. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 provided on the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. In a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the discharge device attachment portion 520 of the main body frame 5 to insert the slide member 710. It is to be inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side of the inclined side 183 a of the slide protrusion 183 is in contact with the side wall in the slide direction front and is inserted between the upper and lower sandwiching pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide projection 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides along with the slide movement of the slide member 710, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hitting ball of the hitting and firing device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the ball striking and firing device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the hit and fired device 650 cooperate with or separate from each other. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710 and the handle device 400 The slide projection 183 separates from the insertion space 714 and separates the handle device 400 and the hitting and firing device 650 by opening the door frame 5 to the body frame 3 in cooperation with the hitting and firing device 650. As the door frame 5 is opened and closed, cooperation and separation between the handle unit 400 and the ball striking and firing unit 650 can be performed extremely easily. In particular, when the slide projection 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projection 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 provided in the insertion space 714 is provided. The surface 717 allows the slide projection 183 to be smoothly inserted into the nipping position.

  Also, sometimes the player stuffs a stuffing into the pivoting operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fixes it at a position where it is pivoted to a certain extent, but the clerk of the game arcade does not know the stuff May open and close 5 Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem since the slide projection 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projection 183 The slide member is accompanied by the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the slide protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the slide member Finally, the slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are engaged while moving the 710 in one direction. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 is fixed at any rotation position, cooperation between the operation handle device 400 and the ball striking and launching device 650 can be performed. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B) and a side view (C) of the award ball tank 720. FIG. As described above, the award ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the award ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the notch portion 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom thereof is the downstream side wall 723 from the upstream side wall 724. The reservoir portion 728 is formed of a first sloped bottom surface 726 sloped toward the and a second sloped bottom surface 727 sloped from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described next.

  Further, a discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the slope of the second sloped bottom surface 727, and the discharge port 730 protrudes outside the rear wall 722 of the award ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It is formed to be surrounded by the outlet projecting wall 725 connecting the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 in a U-shape. In addition, mounting flanges 733 engaged with the tank mounting grooves 550 are formed on both ends outside of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, and the bottom of the prize ball tank 720 has the bottom face of the main body frame 3. Mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 protruding from the four side wall 543 are provided in a protruding manner, and a ball aligning member 744 described later is attached to the lower part of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the winning ball tank 720 A leveling mounting shaft 735 is provided in a protruding manner. Further, an overflow prevention member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the award ball tank 720 except the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting collar 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are mounted on the main body frame 3. The fourth side wall 543 is abutted. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is mounted on and attached to the upper surface of the back surface of the main body frame 3. In this mounted state, as shown in FIG. 74, storage is performed via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described next. ing. Therefore, in the award ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) storing balls is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. While being formed to be substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction to the fourth side wall 543, the fourth side wall 543 is placed on the upper side of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, as described above, since the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are formed deep so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral portion of the game board 4, the side wall 541 to Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper portion of the 543 is formed shallower than that of the conventional reservoir tank, the prize ball tank 720 is formed even if the prize balls are stored and the weight increases. Since the whole is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the balls stored can be smoothly led to the discharge port 730 without any deformation of the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727. In addition, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the award ball tank 720, the flow of the balls stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. Is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which the opening is provided in a part of the inclined bottom as in the prior art and used as the discharge port, the ball breaking protrusion for elimination of the ball clogging is formed in the reservoir near the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging to occur.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 accommodating the rear projection of the gaming apparatus, and the prize Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 is provided so as to project outward beyond the rear wall 722 of the storage section, the tank rail member 740 is located outside the storage section of the prize ball tank 720 (when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 Side, and the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, so the rear projection of the gaming apparatus provided on the back of the game board 4 is accommodated. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected backward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, whereby the rear projection of the gaming apparatus is projected at the upper side of the game board 4 It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 accommodating the rear projection of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is of the prize ball tank 720. The configuration provided outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that the conventional prize ball tank does not have. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the balls at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the drawing, at normal times, the balls stored in the winning ball tank 720 are stored in the storage portion of the winning ball tank 720 and are in a stagnant state. In this case, when a part of the inclined bottom of the storage portion is opened to form the discharge port 730A as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. When the discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball breaking protrusion 736B, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge ball 730A is formed with the discharge port 730A formed on the opposite side. In the portion 730B, the pressure of the stored ball and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure always cause the ball pressure to be applied to the discharge port 730A, 730B from four directions.

  For this reason, even if the pressure of the balls is balanced depending on the degree of polymerization of the balls, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, the ball biting state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B and ball clogging may occur. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere at the outlet 730 is a pressure from two directions, ie, an acting force from the reservoir toward the outlet 730 and its reaction, and it does not receive pressure from all directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult for the ball biting state in the discharge port 730 to occur, and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that no ball clogging occurs.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Subsequently, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the above-described award ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 100 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship between a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail member 740, a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, and a full tank unit 900. FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball | bowl passage unit 770. FIG.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear surface wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, on the tank rail member 740, a plurality of locking projections 749 to be inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 are protruded at the left and right sides and the lower side of the side surface on the rear surface side. At the center, a hook-shaped locking projection 750 which is latched from above on the rail locking groove 554 is provided in a protruding manner. Then, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape whose upper surface is open, the upstream end upper surface of which faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the downstream end lower surface thereof is in the ball passage unit 770 described later in detail. I am facing. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 is a passage 742 through which the balls flow in two rows by dividing walls 741.

  A fine groove is cut off at the bottom of the passage 742 so that foreign matter rolling along the passage 742 with the ball drops downward from the fine groove. Also, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742 and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68) described above. ing. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the ball flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate via the grounding wire connector 557 and the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 1136 to the outside.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight is provided swingably on the slightly downstream side of the middle region of the tank rail member 740. The ball straightening member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball straightening attachment shaft 735 of the above-mentioned winning ball tank 720, and is directed toward the inside of the two rows of passages 742 in the tank rail member 740. The balls are suspended, and the balls flowing down the respective passages 742 rectify so as to become one stage when flowing down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 downstream of the installation position of the ball straightening member 744 is covered by a ball holding plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in a slanted arc shape so that the ball which has not been made into one step by the ball aligning member 744 is forcibly made into one step.

  Further, at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740, a pair of aligning gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 facing the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 such that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by half a pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the ball which has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 is brought downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the balls of the two rows of the passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the balls having flowed through the respective passages 742 are guided centrally along the inclined surface 743 formed at the lower part of the two rows of the passages 742 while meshing with the aligning gear 747 During guidance, balls from the two rows of passages 742 are alternately dropped in a line at the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described next. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arc-shaped gear cover 746 at its upper surface.

[1-3 E. Ball passage unit]
Next, a ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a row from the tank rail member 740 to the winning ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the award ball unit 800. It is a side view for explaining. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the gear ball 866, the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841, and the unit sub plate 825 are removed from the prize ball unit 800, and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 is depicted in an easy-to-understand manner. is there. However, gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dashed lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the ball passage unit 770 of this example, a ball drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent on the back surface (a surface seen from the back surface is called the surface) of a substantially rectangular plate. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front and rear bending passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front and rear direction (the depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front and rear bending passage portion 772a. It comprises a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in a direction (left and right as viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and substantially vertical.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), since the position of the upper end inlet 773 which falls from the tank rail member 740 mentioned above is the approximate center of the two rows of the passages 742 as shown in FIG. Since the back side of the upper rear surface wall 545 of the frame 3 and the rear surface wall 546 on the support side is away from the front surface, the prize ball guide projections provided on the front and rear bent passage portion 772 a and the rear support wall s The ball drop passage 772 is bent in the front-rear direction so as to be close to the surface of the pivoting side rear face wall 546. In addition, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bending passage portion 772b is formed in a U-shape so as to fill the substantially horizontal width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the force of the ball which has dropped from the tank rail member 740. It is formed by bending.

  Furthermore, although the vertical passage portion 772c is also formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly gently curved, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bending passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c, and the notch portion A broken ball detection piece 776 whose upper end is pivotally supported by a support shaft 777 is attached pivotably at 775. A ball breakage switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball breakage detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball breakage switch 778 is in contact with the ball breakage detection piece 776. The broken ball detection unit 776 and the broken ball switch 778 constitute a broken ball detection mechanism for detecting broken balls in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball breakage detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and pushes the actuator 779 to turn on the ball breakage switch 778. Since the broken ball detection piece 776 swings toward the inside of the vertical passage portion 772c when the ball disappears in the portion 772c due to the ball clogging or the ball shortage, the actuator 779 turns the ball broken switch 778 OFF. When the out-of-ball switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 described later is stopped and the payout of the prize balls is stopped.

  A stopper projection 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 in order to prevent excessive swinging of the broken ball detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 is provided with a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogged insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 when it is difficult for the ball crush detection piece 776 to swing due to a ball clog or the like, and the ball clog c To eliminate the problem of Furthermore, the other bending passage wall 771 facing the broken ball detection piece 776 is formed to bulge slightly toward the broken ball detection piece 776 side. This is for reliably pressing the broken ball detection piece 776 to turn on the broken ball switch 778 when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Further, in the ball passage unit 770, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed at a position avoiding the ball drop passage 772 described above. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574 formed on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is a passage unit similarly formed on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 It corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the locking hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while engaging the positioning boss 783 with the positioning pin 574 This can be done by screwing the screw 784 from the locking hole 782 in the state. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 engaging with the engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side thereof, and for connecting with the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connection lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting like an arc on the back surface of a rectangular plate material, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 is formed. The projection shaft 789 as a rotation shaft portion which is provided to project from the end of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connection lid member 786 is fitted to the support projection 787 as the shaft support portion which is provided to project from Thus, it is pivotally supported pivotally. Further, the connecting lid member 786 is extended downward of the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 is in communication with the downstream end of the ball falling passage 772 (FIG. 105B). The state shown) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 does not communicate with the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 (the state shown in FIG. 105A) can be turned by opening. At the time of transition from the open state to the closed state, a guide projection 791 for guiding the support piece 788 of the connection lid member 786 is provided to project from the lower end portion of the rear surface of the ball passage unit 770.

  In a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the pivotally supported rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 and a state in which the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted to the pivotally rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105) In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed, and the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball are locked by locking the rear surface with the locking elastic claw 820 provided on the winning ball unit 800. A passage wall 790 communicates with the bending passage 803 of the unit 800 so that the ball falling in the ball falling passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bending passage 803 of the winning ball unit 800. The reason for providing the pivoting connection lid member 786 to the ball passage unit 770 in this way is that the prize ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as described later The space formed between the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800 due to the attachment to the ball does not inhibit the smooth falling of the ball.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 provided in the ball passage unit 770, the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 is provided so as to be gradually lowered toward the downstream side. By inserting the prize ball guiding projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball dropping passage 772 is back-faced so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball dropping passage 772 is located approximately at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front and rear bent passage portion 772a bent in the front and rear direction as seen from the figure. Thus, in a configuration in which the balls flowing downward in two rows are alternately sent one by one to the award ball unit 800 side by the pair of alignment gears 747, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the award ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772 Can. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced and the ball drop passage 772 is assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Also, the ball falling from the tank rail member 740 through the front and rear bending passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left and right bending passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . Further, a ball breakage detecting mechanism (ball breakage detecting piece 776 and ball breakage switch 778) for detecting a ball breakage is provided in the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the force is weakened. In this way, it is possible to reliably detect that the ball in the ball drop passage 772 has broken, in other words, that the ball supplied to the prize ball unit 800 has broken (ball breakage).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-mentioned ball passage unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit 800 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. FIG. 109 is a rear view for illustrating the passage and driving relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG.

  In FIG. 106, the prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 having a bending passage 803 forming a ball passage by a pair of bending passage walls 802, a prize ball passage 810, and a ball extraction passage 811; The unit sub plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub board 825, the relay terminal plate 830 within the prize ball unit attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825, and the substantially central surface area (rear surface side region) And a gear cover 866 covering the detection disc 850 (rotational transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages protruding toward the plate unit sub plate 825 side. The wall 802 forms a bending passage 803. The bending passage wall 802 is protruded at a slightly larger distance than the diameter of the sphere from the upper center to the middle of the upper side of the unit base body 801, but the middle to the middle The side walls of both ends of the unit base body 801 also function from the lower end to the downstream end. Further, a portion where the middle bending passage wall 802 is largely divided into right and left constitutes a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 as a ball feeding rotary body is disposed, A passage section wall 809 is formed so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 which are divided into right and left by the downstream end of the.

  That is, two passages are formed on the left and right from the distribution space 805 by the left and right bent passage walls 802 and the passage section walls 809 from the middle to the downstream side, and one of the passages constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage constitutes a ball removal passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided to the left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed in a motor housing space 814 formed at a position avoiding the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the award ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) and within the depth width of the ball passage. It is fixed. The bending passage 803 is formed in a serpentine shape so as to reduce pressure on the sprocket 807 of the ball staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 is for storing small dust and the like that has entered the inside of the bending passage 803, so that dust and the like accumulated when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3 can be taken out.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a dispensing member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) recesses in which balls are fitted on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing sleeve 806 for supporting the other end of the rotating shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side is formed. , And the counting switch 812 is detachably mounted.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the tip, and a switch fitting recess 865 conforming to the shape of the rear end is formed by the bent passage wall 802 By doing this, it can be easily and removably attached. A wire (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a relay terminal board 830 in a prize ball unit described later. Further, on the downstream side of the curved passage wall 802 constituting the award ball passage 810, a locking claw engaged with the locking portion 860 formed on the passage cover plate portion 859 integrally formed with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality 813 is formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 engaged with one locking portion 860 on the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  Further, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 is formed. The cylindrical main body of the dispensing motor 815 is accommodated in the inside of the housing. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed by a screw 817 to the back surface side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 by the pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface. Then, in a state where the dispensing motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the dispensing motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 The gear 843 is fixed.

  Further, by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841, a space in the depth width direction in which the above-mentioned bent passage 803, award ball passage 810, and ball release passage 811 are formed. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated and disposed therein. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the above-described sprocket 807 is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, a guiding protrusion 819 for guiding the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extracting passage 811 to the back surface side of the winning ball unit 800 is projected on the unit base body 801. The induced ball is guided to a ball connection passage 880 to be described later and is finally released to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection weir provided below the island platform). Further, on the upper part of the unit base body 801, a locking elastic claw 820 for locking the connection lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 mentioned above is provided in a protruding manner, A mounting boss 823 for connecting a button insertion engagement hole 821 and a hook-like engagement portion 824 for detachably attaching to the rear wall 546, and the gear cover 866 in a state in which the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 are held. Is provided.

  A rod-like detachable button 822 is provided slidably on the upper side of the unit base body 801 in the button insertion engagement hole 821 so as to be slidable in the depth width direction, and as described later, its front end Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 is concave so that the tip end portion of the locking elastic claw 564 is inserted. Further, the hook-like engagement portion 824 engages with the engagement protrusion 565 formed on the pivotally supporting rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the pivotally support rear surface wall 546 The hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement projection 565 engage with each other by pressing downward. Then, since the locking elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged in the engaged state, the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 can not be performed.

  The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 is formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. In addition, a mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 in a state in which the unit sub plate 825 is held is protruded long toward the rear surface side, and a through hole drilled in the unit sub plate 825 After penetrating through 858, screwing the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 in correspondence with the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are connected while holding the unit sub plate 825 doing.

  The configuration of unit sub plate 825 covering unit base body 801 described above will be described. The unit sub plate 825 is a composite that covers bending passage 803 portion of unit base body 801, distribution space 805 portion, and award ball passage 810 portion. It is configured by attaching an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 to which a dispensing motor 815 is attached to a resin plate member and which covers the downstream portion of the ball removal passage 811. Then, on the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub plate 825, a relay substrate region 826 for attaching the in-a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 under it. A gear area 840 is formed in which 844, 847 and a detection disc 850 are attached.

  The relay substrate area 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit are protruded along the square shape, and the upper and lower sides of one vertical side thereof will be described later. An engaging groove 828 to be engaged with the engaging projection 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw 829 to be engaged with the locking projection 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other vertical side. There is. Further, in the relay substrate area 826, a button insertion hole 834 through which the mounting / dismounting button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the in-prism-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with a screw (not shown) are formed. .

  The inter-prize-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the above-described relay substrate area 826 will be described later, including the counting switch 812 provided on the prize-ball unit 800, the payout motor 815, and the rotation angle switch 855 described later. For relaying the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126), a plurality of connectors are provided for that purpose, and the button insertion hole 833 and the mounting boss portion 832 through which the mounting and demounting button 822 is inserted. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are drilled. Thus, the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown) in a state where the inter-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the mounting rib 827 of the relay substrate area 826 The ball unit internal relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub plate 825.

  Also, the inter-prize-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered by the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one side vertical side of the base cover 835 and a substantially central side of the other side vertical side. ing. In addition, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement projections 836 of the substrate cover 835 are inserted into and engaged with the engagement grooves 828 of the relay substrate area 826, the engagement projections 837 and the engagement claws 829 are easily engaged. The base member cover 835 can cover the in-ball unit inner relay terminal plate 830. Conversely, in the case of removal, the locking claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the locking projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally to the front side to engage the engagement protrusion 836 and the engagement groove portion 828. It can be disengaged from the In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 is inserted through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838 There is. Further, the wiring connected to the in-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844 and 847 provided in the gear area 840 formed on the unit sub plate 825 and the detection disc 850 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the dispensing motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825 The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. A second gear 844 (rotational transmission gear) meshing with the first gear 843 is pressed into one end on the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 above the first gear 843 and is a shaft in which an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 is drilled. A third gear 847 (rotational transmission gear) meshing with the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the unit sub plate 825, above the second gear 844. It is rotatably provided on a shaft 848 which is press-fitted into a shaft hole 849 to be formed. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (following gear) meshing with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 808 for supporting the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip of motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in the receiving hole formed in gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into and supported by a bearing sleeve 806 formed at the unit base body 801 at one end, and supported at a bearing hole formed at the gear cover 866 at the other end. A sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in a distribution space 805 through an axial through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and a detection disc 850 is formed in a space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface of the detection disc 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disc 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is supposed to rotate Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disc 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed a size larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion projecting outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the concave portion of the sprocket 807 (in the case shown , Three detection notches 851 are formed. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emission / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotational position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate attachment portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub plate 825 It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is used to monitor whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 detected within a predetermined interval time during the dispensing operation. Temporarily, when abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (mostly in the ball biting state by the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and reverse a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, ball biting state) It is The number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the above-mentioned winning ball passage 810 and used for counting. In addition, as shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also held by the substrate attachment portion formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, among the plurality of gears provided in the gear area 840, the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotation shaft 845 pressed into the gear cover 866, and the gear cover 866 covering the gear area 840. The mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 protruding from the unit base body 801 and penetrating the through hole 858 of the unit sub plate 825. Then, while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub plate 825 side, the mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned. By screwing with a screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is held, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed. In addition, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 inside the winning ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal plate 830 inside the winning ball unit and the payout control board 1186 described later) A wire processing piece 869 is provided to project and hold.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above, but in the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub plate 825, the in-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830, the substrate cover 835 and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is positioned so as to be accommodated below the bending passage 803 where the ball to be dispensed is guided. Further, in the unit base body 801, the sprocket 807 disposed in the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the award ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) and the ball width of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein is provided, and the unit sub plate 825 rotates the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-closing surface side to rotate the sprocket 807 A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844 and 847, and gear portion 852 of detection disc 850) for transmitting to shaft 808 is provided, and in discharge space 805 of dispensing motor 815 and bending passage 803 A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear area 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub plate 825, and a sprocket 807 as a dispensing member to be arranged. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disc 850) connecting the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 The prize ball unit 800 can be thinner than in the case where a part of the dispensing motor or the sprocket is disposed outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further reduced in thickness by forming the ball passages (the flex passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball withdrawal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in the form of a single passage. Is being promoted. That is, unlike the conventional case where the payout motor 815 is protruded to the front side, the rear side or the side of the winning ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the pivoting rear side wall 546 of the main body frame 3 Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be configured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the dispensing motor 815 slightly protrudes from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is, as shown in FIG. Since the front portion of the main body frame 3 is faced from the lower portion for the discharge motor relief opening 572, the projection amount is a degree obtained by subtracting the plate thickness dimension of the axially supported rear surface wall 546 from the protrusion dimension as a result Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the pivotally supported rear face wall 546 is slight. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the gaming board 4 is provided between the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the winning ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. The storage space for storing the rearward projecting portion of the gaming apparatus can be made large in the depth and width directions.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The lower end of the winning ball unit 800 is hooked to the locking groove 573 and the winning ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projection 565. It is pushed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the winning ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projection 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. The lock elastic claws 564 are engaged with the button insertion engagement holes 821 in order to prevent the respective engaged states from being easily released by moving the prize ball unit 800 upward. It is supposed to

  That is, by the engagement of the locking elastic claws 564 with the button insertion engagement holes 821, the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 in the mounted state is prevented. In this manner, after the winning ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, thereby causing the ball fall of the ball passage unit 770. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the curved passage 803 of the winning ball unit 800 can be communicated via the passage formed by the pair of passage walls 790. Further, when the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 and the prize ball inlet 927 of the full unit 900 described later are connected, and the downstream end of the ball withdrawal passage 811 is the ball withdrawal connection passage. It is connected with the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the locking elastic claws 820 is released and the connection lid member 786 is pivoted to the front side, and then the mounting / dismounting button 822 is pressed to lock the elastic claws 564 for locking. The ball is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the locking elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled up with the attaching / detaching button 822 kept pressed, to thereby obtain the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement of the lower end portion of the hook with the locking groove 573 and the engagement of the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement projection 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, the prize ball unit 800 is It can be easily removed.

[1-3 G. Full tank unit]
Subsequently, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described winning ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the full tank unit 900 as viewed from the back, and FIG. 114 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the far port 610, FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view cut at the bottom swinging plate 907 portion provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the far port 610.

  The filling unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the filling unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above, and as shown in FIG. A cover 926 covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is designed such that the balls flowing in from the downstream end of the winning ball passage 810 are guided in a zigzag shape and discharged from the outlet 921. For this reason, a lateral guiding passage 902 is formed at the upstream portion thereof for guiding the balls flowing from the prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 laterally from one end to the other end. At one end immediately below the award ball inlet 927 of the side guide passage 902, a side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the ball laterally is provided. A shock absorbing member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the nozzle 902 for receiving the impact of the ball flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guiding the ball downstream.

  Also, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is induced to flow in the direction opposite to the flow of the ball in the side guide passage 902 after changing its direction to the downstream side. A reverse side induction passage 905 is formed. The balls having flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 are then led to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the prize of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. You will be led to the ball contact 343.

  A bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the upstream bottom surface of the reverse side induction passage 905, and the bottom surface rocking plate 907 swingably closes the bottom surface opening 906. There is. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape whose upper surface is opened, and a pair of pivotally supporting projections 911 project from the side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the inside. In addition, a circular spring placement recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom of the bottom opening 906. On the other hand, a bottom rocking plate 907 closing the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and a semicircular bearing supported by being fitted to the pivoting protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the back side downstream side A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring engagement projection 910 with which the upper end of the spring 913 is engaged is provided to project downward at the center of the back surface of the bottom surface swinging plate 907. Therefore, the bottom swinging plate 907 is biased by the biasing force of the spring 913 such that the upstream side is always swung upward. In the spring 913, the bottom swinging plate 907 does not swing downward even when the number of paid out prize balls (for example, 15 pieces) is placed on the bottom swinging plate 907 at one time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or more than the number of dispensed pieces are formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom surface swinging plate 907. Further, on the upstream side of the bottom swinging plate 907, a detection protrusion 909 is projected forward. The detection projection 909 penetrates the communication hole 929 and is positioned in the switch housing space 914 which will be described next, when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom surface rocking plate 907 is rotatably supported on the shaft support projection 911. It has become.

  A switch storage space 914 for storing a full tank switch 916 is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the switch storage space 914 at the upper end of the reverse side induction passage 905. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 for holding the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch including a light projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Furthermore, a far ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the far ball passage 922 is formed by bending so that the far ball inlet 923 on the upstream side communicates with the above-described far port 610 and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guiding passage 920. It is done. For this reason, the farball taken into the far mouth 610 is guided to the front guidance passage 920 through the farball passage 922 which is bent from the farball inlet 923, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball contact 343 as a dish unit. It is returned to 300.

  Further, in the box main body 901, an engagement piece 924 which is engaged with a unit engagement groove 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923 A hooking projection 925 is formed which engages with a hooking piece 928 formed on the lid 926. The hooking projections 925 are appropriately formed on upper left and right rear side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape to cover the upper surfaces of the side induction passage 902, the reverse side induction passage 905, the front induction passage 920, and the far ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball inlet 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end 902. Further, around the lid 926, a hooking piece 928 for engaging with the hooking projection 925 of the box main body 901 is protruded downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the winning ball passage 810 of the winning ball unit 800 are on the upstream side of the side guidance passage 902 from the winning ball inlet 927. It is guided laterally by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball that has collided with the buffer member 904 is guided downstream as it is in the reverse lateral guiding passage 905 in the opposite direction to the guiding direction of the side guiding passage 902 and is guided to the front guiding passage 920. From the exit 921, it is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the ball of the far ball entering from the far ball inlet 923 is also weakened by the bent far ball passage 922 and joins the forward guiding passage 920, and from the exit 921 of the forward guiding passage 920 through the prize ball connection 343 It is led to the dish unit 300.

  When the ball flows naturally from inside the side induction passage 902 to the reverse side induction passage 905 when the ball naturally flows in the full tank unit 900 under normal conditions, it falls to the bottom swinging plate 907. Since the resilient force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of paid-out balls is about normal, the bottom swinging plate 907 does not swing, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. The switch enters between the light emitter and the light receiver of the full tank switch 916 so that the switch does not conduct (OFF). On the other hand, when the winning balls are stored in the tray unit 300 and the balls are filled in the full tank unit 900, the bottom swing formed in the entire upstream side of the front guide passage 920 and the reverse side guide passage 905. The bottom swinging plate 907 swings downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 by the pressure of the ball stored on the moving plate 907, and as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It comes out from between the light emitter and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 916, and the switch is in a conductive state (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational drive of the payout motor 815 of the winning ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of winning balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of winning balls Is to be stopped after being paid out.

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is performed by the bottom swing plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the passage bottom of the passage (in the illustrated case, the opposite side induction passage 905) where the ball flows down. 916 is actuated and the biasing member (spring 913) urges the bottom swing plate 907 to swing when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the flow of the ball at the normal time Therefore, the ball clogged is not detected due to the ball clogged as compared to the conventional case where the ball clogged is detected by the ball clumped on the bottom surface of a portion of the passage etc. It can be reliably prevented. This is something which can reliably detect the fullness of the ball.

  Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, since the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 is detachably attached, the full tank apparatus is formed in the main body frame as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared to one assembled inside the dispensing passage. In addition, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. There is no chance that the winning balls will fly out of the dish unit 300. Furthermore, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, since the far ball passage 922 guiding the far ball is arranged to weaken and join the ball in the middle of the forward guiding passage 920 that pays out the winning balls. Feal spheres can be merged without disturbing the flow of the spheres.

[1-4. Lock device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached vertically along the rear side end side on the open side of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3. FIG. 118 is an enlarged side cross sectional view showing the hooking structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut horizontally in a position slightly lower than the longitudinal center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows the detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the lock device 1000, a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view seen from the rear side of the lock device 1000 (A FIG. 123 is a perspective view (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding wedge 1040 and a main frame sliding wedge 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3 from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 and, as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated case) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and the upper and lower end portions between the rising portion of the first side wall 540 and the upper portion of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, which will be described next, is supported by a lock attachment hole 547 which is formed by being notched in the middle and a lock attachment hole 547 which is formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 bends metal so as to become U-shaped in cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are provided slidably therein. The width dimension is extremely thin compared to a conventional lock device integrated on a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. This makes the size of the game board 4 extremely large in the left and right direction and the vertical direction as described above, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is large. A mounting structure that allows the lock device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by forming a smaller width dimension of the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. Then, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, so in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 The sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 have an anti-tampering structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook through opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 are penetrated is established at the upper and lower sides of the U-shaped base 1001 opposite to the open side. And a screw fixing portion 1003 is horizontally provided in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 123) in close contact with the first side wall 540, and the side surface 1001a does not contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed protruding from the upper end portion and the middle portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking projection 1004 is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (Refer to FIG. 118). In this state, since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. It can be fixed. In addition, attachment by screw of lock device 1000 is formed not only at the upper and middle screw stop portion 1003 but also in the upper vicinity of screw stop portion 1003 and cylinder lock through hole 526 formed on lock attachment piece 1008 described later. The lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 corresponding to the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, at the time of the attachment, the locking projections 1004 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 and positioned and locked. Screws 1003 formed at two points on the closed side (rear part) of the base 1001 and screws 1003 formed on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 into the lock mounting holes 547 Since the structure is fixed by a screw, the front part of the lock device 1000 is locked by the locking projection 1004 and the lock hole 548, and the rear portion of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower part of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment hole 547, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width dimension, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear portions of the lock device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (or the fixing structure) of the front part is provided so as to protrude on the side surface 1001 a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. And the screwing portion 1003 and the screwing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed to protrude horizontally from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  In addition, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper part, middle part and lower part of both side faces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are formed on the U-shaped base 1001. By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in a stored state and caulking it, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001. it can. That is, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are formed one each for the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, lower portions of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050, respectively. The rivet 1006 penetrates the long holes for rivets 1055 and 1061 so that the door frame sliding wedge 1040 can move upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050, as shown in FIG. 122 (C). A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Furthermore, in the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side, and the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 is protruded in a lateral direction, and further, an insertion longitudinal opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are provided on the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retracts. This point will be described in detail later. Also, with the lock attachment piece 1008 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the front end of the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 is positioned lower than the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510. The lock attachment piece 1008 is provided with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 passes, and an attachment hole formed in the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are drilled at two upper and lower positions, and further, a screw stop portion 1003 for mounting the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is drilled.

  In addition, the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 is an opening for the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 to enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamperproof members 1023 and 1032, and the escape lateral hole 1022 forms an escape hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  Referring to the cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 described above, the cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011 and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body is a lock attachment substrate An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 which engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when it is rotated, and the other end The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when the side is rotated. In the cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009, and the attachment holes 1013 and the lock attachment piece 1008 are formed in the upper and lower two places of the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by aligning the mounting hole 1014 with the mounting hole 1014 and screwing with a screw 1012.

  Next, the tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are provided to prevent the body frame slide rod 1050 from being improperly lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. . Thus, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate configured to be swingable around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 described above is the swing shaft hole 1025. Of the insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050, the mounting holes 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached by the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006.

  Further, in the first fraud prevention member 1023, a vertically long projecting piece insertion hole 1026 overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 is opened in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 is inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. It is supposed to be able to That is, the second engagement projection 1018 penetrates through the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, whereby the elevation engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is adapted to be engaged. In addition, an outer outline obliquely above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 abuts on the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, and when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 The first fraud preventing member 1023 swings (clockwise in FIG. 125 (B)) about the swinging shaft hole 1025 by the contact.

  Furthermore, a stopper piece portion 1027 is provided on the outer contour of the first fraud prevention member 1023 at a position obliquely below the protrusion insertion hole 1026, and a restriction projection piece 1031 is provided below the stopper piece portion 1027. Pin holes 1029 and connection holes 1030 are formed at the top and the bottom of the projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 enters the engagement prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is incorrect. To prevent sliding. In addition, although the control protrusion 1031 is connected by the spring 1035 with the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, when the spring 1035 is connected, the biasing direction of the second fraud prevention member 1032 To regulate the movement of In the pin hole 1029, the guide pin 1028 is inserted, with the guide pin 1028 inserted, with the guide pin 1028 being fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first tamper resistant member 1023. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  The second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the above-described first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of a reverse "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed in the upper one end, and a spring engagement is formed in the upper other end A stop hole 1036 is bored and an abutment 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is made to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and to be connected by the connection pin 1034, and the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base 1001 at one end. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. The contact portion 1037 is in contact with a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The actions of the above-described first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally integrated toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. It is protrusively installed. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame It projects forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the front door 3 and is locked to a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 is engaged with the hook cover 158 by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. It can be released.

  Further, a vertically long rivet long hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole for the top of the rivet long hole 1042 is formed. A guide projection 1043 is provided at the lower side of the lower portion 1042 of the sliding door 1040 and the lower end of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which a rivet 1006 to be inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is penetrated, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the upward movement of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. It is vertically formed. Then, in the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating and in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042. Further, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050, and the sliding ridge 1040 for the door frame The sliding action between the body and the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is a sliding wedge 1050 for the main frame. The spring hook portion 1057 formed on the upper hook member 1051 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is biased downward and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is biased upward. A contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape in the middle of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. The contact elastic piece 1047 is formed into a convex shape by being punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by pressing, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 for the door frame internally. It is intended to prevent the sliding wedge 1040 from rattling.

  Further, both longitudinal play holes 1044 and upward engagement holes 1045 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the free end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is moved so that the play hole 1044 does not get in the way of its rotation operation. Make up a space to In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 is engaged such that the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is lifted by its turning operation. It is to do. A relief notch 1049 which is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed at the lower rear of the vertical side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. The relief notch portion 1049 is formed so as not to disturb the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 in order to reliably engage the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; It consists of That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is not necessarily constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are metal A plate made of aluminum is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 protruding rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projection moving hole 1056 are formed in the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connection hole 1058 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and a contact portion 1059 is further formed at the upper side and the lower side. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing projection 38 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side, and the hook portion is upward. It is formed.

  The rivet long hole 1055 corresponds to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and in the normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet long hole 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet elongated hole 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. In the protrusion moving hole 1056, the guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted as described above, and the mutual movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is performed. It is supposed to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is one in which the other end of the spring 1048 is locked as described above. The connection hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053. Furthermore, when the contact portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 is performed smoothly and without rattling. In order to

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion, and the rivet elongated hole 1061, the lowering engagement hole 1062, the play hole 1063 and the projection are projected from the upper to the lower of the plate surface portion. A connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front longitudinal side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower end of the rear longitudinal side, and the upper side and the lower side A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 is engaged with the closing projection 41 provided on the lower side of the open side of the outer frame 2 through the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001, and the hook portion is upward. It is formed. The rivet long hole 1061 corresponds to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and in a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet long hole 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lower end of the rivet elongated hole 1061.

  Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. The lower engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by its turning operation when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and turned. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip end portion of the second engagement projection 1018 so as not to disturb the turning operation when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. In the protrusion moving hole 1064, the guide protrusion 1043 below the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted as described above, and the mutual movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is performed. It is supposed to guide you. Further, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1060. Further, when the contact portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is performed smoothly and without rattling. In order to

  As mentioned above, although each member which constitutes lock device 1000 was explained, in order to assemble this lock device 1000, upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 of sliding lever 1050 for main frames are connected with connecting wire rod 1053 In that state, the guide projection 1043 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length Holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the overlapped state. While the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001 You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. However, when inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Before attaching the first tamperproof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamperproof member 1023 and the second tamperproof member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 has to be inserted into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Further, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036 to form a second fraud prevention member 1032 Is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tamper resistant member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is formed on the body frame 3 The locking projection 1004 projecting like a hook is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 while being inserted into the hook hole 549 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 and the screwing are horizontally protruded in that state. By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, as shown in FIG. 117, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 . In the case of the present embodiment, in particular, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001, The screwing portion 1003 and the screwing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the present invention are formed to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the first side wall 540.

  The operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening and closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening and closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state in which the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are engaged, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are engaged. There is. As shown in FIG. 124B, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction of entering the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in that state, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 and pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the biasing force of the spring 1048, and The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and descended. As a result, since the locking projections of the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are released, the main frame is pulled by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be released to the outer frame 2.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 124A). 1065, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are closed by the projections 38 and 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the body frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, the upward claws of the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing projections 38, 41 are engaged again. The main frame sliding rod 1050 ascends and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, so pulling the door frame 5 to the front side causes the door frame 5 to be released. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 158 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. Since the sliding door for door frame 1040 ascends upward, the sliding hook 1040 of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 is lowered to return to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, locking in the entire length in the vertical direction of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is securely performed, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are forcibly opened up and the illegal act of inserting illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval There is also the advantage that it can not be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing this, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In this case, a piano wire or the like may be hooked on hooks 1054, 1065 of the main frame sliding lever 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, and an illegal act of lowering this may be performed. It is supposed that you can not do such cheating. The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 It is in the state of contact. In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 becomes the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. For this reason, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding wedge 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It can not be taken down (unlocked) illegally, and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing about 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to retract from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 It can be opened.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . Therefore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, for the door frame provided inside Since the sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, they are completely covered. Even when trying to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the closed space of the incorrect tool is made by the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Since the intrusion is blocked, it has a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, as described in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment is used for the door frame inside of the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin compared to the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidingly setting the sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 and for operating the lock device 1000 is lower than the lower edge of the game board Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the up and down direction is made extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly to the back of 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of section U-shaped faces the back of body frame 3, in the state where lock device 1000 was attached to body frame 3, sliding frame 1040 for door frames provided in the inside and the body The frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. Therefore, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Fraudulent acts such as pulling down the frame sliding rod 1050 can not be easily performed.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, locking projections 1004 formed at three places on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 and positioned and locked. The lock device 1000 has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle, and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws. The front part of the lock is locked by the lock projection 1004 and the lock lock hole 548, and the rear part of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the above embodiment, the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to form a screwing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder frame through hole 526 of the body frame 3. Instead of the screw mounting hole 547 being screwed, the tip of the screw 1012 passes through the lock mounting piece 1008 using the screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008. The lock mounting holes to be screwed may be formed on the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 526. Also, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be made on the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear of the It has been confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the embodiment described above, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. A sliding door 1040 for the door frame and a sliding door 1050 for the main frame are attached to the opposite side 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 by means of rivets etc. L-shaped base (lock base), and the closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 for the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main body frame The sliding rod 1050 may be housed. Even in this case, the mounting structure and the fraud prevention structure similar to those of the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 1100 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front side FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder that is the main component of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the substrate unit, FIG. 132 is a rear view of the substrate unit, and FIG. 133 is a rear view of the substrate unit with the payout control substrate box and the terminal substrate box removed. FIG. 135 is a schematic view showing the connection relationship of each substrate provided in the substrate unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing an electrical connection between the substrate unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a payout control substrate and the substrate unit of 137 is a part of a rear view of a pachinko machine showing lines etc. FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional location of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed in FIGS. 137 is a front view of the game board incorporating the prevention mechanism, and FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C of FIG.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in a plurality of lower portions on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, Attach the various boards of the door relay board 1102, the power supply board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, the payout control board box 1105, the main drawer relay board 1107, and the sub drawer relay board 1108 to the resin molded frame substrate holder 1101. It is composed of Among the above-mentioned substrates, the door relay substrate 1102, the power supply substrate box 1103, the terminal substrate box 1104 and the delivery control substrate box 1105 are redundantly attached in the front and rear direction to the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, and the main drawer relay The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As described later, since the power supply substrate 1136 creates and supplies +34 V, +18 V, and +9 V, it is a very high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply substrate 1136 is increased. For this reason, by overlappingly attaching the payout control board box 1105 for housing the payout control board 1186 on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103, it is not necessary to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply substrate 1136 and the like and to radiate the heat generated from the power supply substrate 1136. The main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are covered with a substrate cover 1109 and attached. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 127 and 129, the shield heat dissipating plate 1106 in the present embodiment radiates the heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply substrate box 1103 to the outside (outside air). The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106 a. The heat transmitted to the payout control substrate 1186 can be suppressed small by the shield heat sink 1106. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat radiation effect. In addition, it is desirable that the uneven surface 1106 a be formed vertically or obliquely so that heat is easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat dissipating plate 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply substrate 1136 and the like. As a result, the influence of noise due to electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, so that malfunction of the payout control substrate 1186 housed in the payout control substrate box 1105 due to the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat radiation function of the shield heat radiation plate 1106 is not only between the power supply substrate box 1103 and the delivery control substrate box 1105, but also when a plurality of other substrate boxes are redundantly attached to the frame substrate holder 1101. This is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as in this embodiment between the lower substrate box and the upper substrate box.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed in one rear side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay board portion 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square-shaped recess so as to conform to the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102, and the upper and lower sides in the relay substrate recess 1110 are the back surface of the door relay substrate 1102. Of the door relay substrate 1102 is formed in the recess 1110 for the relay substrate, and the detent 1111 is formed to be engaged with the surface of one side vertical side of the door relay substrate 1102 in a state where the door relay substrate 1102 is accommodated ing. Further, mounting bosses 1112 for engaging with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply substrate box 1103 and fastening with screws (not shown) are provided on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 1110 near the outside. It is protrusively installed.

  In addition, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting the wires to be passed inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to protrude in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hooked between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece ing. Furthermore, the region from the top of the relay substrate recess 1110 of the frame substrate holder 1101 to a portion slightly closer to the other end than the approximate center becomes a region for mounting the power supply substrate box 1103 (lower region on the right side described below) On the upper and lower sides thereof, contact protrusions 1115 that contact the back surface of the power supply substrate box 1103 are provided in a protruding manner. Therefore, in the state where power supply substrate box 1103 is mounted in contact with contact protrusion 1115 in the power supply substrate box attachment area, there is a space between the back surface of power supply substrate box 1103 and the vertical surface of frame substrate holder 1101. Wirings for connecting the substrates to each other are accommodated in the space, and two accommodated wiring processing pieces 1114 are capable of locking and collecting the accommodated wirings.

  From the other end side of the region to which the power supply substrate box 1103 is attached to the other end side (left side in FIG. 130) of the frame substrate holder 1101, the amount of backward protrusion is formed large. That is, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a step shape that is high on the left side and low on the right side at a position slightly left from the center when viewed from the back, and the low region on the right side is for mounting the power supply substrate box 1103 (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as "power supply substrate box attachment region"). Then, on the other end side of the power supply substrate box attachment area, an insertion port 1115a is formed into which insertion protrusions 1134 which are provided to protrude above and below the other end of the power supply substrate box 1103 are inserted. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply substrate box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion opening 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply substrate box 1103 are attached to the mounting boss 1112 from above The power supply substrate box 1103 can be fixed to the frame substrate holder 1101 by inserting and fixing with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above-described step-like high region is one of the regions for attaching the dispensing control substrate box 1105 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “dispensing substrate substrate attachment region”). The L-shaped concave wiring arrangement space 1116 is formed in part of the step-like high region. Wiring openings 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) are formed on the bottom of the wiring arrangement space 1116, and the wiring held by the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply substrate box mounting area is It is pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 from the wiring arrangement space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121. Further, on the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control substrate box mounting area, a locking projection 1117 for engaging the engaging elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 is formed to protrude. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 128, FIG. 129 and FIG. 131, the out ball passage 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The outer ball passage 1119 is located on the downstream side of the above-described out port 606 (see FIG. 78), downstream of the ball extraction / discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and upward corresponding to the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is narrowly formed so as to discharge the balls in a row. Therefore, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support projection 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. And, from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball removing ball is released toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, a collection weir of an island).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 and on the front side corresponding to the dispensing control board box mounting area, a predetermined interval in the lateral direction between the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 in the upper area thereof A drawer attachment area 1120 is formed in an empty and parallel manner. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204, 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107, 1108 are penetrated to project drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the respective relay boards 1107, 1108, respectively. Bonding guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are formed at the upper and lower sides of the intermediate position of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joining guide holes 1126 are connected to the board unit 1100 with the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) and the game board 4 provided along with the work of attaching the game board 4 to the main frame 3. The junction guide projection 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 is inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. It is On the other hand, in the guide hole 1125, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) protruding from the main body frame 3 is inserted. It is intended to facilitate positioning work and installation work. In addition, mounting pieces 1122 for mounting the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are protruded toward the outside on the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, and the mounting holes 112 527 of the main body frame 3 are provided. The substrate unit 1100 is attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). Note that, as shown in FIG. 70, the mounting hole 527 is formed to have an outer peripheral wall that conforms to the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122. Further, on the outer side wall of the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101, a wire hooking piece 1123 for locking the wire is formed to protrude.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, but the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay substrate 1102 mounted on the relay substrate recessed portion 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay substrate 1102 is an internal connection terminal of multi-pin connector type. A door frame connection terminal 1131 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. The door frame connection terminal 1131 is provided on the door frame 5 as seen from the back as shown in FIG. 132 even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as the electric lamp component and the LED, which are made of lamps and LEDs, is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. Also, the internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to the door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 by the internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring arrangement space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 described above are laid.

  The power supply board box 1103 attached to the power supply board box mounting area on the rear side of the frame substrate holder 1101 has a box main body 1132 for fixing the power supply board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover for covering the box main body 1132 And 1133. In the box main body 1132, engaging and locking holes 1135 engaging with the mounting bosses 1112 are integrally formed at the upper and lower ends of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusions 1134 inserted at the upper and lower ends of the other end are integrally formed. Are formed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 133, power supply substrate 1136 is not covered by cover 1133 (on the right and left in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. 133, for power switch 1137, power line connector 1138, CR unit power connector 1139 and grounding. A connector 1140 and a payout control board power supply connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all the electric devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. Also, the power supply line connector 1138 connects the power supply wiring from the power supply wiring of AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied in the island, and grounds the noise etc. charged in the pachinko machine 1 as a frame ground to the outside Is a connector for The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card type ball rental machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The grounding connector 1140 is electrically connected to various grounding wires provided to the pachinko machine 1 for preventing electrostatic charge, and noise etc. which has entered the pachinko machine 1 is externally grounded via the power supply line connector 1138. Is a connector to Specifically, a ground wire for removing noise and the like from door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a ball flowing down tank rail member 740 A ground wire for removing the etc. is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as a frame ground FG1, and a ground wire for removing noise etc. from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as a frame ground FG1. , And a ground wire for removing noise and the like from the CR unit are electrically connected to the ground connector 1140 d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame grounds of the power supply line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame grounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the payout control board power supply connector 1141, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 4500 housed in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186 by the power supply wiring 1214. Power supply etc.). The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the power supply connector for dispensing control substrate 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and pulled out from the back of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. There is. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover 1133 of the power supply substrate box 1103 is formed in a step-like shape, and the region where the step is high is the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal substrate box 1104. The lower area of the mounting area 1143 is a mounting area 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The mounting area 1143 constitutes a mounting area for mounting the horizontally long payout control board box 1105 together with the above-described payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101. An engagement hole 1146 is formed substantially at the center of the above-mentioned stepped portion, into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is engaged and inserted.

  In the cover body 1133 constituting the attachment area 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104, the positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engagement piece 1147 formed on the back side of the terminal board box 1104 respectively. And a mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section, while the mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous. After being inserted into the wide part of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece portion 1147 and the attachment engagement hole are made to slide in one direction (in the case shown, the central direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion of 1144 is engaged. When the hooking piece 1149 is provided at the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104 and the terminal board box 1104 is slidingly engaged with the cover 1133, the hooking piece 1149 is a delivery control board box 1105. And a portion of the box body 1180 of the Note that this engagement is such an engagement state that the terminal substrate box 1104 is easily disengaged by slidingly moving the terminal substrate box 1104 in the non-engagement direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the terminal board box 1104 has an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and a payout control board terminal 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152 and a power ground terminal 1153. Two substrates, a CR unit terminal plate 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a delivery control substrate terminal 1155, are accommodated in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a provide various information signals necessary for managing the pachinko machine 1 such as a big hit information output signal and a starting opening winning information output signal externally (for example, These information signals are mainly derived from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624, and the main drawer relay connector 1200 described later in detail. It is transmitted to the payout control substrate 1186 through the connection, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by the connection between the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control substrate terminal 1156 provided on the payout control substrate 1186. Ru. The power indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wire of the remaining number indicator of the prepaid card, the rental ball switch, and the return switch of the pachinko machine 1, for example, provided in the plate unit 300. . The power supply ground terminal 1153 is composed of two connectors, one of the connectors (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power supply connector 1139 of the power supply board 1136, and the other connector is the power supply board 1136 Wiring from one of the plurality of grounding connectors 1140 is connected. Furthermore, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wire from a CR unit (not shown), and by connecting the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control substrate 1186 and the payout control substrate terminal 1155. The delivery control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 is connected to the external terminal board 1150a for deriving game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Although both substrates of the CR unit terminal board 1150b to be relayed are housed, they are conventionally housed in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In the above, one terminal board box 1104 is assembled and attached to the frame substrate holder 1101. For this reason, in the case of the present embodiment, in particular, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which they are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected by wiring.

  Next, the delivery control board box 1105 which can be mounted across the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is mainly shown in FIGS. This will be described with reference to 132. The dispensing control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long rectangular dispensing control board 1186 is fixed with a screw or the like (not shown), and a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the dispensing control board 1186 It consists of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132) and caulked and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by the separation and cutting portion 1183. As a result, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation and cutting portion 1183 can not be separated unless it is cut. However, caulking and fixing at the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking one of a plurality of places (four places indicated by the numerals 1 to 4 in the case of the drawing) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to three times. Of course, in the case of fraudulent separation, it is possible to immediately know whether or not there has been an act of fraud since a trace of disconnection will remain. In the center of one short side of the box main body 1180, an engagement piece 1182 to be inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply substrate box 1103 is protrudingly formed, and at the lower side of the other short side. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed to be elastically engaged with the locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the dispensing control substrate box 1105 to the frame substrate holder 1101, after the engagement piece 1182 is inserted into the engagement hole 1146, the engagement elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the engagement projection 1117. It can be easily installed. Then, in a state where the delivery control board box 1105 is mounted over the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed in the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The dispensing control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it can not be moved in the horizontal direction or in the vertical direction. Conversely, when dismounting, pressing the engaging elastic piece 1184 in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to release the engagement between the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the payout control board box 1105, The withdrawal control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101 by pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146.

  Further, the dispensing control substrate 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 described above has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b at one side (right side in FIG. 132). There are provided a prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED display 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removing switch 4132. A full tank switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which the wiring from the door frame opening switch 4133 for detecting that the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame open switch terminal 1185 b is a connector to which the wiring from the main body frame open switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay substrate 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the delivery control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150 b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which the wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error release switch 4131 is operated, a guide of a release method according to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball extraction switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (the ball extraction is started). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to the inspection device when inspecting the dispensing control board 1186, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected by the power supply wiring 1214 to the payout control substrate power supply connector 1141 of the power supply substrate 1136 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which a wire from the launch motor 695 of the striking launch device 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which a wire from the touch sensor 420 and the emission stop switch 422 provided inside the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power wiring 1215.

  In the vicinity of the left of the error release switch 4131, resistors R1194a to R1194d are disposed as shown in FIG. The resistances R1194a to R1194d are ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) intrudes into various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. To prevent instability, the detailed description of which will be described later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to the main drawer connector 626 (game board connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal board 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4 A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) and a payout control board connector 1201 connected via the signal connection 1215 to the internal connection terminals 1195 of the payout control board 1186 are provided at the top and bottom. In addition, an auxiliary drawer relay connector 1202 is connected to the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108 with an auxiliary drawer connector 627 (game board connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal board 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A (holder-side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via the internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay substrate 1102 and the internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. Also, in the main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108, support holes 1204 and 1205 are drilled on the left and right sides of each substrate, and a drawer mounting boss is provided to project the support holes 1204 and 1205 in the drawer mounting region 1120. The main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub-drawer relay substrate 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer attachment area 1120 by being inserted into the housing 1118, and then firmly fixed by covering with the substrate cover 1109.

  By the way, in the board cover 1109, a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are provided with rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, and 1209 to project outside the substrate cover 1109, and a pin on which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back side of the substrate cover 1109 Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and at the left and right ends, fixing holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer attachment area 1120 by covering the base cover 1109 with the board cover 1109 while inserting and fixing the fixing hole 1211 with a screw (not shown).

  In the above, the configuration of the substrate unit 1100 has been described, but in the case of the present embodiment, among the various substrates necessary for controlling the driving of the pachinko machine 1, the main components to be replaced along with the change of the game board 4 A door relay board 1102 other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 4500, a power supply board 1136 accommodated in the power supply board box 1103, an external terminal board 1150 accommodated in the terminal board box 1104, and the dispensing control board box 1105 The assembled unit is assembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 in advance, and the assembled substrate unit 1100 is assembled into a unit by a simple operation of simply attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the back side lower portion of the main body frame 3. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was mounted on the back side of the frame 3 It can be. Further, in this case, since the wiring of each substrate to be unitized into the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated inside the frame substrate holder 1101, the wiring for connecting the substrates does not get messed up and disorderedly, and laying orderly can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main drawer relay board 1107 having the main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the substrate unit 1100 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 having the sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector) As shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal board 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3 as the game board 4 is mounted from the front side as shown in FIG. 626 and the secondary drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are respectively connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and the secondary drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), so the installation of the game board 4 and the connection between the boards Can be done at the same time. Therefore, the game board 4 can be replaced easily.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires a wiring connection with various electric devices provided in the main body frame 3 is A terminal board box 1104 requiring connection work with a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost easily visible position of the board unit 1100, while a power supply board with less need for connection work with the outside Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are disposed inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to be minimum. However, in the case of the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 which are disposed inside, all the terminal parts connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection with drawer connector)]
Next, the electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the substrate unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), by connecting the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side, electrical connection can be made. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are provided with terminals 626a and 627a as shown in FIG. 135 (b), and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As such, the contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side, as shown in FIG. 135 (c), the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into electrical conduction by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. Thereby, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side depend on various control boards (for example, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. Further, on the drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the substrate unit 1100 side, voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply substrate 1136 are formed. As described above, by detachably attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side. The supply line can be connected in a detachable manner.

  The terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a in this embodiment adopt a bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be accidentally touched and bent during operation, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small coefficient of friction is employed for plating the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment or detachment of the game board 4 is ensured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main unit frame 3 and the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 is turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a is performed, specifically, Since a large current (a rush current described later) flows in the contacts for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcedly pushed into the main frame 3 to attach it in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is the drawer connector 1200 when the game board 4 is removed from the main frame. It peels off from it and is damaged, and the drawer connector 1200 can not be used.

  In addition, if the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, the various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control substrate 4100 described later to cope with the problem. The detailed description will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring etc. with the prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control substrate 1186 stored in the payout control substrate box 1105 and the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit internal relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball breakage switch connector 830d, the grounding connector 830e, and the payout control A board connector 830f is provided.

  The wiring from the counting switch 812 is connected to the counting switch connector 830a, the wiring from the discharging motor 815 is connected to the dispensing motor connector 830b, and the wiring from the rotating angle switch 855 is connected to the rotation angle switch connector 830c. The ball disconnection switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball disconnection switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the grounding connector 830e is connected to the grounding wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control substrate connector 830f is connected to the winning ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control substrate 1186 by a wire (harness).

  Wiring from the counting switch 812, wiring from the dispensing motor 815, grounding wire from the dispensing motor 815, and the winning ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball breakage switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855 The harness is held together by a wiring processing piece 869.

  The balls supplied from the island are stored in the winning ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball passage unit 770, and guided to the winning ball unit 800, as described above. When the balls are charged against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball unit 800 is under the influence of noise and is in the file environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Further, the above-described harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the winning ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the winning ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 70 and 74. The cover body 1250 is for covering the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3 and is inserted from above into the cover body support cylindrical portion 575 formed on one side of the rear surface of the main body frame 3 at three locations The support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 engaged with a cover engaging groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is formed substantially at the center on the other side. Then, by inserting the pivot support pin 1251 of the cover 1250 into the cover support cylindrical portion 575, the cover 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to open and close freely, and the engagement piece 1252 is formed in the cover engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In addition, what is necessary is just to cancel the engagement with the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785, in open | releasing.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the case shown, locking holes 1253 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protrudingly provided on the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is used. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, in the same manner as the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment described below, the connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are formed. It is done. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It plays the same function. Then, with the cover 1250 closed, the lock hole 1253 of the cover 1250 and the lock hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fixed with a screw (not shown). The rear opening 580 can be closed fixed. Then, since the locking protruding hook piece 570 penetrates the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed to the main body frame 3, for example, the locking hooking protruding hook piece 570 By locking the cover body 1250, only the person in charge having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250.

[1-6A. Other embodiment of cover body]
The cover 1250 (hereinafter referred to as "the cover 1250 according to the first embodiment") shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 74 described above is attached to the lower surface of the back of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. The main control board box 624 is formed so as to cover the back of the game board 4, but it may be a cover that covers the entire back of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter, referred to as “the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 150. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover according to the second embodiment is attached and viewed from the back with the cover opened, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the cover according to the second embodiment. 141 is a side view of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 141 is a pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, viewed from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is a second embodiment. And FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, which is a perspective view seen from the pivoting side of the cover body. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body removed according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of a payout control board box which is in polymeric contact with the lower side portion of the cover body according to the second embodiment. Figure 146 shows the second FIG. 147 is a perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body according to the embodiment, FIG. 147 is a rear view for illustrating the function of the cylinder lock provided on the cover body according to the second embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. In FIG. 139 to FIG. 150, the same reference numerals are assigned to configurations that perform the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  The outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. The shape of the provided tray unit 300 is also slightly different. Furthermore, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also formed on the open end side of the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546, which will be described later, in a locking wall 569 having a locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b (see FIG. 144) The positions of the notches 221 of the third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 that constitute the rear side wall are different in that they are extended downward (see FIG. 140), and The configuration is also different only in that the contact lower step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIG. 139 and FIG. 144 is to be attached to the board substrate holder 623 attached to the lower surface of the back of the game board 4 similarly to the embodiment shown in FIG. In 139 and FIG. 144, illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

  Therefore, first, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 1300 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish-like shape in which the side wall of a slightly elongated rectangular shape rises (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion or the rectangular plate portion), A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) pivotal support pins 1301 are integrally formed on a side wall of one longitudinal side, which is inserted into and axially supported by the cover body support cylindrical portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3; An engagement piece 1302 engaged with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is integrally formed on a slightly upper side of the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. The pivotal support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are the main body of the cover body 1300 by inserting the pivotal support pin 1301 of the cover body 1300 into the cover body support cylindrical portion 575 in the same manner as the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the frame 3 in an openable / closable manner and locking the engagement piece 1302 in the cover body engagement groove 785. It is possible to protect the back of various parts including the main control board box 624 which And the point which the cover body 1300 which concerns on this 2nd embodiment differs from the cover body 1250 which concerns on 1st embodiment is not only simply provided so as to be opened and closed freely, and it can not be opened illegally in the closed state. In order to cover the cylinder lock 1309 and the back of the main control board box 624, the test terminal is connected to the RAM clear switch 624a exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the inspection device. In the state where the connection operation opening 1303 is provided at the positions corresponding to 624 b and 624 c and the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300 is closed, the surface of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 It is a contact point. Therefore, the characteristic configuration of the cover 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape in the upper part of the contact lower side wall 1306 on the lower side of the cover body 1300, and the size is as shown in FIG. A RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and a test terminal 624b, 624c to which an inspection device is connected are provided to face each other. Further, inside the connection operation opening 1303, an upright wall 1304 and an abutment projection 1305 that project in a closed state and abut on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 are provided. The standing wall 1304 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the abutting projection 1305 protrudes relatively low along the one opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. The standing wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624, as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149). Of the main control board box 624 so as to prevent an unauthorized action from being performed on the main control board box 624.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150 when the cover 1300 is closed with respect to the main frame 3. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the delivery control substrate box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is abutted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 mounted on the frame substrate holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached. An abutting lower step surface 1181a is formed which is formed lower than the surface. Thus, as shown in FIG. 144, the delivery control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed on the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103. When mounted over the mounting area 1143, the dispensing control board box 1105 is accommodated in the mounting area 1143, and is fixed so as not to move in the lateral direction or in the vertical direction. For this reason, the contact lower step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is covered by the contact lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 can not be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101.

  Next, the configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an oval lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is opened on the lower side of the lower side of the cover body 1300. A threaded portion 1310 having a sectional elliptical shape of the cylinder lock 1309 is penetrated through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed from the inside to the penetrated screw portion 1310, whereby the cylinder lock 1309 is fixed to the lock hole 1308. In the cylinder lock 1309, a lock shaft 1311 protrudes from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is drilled in the lower portion of the oval locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end portion of the cylinder lock 1309 by penetrating the hole 1314 and fastening with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the locking piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting a key (held by a manager of a game arcade or the like) into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating it. There is. Further, at the lower part of the lock hole 1308, a guide projection 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided so as to protrude inward. Furthermore, a screwing hole 1307 is formed on the open side of the cover body 1300 at the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1302 for screwing.

  On the other hand, a locking hole 568, a locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the screw holes 1307, the locking pieces 1313 and the guide projections 1316 described above. This configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. Although the cover contact groove 567 is formed on the above-described pivoting side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 as described above, this cover contact groove Recess holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of the 567 (upper and lower sides of the cover passage engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 is extended in the direction of the longitudinal center line of the main body frame 3 below the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569 is provided. Locking holes 569a and guide holes 569b are opened at the top and bottom of the cover. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 penetrates, and the locking wall 569 around the front side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), while the guide projection 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b, the locking piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked. It will be in the state which penetrated hole 569a. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating it in that state, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 and the front side of the locking wall 569 Engage. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the locking of the cover body 1300 by the cylinder lock 1309 is the lower part of the cover body 1300, the screwing hole which is fitted in a closed state for fixing the upper part of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) into the fixing holes 1307 and the fixing holes 568. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder lock at the upper and lower sides.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in the closed state, and the rear end side is the rear end of the award ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, after the discharge port 730). When viewed from the side wall and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740, the same vertical plane is obtained. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower side of the back side and the shape is extremely refreshing, so the entire thickness is uniform when transporting the pachinko machine 1 Because it is easy to grasp, it is easy to carry out loading and superposition work, and when actually installed on the island stand of the game arcade, it protrudes from the back of the pachinko machine of the other party on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in a backward direction It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring and the like. In this respect, the same effect can be obtained as shown in FIG. 3 also in the pachinko machine 1 using the cover 1250 according to the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the closed state of the cover body 1300 is performed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is the first reason why the cover body 1300 corresponds to the first embodiment. Since the covered area is larger in the longitudinal direction than the cover 1250, if the closed state is held only at the center of the cover 1300, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat, so the upper and lower two places are closed. Was configured to hold the As the second reason, as described above, since the contact lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 is in contact with the upper side of the dispensing control board box 1105, the lower side of the cover 1300 can not be particularly opened. It is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower part of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper part of the cover body 1300 also has to be closed. Further, for the second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any lock device which can be unlocked only by a game arcade manager) may be used. It is desirable to use

  As mentioned above, although the cover body 1300 which concerns on 2nd embodiment has been demonstrated, when the cover body 1300 which concerns on this 2nd embodiment closes the cover body 1300 with respect to the main body frame 3, the lower side part of the cover body 1300 Since the lower contact side wall 1306, which is a contact lower side wall 1306, is in contact with the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the delivery control substrate box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the delivery control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 can not be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. And since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, the fraudulent action against the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 as well as the fraudulent action against the dispensing control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300 is prevented. be able to. Further, even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals for testing 624b and 624c are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624 a can be operated when the device is connected or the software or the like runs away and recovers. Then, since an upright wall 1304 and a contact protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that a gap does not occur between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624, By inserting a piano wire or the like, it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 in the closed state. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the top to the lower side of the back side, and the shape is extremely clean, and the entire thickness of the pachinko machine 1 is Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to carry out loading and stacking operations. Also, even when actually installed on the island stand of the game arcade, the back of the pachinko machine of the other party on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in a backward direction It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring etc. which protrude in the.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the front right, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the left front, and FIG. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board obliquely viewed from the left rear, and FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled into main component members and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As shown, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a frame-shaped front component 601 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which game balls are hit. The game panel 600 is disposed to close the game area 605 on the rear side of the front component 601, and the function display is disposed on the lower side of the front component 601 to the right of the out port 606 outside the game area 605. The unit 640, an attacker unit 2000 disposed on the upper side of the out port 606 substantially at the center in the horizontal direction in the gaming area 605 and supported on the front of the gaming panel 600, and along the outer periphery of the gaming area 605 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 A side decoration member 2100 which is arranged and supported on the front of the game panel 600 and a right The respective gates (gate member 2200, special view gate 2500) supported on the front of the door 600, a frame-shaped center character 2300 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600, and the game panel A rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the 600, and a display on the rear side of the rear unit 3000 that can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the game panel 600 and the center role 2300 and can display a predetermined effect image Mainly includes a liquid crystal display device 1400 as a means. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device attached to the game panel 600 will be described in detail. The center character 2300 can also be called a frame decoration.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
First, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the attacker unit 2000 will be described. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the respective devices mounted on the game panel disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed obliquely from the front. The attacker unit 2000 of this example is fixed to the front of the gaming panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600 e formed at the lower part in the left-right direction center of the gaming panel 600. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which gaming balls driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, a first starting opening 2001 disposed substantially at the center in the left and right direction, a rectangular winning opening 2003 disposed on the right side of the first starting opening 2001 and greatly extending in the left and right direction, and a winning opening 2003 And three general winning openings 2004 arranged on the left side of the first starting opening 2001, respectively.

  The upper side of the first starting port 2001 is open, and game balls can be always received (winning). The winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2006 which can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2003 is closed to make the game ball unreceivable, and the upper side is inclined to the front (( The state shown in FIG. 158) is such that the special winning opening 2003 is opened to allow the game ball to be received. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big winning opening 2003 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the gaming ball is received (start winning) by the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2002 described later. According to the result of the special lottery (big hit lottery) to be performed (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit"), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2016 (see FIG. 220). However, although it will be described later, when the result of the special lottery is “big hit (special hit)”, the opening / closing member 2006 according to this embodiment moves to the special view gate 2500 (specific inlet) after the condition device is activated. It is possible to open and close by driving the attacker solenoid 2016 on condition that the game ball has been received. Also, as shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2004 is opened upward, and gaming balls can always be received (winning).

[2-2. Side decoration member]
The side decoration member 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 159. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the side decoration member as viewed obliquely from the front. The side decoration member 2100 is an upper portion inserted from the front to an opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e in which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction in the game panel 600 And is fixed to the front of the game panel 600. Further, on the front side (player's side) of the side decoration member 2100, a decoration portion 2103 having a light transmitting (semi-transparent) window portion is provided, and a light emitting decoration substrate (not shown) disposed behind it It is possible to embellish with the light from).

[2-3. Gate]
As shown in FIG. 157, among the gates (gate member 2200, special view gate 2500), gate member 2200 is formed on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction of game panel 600 and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. After being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e, the opening 600e is fixed to the front of the game panel 600. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2201 having a width allowing only one game ball to pass, and the gate sensor 2202 disposed in the gate 2201 can detect the game ball having passed the gate 2201. It is supposed to be.

  Similarly, the special drawing gate 2500 is located on the front of the gaming panel 600, and in the opening 600e formed in the right gaming area out of the gaming area on the left side and the gaming area on the right of the center character 2300. On the other hand, it is fixed by the form inserted from the front side. Similarly, the special view gate 2500 has a gate 2501 having a width allowing only one game ball to pass, and the special view gate sensor 2502 disposed in the gate 2501 passes the gate 2501. It is possible to detect a sphere.

  However, in this embodiment, to the gate 2501 in the vicinity of the special view gate 2500 so that almost all the game balls flowing down the game area on the right side of the center character 2300 can be received by the special view gate 2500. A guiding member such as a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) for guiding and a guiding wall 603a (see FIG. 151) are provided. As a result, the gaming balls flowing down the right-side game area pass through the special view gate 2500 with a probability (a probability of exceeding at least 50%) higher than the probability of passing through the gate member 2200. As will be described later, the special view gate 2500 according to this embodiment is delayed (when the first closed control period ends) the timing at which the character continuous actuation device operates when the big hit is won. It is prepared to give the pachinko machine 1 a function that can be made to be.

[2-4. Center feature]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 160 to 182, the configuration of the center part 2300 will be described in detail. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of a center character viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the center character disassembled into major members for each of the main members, and FIG. Fig. 163 is a perspective view of the frame member of the object disassembled and seen from diagonally front, Fig. 163 is a perspective view of the base plate of the center character from diagonally front, and Fig. 164 is a starting opening unit of the center character. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the starting opening unit, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the drive mechanism of the starting opening unit. FIG. 167 is a perspective view as viewed from the rear, and FIG.

  168 is a perspective view of the sub liquid crystal unit obliquely viewed from the front, FIG. 169 is a side view of the mounting state of the sub liquid crystal unit from the right, and FIG. 170 is an exploded view of the sub liquid crystal unit FIG. 171 is a front view showing a state in which the front of the sub liquid crystal unit is shielded by the first and second character units, and FIG. 172 is a front view showing the sub liquid crystal unit. It is a front view which shows the state in which the front of was open | released.

  Furthermore, FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the first character unit seen obliquely from the front, FIG. 174 is a perspective view of the first character unit disassembled and seen from the slant front, and FIG. FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the right movable unit of one character unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the second character unit from the front, and FIG. Fig. 178 is a right side view showing the movable part unit of the second character unit, and Fig. 179 is an exploded front view of the movable part unit. 180 is a perspective view of the movable part of the second character unit disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 181 is a perspective view of the driving part seen from the rear 182 is a right side view showing the operation of the movable unit with respect to the sub liquid crystal unit. .

  As shown in FIG. 157, the center character 2300 is fixed to the front of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 605. Between the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center character 2300 and the outer periphery of the game area 605, the above-mentioned gate member 2200, the special view gate 2500 and the like are arranged.

  As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the center character 2300 includes a frame-shaped decorative frame unit 2310, a starting opening unit 2330 disposed at the lower right and having a second starting opening 2002, and a decorative frame unit 2310. A frame shape having a sub liquid crystal unit 2350 mounted on the upper rear surface and visible through the opening window 2310a, and a left movable unit 2378 and a right movable unit 2379 disposed behind the decorative frame unit 2310 and visible through the opening window 2310a The display of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 in cooperation with the first character unit 2370, the transparent protective plate 2360 closing the back side of the first character unit 2370, the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 And a second character unit 2400 capable of shielding the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the decoration frame unit 2310 includes a frame-shaped base plate 2311 and a plurality of decoration members 2309 disposed on the front or back side of the base plate 2311. As shown in FIG. 163, the base plate 2311 has a substantially annular shape, and on the lower inner peripheral surface, the game ball which has entered the inside of the base plate 2311 through the warp passage described later is turned in the left-right direction A lower rolling surface 2311a that can be moved is formed. In addition, below the lower rolling surface 2311a, the game ball entered into the chance opening 2372a (see FIG. 173) formed in the lower part of the first character unit 2370 is the game area 605 below the center character 2300. A chance outlet 2311 b is provided to penetrate in the front-rear direction. A pedestal 2311c for mounting the starting opening unit 2330 is provided at the lower right of the base plate 2311 so as to project obliquely downward to the right. A portion above the center of the pedestal 2311c is a starting opening unit 2330. A passage 2311d for guiding the gaming ball having won a prize to the second starting opening 2002 is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, an arc-shaped upper base plate 2322 (see FIG. 162) is provided on the upper portion of the base plate 2311 so as to protrude upward to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the decoration member 2309 disposed on the base plate 2311 has a central front decoration 2312 disposed on the upper front surface of the base plate 2311 and a lower side of the lower rolling surface 2311a (the back side of the base plate 2311). Left and right decorations 2313 and 2314, a blue left blue decoration 2315 placed on the front left side of the base plate 2311, an upper left covering decoration 2316 placed on the upper side thereof, and a warp described later Warp aisle 2317 located on the lower front of the aisle, shelf right ornament 2318 located on the lower right front of base plate 2311, upper right ornament 2319 located on the upper right front of base plate 2311, shelf right ornament The decoration members other than the shelf back left decoration 2313 and the shelf back right decoration 2314 are configured with the upper right blue decoration 2320 disposed on the upper side of 2318. Also it provided to project the player side. That is, the gaming ball is configured not to enter the decoration frame unit 2310 from a portion other than the warp passage. In the right side of the upper right blue ornament 2320, there is provided a second out port 606a through which game balls rolling on the game area 605 on the right side of the center character 2300 can enter, and this second out The game ball entered into the mouth 606 a is discharged from the game area 605 in the same manner as the out-port 606 provided at the lower end of the game area 605. In addition, the warp entrance 2321 where game balls rolling on the game area 605 on the left side of the center character 2300 can be entered is disposed above the warp passage ornament 2317, and the game balls entered from the left are It is configured to be guided backward.

  In addition, in the decoration frame unit 2310, a plurality of lenses 2323 arranged in an arc shape for emitting and decorating the respective decoration members 2309, a left LED substrate 2324 which is disposed behind the lenses 2323 and emits light, upper right An LED substrate 2325 and an upper LED substrate 2326 are provided. Further, on the rear side of the upper right LED substrate 2325, a relay substrate 2327 for relaying drive signals to these light emitting substrates is disposed. In addition to this, a reflector 2328, a diffusion sheet 2329, and the like are also provided, and light is emitted from the entire decoration member 2309.

  Next, the starting opening unit 2330 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the starting opening unit 2330 is mounted on the pedestal portion 2311c of the base plate 2311 (see FIG. 163), and includes a front decoration 2331 having a second starting opening 2002 opened on the right side. ing. The second start opening 2002 can be opened and closed by one blade 2337, and in a state where the blade 2337 rises substantially vertically, the game ball can not be received to the second start opening 2002 by the blade 2337. In the state (see FIG. 164) in which the wing 2337 is expanded in the right direction (clockwise direction), the game ball can be received to the second start opening 2002. That is, the second start opening 2002 is a variable winning opening that can be opened and closed by the blades 2337. A feather 2338 is provided on the front of the blade 2337.

  A decoration base 2332 is provided on the back side of the front decoration 2331. The decoration base 2332 is provided with a light transmitting red lens 2334, a base diffusion sheet 2335, and a lens diffusion sheet 2336, and the light emitted from the LED substrate 2333 disposed on the back side is transmitted to the front decoration 2331. The light emission decoration is made on the front decoration 2331 by irradiation. On the rear side of the LED substrate 2333, a driving mechanism 2339 for guiding the gaming ball entered into the second out port 606a (see FIG. 160) and driving the blades 2337 is provided with the pedestal 2311c interposed therebetween. ing. As shown in FIG. 166, the drive mechanism portion 2339 includes an out ball passage base 2340 forming a passage 2340a for gaming balls having entered the second out port 606a, and an out ball passage cover 2341 closing the front of the passage 2340a. And have. In addition, on the rear side of the out ball passage base 2340, a starting port solenoid 2344 attached by a solenoid base 2342 and a solenoid metal plate 2343 and a transmitting portion 2345 for transmitting the operation of the starting port solenoid 2344 to the blades 2337 There is. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 167, the transmitting portion 2345 is connected to the plunger 2344a of the start port solenoid 2344, and has a crank 2345a rotatably supported at one end and a link connected to the other end of the crank 2345a. 2345b and a blade shaft 2345c rotatably supported and to which a rotational force is applied by the link 2345b, and the blade 2337 attached to the tip of the blade shaft 2345c is rotated within a predetermined range It is possible to As shown in FIG. 166, the rear side and the lower side of the transmission portion 2345 are covered by the back cover 2346, and the left side of the starting opening solenoid 2344 is covered by the lower cover 2348.

  In addition, a substrate cover 2347a is provided vertically below the front surface of the drive mechanism 2339, and a relay substrate 2347b is provided on the rear surface of the substrate cover 2347a. In addition, a second starting opening sensor 2349 is disposed in front of the out ball passage base 2340, and it is possible to detect a game ball winning a prize in the second starting opening 2002.

  Next, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 includes a rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 2351a and a support rod portion 2351b extended in the left-right direction from the upper end thereof and attached to the upper surface of the back surface of the base plate 2311. A holder 2351, a substantially rectangular liquid crystal main body 2352 housed from the rear side in the frame portion 2351 a and visible through the opening window 2351 c, and a liquid crystal cover 2353 disposed on the back surface of the frame portion 2351 a and supporting the back side of the liquid crystal main body 2352 And a liquid crystal clasp 2354 for supporting the lower portion of the liquid crystal body 2352. In addition, a decoration 2355 is provided at the lower front of the liquid crystal holder 2351, and a relay substrate 2356 for relaying a drive signal to the liquid crystal main body 2352 is provided on the back of the liquid crystal cover 2353. As shown in FIG. 169, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is arranged to be inclined such that the display screen (sub liquid crystal screen PNS) of the liquid crystal main body 2352 faces obliquely downward (player's side).

  As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the sub liquid crystal display PNS of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 includes the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 of the first character unit 2370 and the movable of the second character unit 2400. It is shielded by the unit unit 2401. That is, in the state where the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 and the movable unit 2401 are assembled in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 as shown in FIG. While the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 and the movable unit 2401 are separated from each other as shown in FIG. 172, the front of the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is opened, It can be seen from the side of the elderly. Next, the first character unit 2370 and the second character unit 2400 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the first accessory unit 2370 includes a frame-shaped rear cover 2371 made of a transparent synthetic resin member, and a shelf disposed at the lower part on the front surface of the rear cover 2371. The upper stage 2372, the warp passage 2374 disposed diagonally above the left of the shelf upper stage 2372, the left ornament 2375 disposed above the warp pathway 2374, and the right ornament 2376 disposed diagonally to the right of the shelf upper stage 2372 It is provided. Here, in the upper shelf portion 2372, the upper rolling surface 2372b capable of rolling the gaming ball which has entered the inside of the first character unit 2370 through the warp passage 2374 in the left-right direction, and the upper rolling surface A substantially arc-shaped middle rolling surface 2372 c which is positioned on the front side of 2372 b and is lower by one step is formed. That is, the shelf upper stage 2372 forms a so-called stage. The middle rolling surface 2372 c is higher than the lower rolling surface 2311 a of the base plate 2311 (see FIG. 163) disposed on the front side, and rolls on the upper rolling surface 2372 b or the middle rolling surface 2372 c. It is possible to make the game ball after it has flowed down to the lower rolling surface 2311a. In addition, a chance opening 2372a where game balls can enter is provided in a wall portion on the back side of the interrupted rolling surface 2372c, and the game balls entered into this chance opening 2372a are the chance exit 2311b of the base plate 2311 It is supposed to be released from Further, on the back surface side of the shelf upper stage 2372, an LED substrate 2373 for emitting light toward the shelf upper stage 2372 is disposed, and it is possible to light-emit and decorate the shelf upper stage 2372. The warp passage 2374 is in communication with the warp inlet 2321 (see FIG. 161), and is configured to feed the game ball entering the warp inlet 2321 from the left end side of the upper rolling surface 2372b.

  Further, a substantially arc-cylindrical guide portion 2371a protruding forward is formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371 so as to face the left and right, and the pair of guide portions 2371a 2379 are supported so as to slide in an arc along the inner peripheral edge of the rear cover 2371, respectively. A flat protective plate 2371 b is formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371 to protect the liquid crystal body 2352 by covering the sub liquid crystal screen PNS from the front.

  The right movable unit 2379 disposed on the upper right side of the rear cover 2371 is provided with a front decoration 2384 having a pointed end toward the center of the rear cover 2371 and a rear side of the front decoration 2384 as shown in FIG. Back cover 2387, a lens 2385 and a diffusion sheet 2386 housed inside the back cover 2387, a lower member 2389 disposed under the back cover 2387, and an LED attached to the back of the back cover 2387 And a substrate 2390. That is, the back cover 2387 is provided with a plurality of openings (not shown), and the light emitted from the LED substrate 2390 is irradiated to the front decoration 2384 through the diffusion sheet 2386 and the lens 2385 to make the front decoration 2384 It is possible to decorate the light. Further, an arc-shaped rack 2387a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the back cover 2387, and a shaft portion 2387b projecting in the front-rear direction is formed on the inner side thereof. In particular, the rearward extension portion of the shaft portion 2387b is inserted into a guide portion 2371a formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371 (see FIG. 174), and movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the push 2388. That is, the right movable unit 2379 is supported so as to move in an arc by sliding the shaft 2387b of the back cover 2387 along the inner peripheral surface of the guide 2371a. Although the left movable unit 2378 has a shape symmetrical to that of the right movable unit 2379, the configuration is the same, so the detailed description is omitted here.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 174, while being engaged with the rack 2387a of the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 on the outside of the guide portion 2371a in the rear cover 2371, the support is supported rotatably in the axial direction. The gears 2381 are connected to a motor 2380 fixed to the upper back surface of the rear cover 2371, respectively. That is, when the motor 2380 is operated, power is transmitted to the rack 2387a of the back cover 2387 via the gear 2381 and the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 can be moved individually. The front decoration 2384 in the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 has a downward slope on the inner side, and moves to the blocking position (upper stop position), and then the sub liquid crystal in the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 The vicinity of the lower corner of the screen PNS is shielded (see FIG. 171). Moreover, the upper part of these inner surfaces protrudes inward, and becomes a shape of a front view "く" shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the second character product unit 2400 has an appearance position (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 182) which is the front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 (see FIG. 182). A movable portion unit 2401 rotatably supported between a retracted position (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 182) above 2350 and a movable portion accommodated in the retracted position while accommodating the drive mechanism of the movable portion unit 2401 A motor cover 2402 that can accommodate the rear half of the unit 2401, a drive unit 2403 that is a drive mechanism of the movable unit 2401, and a relay board that is disposed behind the motor cover 2402 and relays drive signals to the drive unit 2403 And 2404 are configured.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the movable portion unit 2401 has a generally flat shape and a front decoration 2406 having a decorative surface 2406a on the front surface (the upper surface in the retracted position); The decorative frame 2407 includes a decorative frame 2407 in which a fitting recess 2407a for the front ornament 2406 is formed on the front, and a substrate cover 2410 disposed on the rear side of the decorative frame 2407 (on the lower side in the retracted position). Between the substrate cover 2410, there are an LED substrate 2409 that emits light toward the decorative frame 2407, and a reflector 2408 that limits the radiation direction of the light so that the light emitted from the LED substrate 2409 does not leak from the surroundings. It is provided.

  Further, a pair of arms 2411 is disposed on the back surface 2410 a of the substrate cover 2410. These arms 2411 are, as shown in FIG. 178, a mounting portion 2411a attached to the upper end portion (rear end portion in the retracted position) of the back surface 2410a, and a first arm portion extending perpendicularly to the back surface 2410a 2411b, a second arm 2411c which is continuous with the first arm 2411b and bent with respect to the first arm 2411b to have a “C-shaped” shape, and an inner end from a tip (lower end) of the second arm 2411c And a rotary shaft portion 2411d protruding toward the side. A through hole penetrating in the left-right direction is provided at the center of the rotation shaft portion 2411d, and a pin 2420 (see FIG. 180) of a drive portion 2403 described later is inserted. Further, an outwardly projecting engagement shaft 2411e is formed at a boundary portion (that is, a bent portion) between the first arm 2411b and the second arm 2411c, and the second arm 2411c has a length penetrating in the left-right direction. A hole 2411 f is formed along the second arm 2411 c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the drive unit 2403 is a motor holder 2415, a motor 2416 attached to the motor holder 2415, and a gear 2418 connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 2416 via a shaft 2417. A pin 2419 fitted in a through hole 2418 provided eccentrically from the center of the gear 2418, and a long pin 2420 provided through a cylindrical portion 2415a provided at the lower part of the motor holder 2415; It is configured with. Here, the pin 2419 is inserted into the long hole 2411f of the arm 2411, and the pin 2420 is provided on both sides of the motor cover 2402 (FIG. 177) through the rotation shaft portion 2411d of the arm 2411 and the push 2421. It is inserted into the hole 2402a from the inside. Thus, when the motor 2416 operates, the gear 2418 rotates, and the arm 2411 (the entire movable unit 2401 including the arm 2411) pivots about the pin 2420 by the pin 2419 eccentrically provided on the gear 2418. It is supposed to be. Incidentally, the engaging shaft 2411e formed on the arm 2411 is inside the arc-shaped long hole 2402b (an arc-shaped long hole centered on the hole 2402a) provided on both sides of the motor cover 2402 (FIG. 177). As a result, the arm 2411 is smoothly rotated and the rotation range of the arm 2411 is restricted. The gear 2418 is provided with a protruding piece 2418 b that protrudes outward, and the movable portion unit 2401 is at the appearance position (origin position) by detecting the position of the protruding piece 2418 b by the photo sensor 2422. It is possible to grasp.

  By the way, as a general pachinko machine provided with a movable decorative body, the movable decorative body is disposed behind the game panel, and the appearance position where it can be seen through the opening window of the center frame and the outside of the opening window of the center frame ( For example, it is conventionally known to raise and lower the movable decorative body between a retracted position, which is the upper side and is hidden from view by the game panel. However, according to this, it is necessary to secure a large space for shielding or evacuating the movable decorative body in the game panel outside the center frame, and hence the opening of the game panel and the center frame inserted therein The size becomes relatively small, and it becomes difficult, for example, to visually recognize various effects through the opening window of the center frame.

  On the other hand, in the second character product unit 2400 of this example, the movable portion unit 2401 is formed in a flat shape, and the arm 2411 is extended from the back surface 2410 a of the movable portion unit 2401. It is configured to move (that is, rotate) along a circular arc around a rotation shaft portion 2411d formed on the side. Therefore, even if the size of the movable unit 2401 is relatively large, when the movable unit 2401 is moved to the retracted position (see the solid line in FIG. 182), the movable unit 2401 becomes long in the front-rear direction, and the movable is a relatively thin surface The lower surface (tip surface) portion of the section unit 2401 comes to face the game panel 600. Therefore, it is possible to significantly reduce the area required to shield the movable unit 2401.

  In addition, when the movable unit 2401 moves from the appearance position (refer to the two-dot chain line in FIG. 182) to the retracted position, the movable unit 2401 is turned upward from the state where the decorative surface 2406a faces forward. It changes from lying down to lie down. Therefore, the player's angle of view with respect to the decorative surface 2406a (that is, the angle at which the decorative surface 2406a is viewed) changes gradually gradually, and visual interest can be enhanced.

  Further, the pair of arms 2411 extended from the back surface 2410 a of the movable unit 2401 is positioned on the rear end side of the movable unit 2401 when the movable unit 2401 is in the retracted position, and in the emerging position, The arm 2411 is shielded by the movable unit 2401 during rotation of the movable unit 2401 because it is positioned at the end in the movement direction side (retracted position side), making it difficult for the player to see the arm 2411. It has become possible to suppress the decline in appearance caused by the problem.

  Further, the shape of the decorative surface 2406 a of the movable unit 2401 is a curved shape along the movement trajectory of the movable unit 2401. For this reason, the movement (rotation) of the movable unit 2401 is a movement conforming to the shape of the decorative surface 2406a, and it is no longer possible to evoke unnaturalness with respect to the rotation of the movable unit 2401.

  By the way, in the case where the movable unit 2401 is disposed in the horizontal state at the retracted position, the back 2410 a of the movable unit 2401 and the arm 2411 extended from the back 2410 a may be seen from the player side. According to this, the appearance of the movable unit 2401 in the retracted position may be impaired. On the other hand, according to the present example, the movable unit 2401 is disposed so as to be inclined so that the decorative surface 2406a can be seen at the retracted position, so that the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401 and the arm 2411 can not be seen easily. It is possible. In particular, since the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 is formed into a curved surface, the shape and pattern of the decorative surface 2406a can be relatively clearly viewed even in the inclined state, and the decorative effect can be maintained. It is.

  Further, since the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is directed obliquely downward, when moving the movable unit 2401 to the appearance position, the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 may also be directed obliquely downward according to the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. This is possible (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 182), and it is thus possible to increase the rotation range of the movable unit 2401 between the retracted position and the emergent position. That is, the movement of the movable unit 2401 is increased, and the impact when moving the movable unit 2401 can be increased.

  Further, the rotation shaft portion 2411 d of the arm 2411 is disposed behind the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Therefore, even if the position of the movable unit 2401 is either the emerging position or the retracted position, the movable unit 2401 can be brought closer to the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Therefore, it is easier to secure the space necessary for the arrangement of the movable unit 2401, and the sense of unity between the movable unit 2401 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is further enhanced.

  Further, the arm 2411 has a substantially “く” shape, and a first arm 2411 b extending substantially perpendicularly from the back surface 2410 a of the movable unit 2401 and a first arm 2411 b that is bent with respect to the first arm 2411 b. Since it is configured to include the two arms 2411c, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 can be avoided. That is, it is possible to turn the movable unit 2401 without interfering with the sub liquid crystal unit 2350.

  In addition, since the sub liquid crystal display PNS is shielded by the cooperation of the movable unit 2401, the left movable unit 2378, and the right movable unit 2379, shielding is assured even when the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is relatively large. Becomes possible. In particular, when the front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is opened, the movable unit 2401, the left movable unit 2378, and the right movable unit 2379 move in different directions, so they are formed in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It is possible to evoke an image that one of the shielding walls disperses, and it is possible to further enhance visual interest.

  In particular, the movable unit 2401 has a front view pentagonal shape in which the left and right side surfaces are projected outward, and at the appearance position, the projected portion is "in" in the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379. It is joined so as to be fitted to the side of the character (see FIG. 171). Therefore, it is possible to evoke an image in which the movable unit 2401, the left movable unit 2378, and the right movable unit 2379 are integrally formed. Therefore, when opening the front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, it is possible to surprise the player by an unexpected operation that the plurality of members are dispersed, and it is possible to further enhance the impact.

  Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the back unit obliquely viewed from the front, and FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the back unit disassembled and obliquely viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the shutter type part of the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the shutter type of parts disassembled and viewed from the oblique front, and FIG. Fig. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the left inner shutter of the shutter type part, and Fig. 188 is an oblique view of the left inner shutter viewed obliquely from behind and an enlarged view of the main part thereof. And FIG. 190 is a perspective view of the right inner shutter of the shutter type part from an oblique front, and FIG. 191 is a perspective view of the decorative plate of the left inner shutter seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. FIG. 192 is a perspective view of a shutter-type product with the left outer shutter disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 is a perspective view with the right outer shutter of the shutter-type product viewed from the front and FIG. , A perspective view of the drive unit of the shutter type part disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front There, FIG. 194, the shutter-type combination thereof, is a perspective view of the opened state of each shutter obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 195 is a perspective view of the lower side accessory unit seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 196 is a perspective view of the lower side accessory unit disassembled and seen from the oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective view of the lower drive unit of the side character unit viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective view of the distribution effect device of the lower drive unit from the oblique front, FIG. 199 is a perspective view of the sorting part of the sorting effect device disassembled and seen from diagonally front, and FIG. 200 is a perspective view of a swing driving portion of the sorting effect device as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the rocking drive unit viewed obliquely from behind, and FIG. 202 is a perspective view of the lifting mechanism of the lower drive unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 203 is a lifting mechanism FIG. 204 shows a state in which game balls are supplied to the distribution effect device. FIG. 205 is a front view of the lower drive unit, FIG. 205 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing a state in which the distribution effect device is lifted, and FIG. 206 is the distribution portion of the distribution effect device on the left FIG. 207 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing the inclined state, and FIG. 207 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing the inclined distribution unit of the distribution effect apparatus to the right; And FIG. 209 is a perspective view of the gaming medium supply mechanism of the lower part unit unit obliquely viewed from the front, FIG. 209 is a perspective view of the gaming medium supply mechanism disassembled and viewed from the oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the supply mechanism disassembled and viewed obliquely from the rear; FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the passage forming unit of the lower side character unit viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 213 is a perspective view from the perspective of FIG. Is a perspective view showing the operation of the over down passage, FIG. 214 is a perspective view showing an operation of the discharge passage of the passage forming unit.

  FIG. 215 is a perspective view of the other configuration of the back box unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 216 is a perspective view of the other configuration disassembled and viewed from the diagonal front, and FIG. FIG. 218 is a perspective view of the decoration unit disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 218 is a perspective view of the movable decoration of the cross decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 219 is a disassembled horizontal base member And is a perspective view seen obliquely from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 600 by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001, a shutter type character 3002 disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 3001, a lower part character unit 3003 disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, liquid crystal display And a horizontal decoration unit 3004 disposed on the front left side and the front right side of the device 1400.

  As shown in FIG. 184, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape having an open front side, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 3001a projecting outward at the front end, and the fixing portion 3001a Is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600. Further, in the back box 3001, a rectangular opening 3001c is formed substantially at the center of the back wall 3001b, and it is possible to visually recognize the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side through the opening 3001c. . Furthermore, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the shutter type character 3002, the lower character property unit 3003, and each substrate, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

  The shutter-type role object 3002 will be described in detail. The shutter type character 3002 is a sliding door type character disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and in a state where the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is closed (see FIG. 183) and a state where it is open (see FIG. 194). It is possible to switch.

  As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the shutter type product 3002 has four shutters, ie, an inner left shutter 3010, an inner right shutter 3030, an outer left shutter 3050, and an outer right shutter 3070, and the upper portions of these shutters. The drive unit 3090 is provided with a drive unit 3090 for moving the shutters individually, and a lower support unit 3110 slidably supporting the shutters.

  The left inner shutter 3010 is, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, a decorative plate 3011 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and made of a transparent synthetic resin member, and an upper electrode separately disposed on the upper and lower portions of the decorative plate 3011. The decorative body 3012 and the lower illumination body 3013 are provided.

  By the way, as described above, when the left inner shutter 3010 which is a shielding member is constituted by a transparent decorative plate 3011 and the electric ornaments 3012 and 3013 disposed on the front or back surface, the liquid crystal display by the shielding member Even in a state in which the front of the device 1400 is shielded, it is possible to superimpose the electrical ornaments 3012 and 3013 and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the front-rear direction and visually recognize them. Becomes possible. However, in the case of using the transparent decorative plate 3011 as the shielding member, it becomes difficult to separate and provide the upper side electric decorative body 3012 and the lower side electric decoration 3013. The reason is that a wire for electrically connecting the upper electrical decoration 3012 and the lower electrical decoration 3013 is required. However, in the case of using a light-transmissive decorative plate 3011, the electric wire may be decorated Even when the wiring is performed on the back side of the plate 3011, the electric wire can be visually recognized from the player side through the decoration plate 3011, which may impair the appearance.

  On the other hand, in this example, a band-like flat cable 3014 (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 189) is used as the electric wire, and the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side of the decorative plate 3011. Therefore, the thickness portion (i.e., the side surface) of the flat cable 3014 faces the player, and the thickness portion overlaps with the left edge of the decorative plate 3011, so that it is extremely difficult to be seen from the player side It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in appearance due to the electric wire. In particular, the width of the flat cable 3014 is shorter than the thickness (that is, the width of the side surface) of the decorative plate 3011 so that the end in the width direction of the flat cable 3014 does not protrude forward from the front surface of the decorative plate 3011 It has become.

  In addition, the upper electrical decoration body 3012 and the lower electrical decoration body 3013 are arranged to be in contact with the left edge portion of the decorative plate 3011, whereby the flat cable 3014 wired along the left side surface can be It is possible to connect to the upper side illumination decorative body 3012 and the lower side illumination decoration 3013 without passing through the front and back surfaces of 3011.

  In addition, the upper electric ornament 3012 and the lower electric ornament 3013 are provided with an upper LED substrate 3015 and a lower LED substrate 3016 disposed on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011, and the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 Are connected by a flat cable 3014. In particular, the flat cable 3014 is connected to the rear surface of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 (see FIG. 188). Thereby, even if the flat cable 3014 is connected to any part of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016, it is possible to shield the flat cable 3014 of the connection part. Note that a diffuse reflection surface 3018a is formed on the decorative plate 3011 in front of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016, and light radiated from the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 is diffused, and the surface is approximately It is possible to make the light emitting decoration uniform. Moreover, according to this, the appearances of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 also become unclear, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by the light emission decoration.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 188, a recess 3017 is formed on the back surface of the decoration plate 3011 to accommodate the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016, and light is emitted from the inside of the decoration plate 3011 It is supposed to be. That is, it is possible to make the decorative plate 3011 itself appear to be glowing. Further, on the surface of the decorative plate 3011 corresponding to the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016, a projecting portion 3018 projecting toward the player is formed, and an upper frame shape surrounding the projecting portion 3018 A decorative body 3019 and a lower frame-like decorative body 3020 are provided. For this reason, even when the thickness of the decorative plate 3011 is relatively thin, it is possible to form a recess 3017 on the back surface side for accommodating the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016, and the upper frame shape decoration By the body 3019 and the lower frame-like decorative body 3020, it is possible to emphasize the light emitting portion and to enhance the rendering effect by the light emitting effect.

  By the way, when the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface of the decoration plate 3011, the flat cable 3014 is a portion (a bending portion) extended from the left side surface toward the upper electric decoration 3012 and the lower electric decoration 3013. Since the orientation of the surface of the flat cable 3014 changes, the flat cable 3014 is twisted. For this reason, there is a possibility that the flat cable 3014 may stand out in the twisted portion. On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 188, the end portions of the upper frame-shaped decorative body 3019 and the lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020 protrude outward more than the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011 , The twisted portion of the flat cable 3014 is shielded.

  By the way, when the flat cable 3014 is separated from the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011, the flat cable 3014 may be in a floating state and may be noticeable. On the other hand, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 189, a groove forming portion 3021 for holding the flat cable 3014 is formed on the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. The groove forming portion 3021 is integrally formed with the decorative plate 3011, and by forming a groove-shaped gap S with the side surface of the decorative plate 3011, a flat cable 3014 is simply inserted into the gap S to be flat. It is possible to hold the cable 3014. By the way, when adopting a configuration in which the flat cable 3014 is inserted into the gap S formed by the groove forming portion 3021, it is necessary to pull out the end side portion of the flat cable 3014 from the inside of the gap S to the outside If the flat cable 3014 is pulled forward or backward 3011, the flat cable 3014 will be twisted at that part, and a gap S with a relatively large width will be needed to accommodate the flat cable 3014. However, when the width of the gap S becomes large, it becomes difficult to stably hold the flat cable 3014, and the appearance of the flat cable 3014 may be noticeable. On the other hand, in the present example, the flat cable 3014 can be drawn straight since the outlet ports 3021a of the flat cable 3014 are formed at both ends of the groove, and the width of the gap S is matched to the thickness of the flat cable 3014. It is possible to set to the minimum size. Further, the gap S in which the flat cable 3014 is inserted is open on the front side and closed on the back side. For this reason, it becomes possible to insert the flat cable 3014 from the front into the gap S, and when wiring the flat cable 3014 after assembling the decorative plate 3011, it is possible to perform the wiring operation from the front. Further, the back side of the gap S is closed, and it is possible to wire the flat cable 3014 to the correct position only by pushing the flat cable 3014.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 187, a rack 3023 is disposed on the upper side of the decorative plate 3011 via an upper holder 3022 with the longitudinal direction as the horizontal direction. Further, on the back surface of the upper holder 3022, a cable presser 3024 is provided for supporting a cable (not shown) for supplying electricity to the upper illumination unit 3012 from the upper side of the left inner shutter 3010. The upper electric ornament body 3012 is formed to be in contact with the upper end of the decoration plate 3011, whereby a cable connected to the upper electric ornament body 3012 from the outside is not visually recognized from the player side. A pair of lower rollers 3026 is rotatably provided on the lower part of the decorative plate 3011 via the lower holder 3025 with the axial direction as the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the right inner shutter 3030 is disposed on the right side of the left inner shutter 3010, and the side surfaces can be butted against the left inner shutter 3010. The configuration of the right inner shutter 3030 is the same as the left inner shutter 3010, and as shown in FIG. 190, the transparent decorative plate 3031 and the upper electric decoration separately disposed above and below the decorative plate 3031 A flat cable 3034 electrically connecting the upper side electric decorative body 3032 and the lower side electric decorative body 3033 is configured. Further, the upper electrical decoration 3032 and the lower electrical decoration 3033 are provided with an upper LED substrate and a lower LED substrate (both not shown) disposed on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011. In addition, a ridge 3038 having a diffuse reflection surface 3038 a is formed on the decorative plate 3031 in front of the upper LED substrate and the lower LED substrate, and an upper frame-shaped decorative body 3039 and a lower frame surrounding the ridge 3038 A decorative ornament 3040 is provided. The upper electrical decoration 3032 and the lower electrical decoration 3033 are provided on the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010 when the left inner shutter 3010 and the right inner shutter 3030 are butted. The lower electric decorative body 3013 is configured to form a series of patterns.

  Further, a rack 3043 is disposed on the upper side of the right inner shutter 3030 via the upper holder 3042 with the longitudinal direction as the left and right horizontal direction. Also, on the back surface of the upper holder 3042, a cable press (not shown) is provided to support a cable (not shown) for supplying electricity to the upper illumination body 3032 from above the left inner shutter 3040. . Further, a pair of lower rollers 3046 is rotatably provided below the decorative plate 3031 via a lower holder 3045.

  Although the groove forming portion 3041 for holding the flat cable 3034 is formed on the decoration plate 3031 of the right inner shutter 3030 similarly to the decoration plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010, the decoration plate in the decoration plate 3031 is a decoration plate It is formed in the right side which is the side opposite to 3011. That is, in the decoration plate 3031 disposed on the right side, the flat cable 3034 is wired along the right side surface, and in the decoration plate 3011 disposed on the left side, the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface. Therefore, even if the left and right decorative plates 3011, 3031 are abutted against each other, the flat cables 3014, 3034 can be prevented from being pinched between the pair of decorative plates 3011, 3031, and thus the flat cables 3014, 3034 can be damaged. It is possible to prevent.

  On the other hand, the left outer shutter 3050 is disposed on the left side of the left inner shutter 3010, and is provided to be able to be drawn with respect to the left inner shutter 3010. The configuration of the left outer shutter 3050 is similar to that of the left inner shutter 3010, but differs in that there is only one electric decoration, and accordingly an electric wire corresponding to the flat cable 3014 and a groove forming portion 3021. A configuration equivalent to the above is unnecessary. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191, it comprises a transparent decorative plate 3051 and a zigzag electric decorative body 3052 provided on the decorative plate 3051. The illumination body 3052 is composed of the LED substrate 3055 accommodated in the recess 3057 on the back surface side of the decoration plate 3051, the ridge portion 3058 protruding from the surface of the decoration plate 3051, and the frame-shaped decoration 3059 provided around it. It is configured. Also, on the upper side of the decorative plate 3051, an upper front cover 3061, an upper holder 3062, and a rack 3063 extending in the horizontal direction are provided. A cable (not shown) for supplying power from above the left outer shutter 3050 is connected to the LED substrate 3055, and the cable is supported by a cable retainer 3064 attached to the front of the upper front cover 3061. ing. Furthermore, a pair of lower rollers 3066 is provided below the decorative plate 3051 via a lower holder 3065.

  The decorative plate 3051 forms a continuous partition surface with respect to the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010 when the left inner shutter 3010 and the left outer shutter 3050 are in the closed position, and the end of the decorative plate 3051 is The flat cable 3014 is disposed so as to overlap in front of the side portion (groove forming portion 3021) of the decorative plate 3011 to which the flat cable 3014 is wired. Therefore, the flat cable 3014 can be shielded by the decorative plate 3051. In addition, since the decorative plate 3051 is also transparent, the flat cable 3014 can be visually recognized through the decorative plate 3051, but the appearance of the flat cable 3014 becomes unclear by interposing the decorative plate 3051, and the flat cable 3014 becomes more conspicuous. It is possible not to.

  On the other hand, the right outer shutter 3070 is disposed on the right side of the right inner shutter 3030, and is provided so as to be able to be drawn against the right inner shutter 3030. The configuration of the right outer shutter 3070 is similar to that of the left outer shutter 3050 and has a line-symmetrical shape. That is, as shown in FIG. 192, a transparent decorative plate 3071 and a zigzag electric decorative body 3072 provided on the decorative plate 3071 are provided, and the electric decorative body 3072 is a concave portion on the back side of the decorative plate 3071 (shown (Not shown), a protrusion 3078 protruding from the surface of the decorative plate 3071 and a frame-shaped decorative body 3079 provided around the ridge 3078. Further, on the upper side of the decorative plate 3071, an upper front cover 3081 and an upper holder 3082 and a rack 3083 extending in the horizontal direction are provided. Further, on the front surface of the upper front cover 3061, a cable retainer 3084 for supporting a cable connected to the LED substrate is provided. Furthermore, a pair of lower rollers 3086 is provided below the decorative plate 3071 via a lower holder 3085.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 193, the drive unit 3090 is configured to individually drive the in-left shutter 3010, the in-right shutter 3030, the out-left shutter 3050, and the out-right shutter 3070. More specifically, racks 3023, 3043, and 4303 provided on upper portions of the respective shutters 3010, 3030, 3050, and 3070 (hereinafter referred to as "the respective shutters 3010 and the like") by the lower guide portion 3091 and the upper guide portion 3092 stacked vertically. 3063, 3083 are supported slidably in the lateral direction, and on the upper side of the guide upper portion 3092, a mechanism for linearly moving the respective racks 3023, 3043, 3063, and 383 in the lateral direction is disposed. Specifically, a box-shaped left motor base 3093, an inner left motor 3094 attached to the left motor base 3093 and powering the inner left shutter 3010, and a left motor base 3093 are provided on the upper left side of the guide upper portion 3092. A left outer motor 3095 is mounted and powers the left outer shutter 3050. In addition, a gear 3096 is connected to the left inner motor 3094 and the left outer motor 3095, and a rotational force is transmitted to a pinion 3097 engaged with the rack 3023 of the left inner shutter 3010 and the rack 3063 of the left outer shutter 3050. It has become. The pinion 3097 penetrates the upper guide portion 3092 and the lower guide portion 3091 and is engaged with the racks 3023 and 3063. Further, the open side surface of the left motor base 3093 is closed by a lid 3098.

  Two right side motor bases 3099, a right inner motor 3100 attached to the right side motor base 3099 and powering the right inner shutter 3030, and a right outside shutter 3070 attached to the right motor base 3099 on the upper right side of the guide upper portion 3092 And an outer right motor 3101 for applying power to the motor. Further, a gear 3102 is connected to the inner right motor 3100 and the right outer motor 3101 so that a rotational force is transmitted to a pinion 3103 meshed with the rack 3043 of the inner right shutter 3030 and the rack 3083 of the outer right shutter 3070. It has become. Further, the open side surface of the right motor base 3099 is closed by a lid 3104.

  Further, in the vicinity of the four corners of the guide upper portion 3092, four photosensors 3105 for detecting the open state (origin position) of each shutter 3010 and the like are provided.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 186, the lower support portion 3110 for supporting the lower portion of each shutter 3010 etc. is a middle support portion 3111, a left front support portion 3112 disposed on the front left side of the middle support portion 3111, and a middle support. The right front support 3113 is disposed on the front right side of the portion 3111, and the rear support 3114 is disposed on the rear surface of the middle support 3111. The lower roller 3066 of the left outer shutter 3050 is inserted between the left front support 3112 and the middle support 3111, and the lower roller 3086 of the right outer shutter 3070 is inserted between the right front support 3113 and the middle support 3111. Is inserted and slidably supports the left outer shutter 3050 and the right outer shutter 3070 between the closed position (see FIG. 185) and the open position (see FIG. 194). In addition, a lower roller 3026 of the left inner shutter 3010 and a lower roller 3046 of the inner right shutter 3030 are inserted between the rear support portion 3114 and the middle support portion 3111. And a right inner shutter 3030 slidably supported between a closed position (see FIG. 185) abutted against each other and an open position (see FIG. 194) spaced apart from each other.

  As described above, the shutters 3010 and so on move in the lateral direction between the open position and the closed position and are configured as a sliding door, so that in the closed position, the liquid crystal display 1400 in the rear is passed through the decorative plate 3011 etc. In the open position, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be visually recognized without intervention of the decorative plate 3011 or the like. Therefore, the operation of each shutter 3010 and the like can be focused on, and the rendering effect can be significantly enhanced. In particular, at the closed position, the plurality of electric ornaments and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400d can be superimposed and visually recognized, and it is possible to perform three-dimensional, highly realistic effects.

  Next, the lower part product unit 3003 will be described in detail. The lower part product unit 3003 is disposed on the lower front side of the shutter type product 3002 as shown in FIG. 183, and performs distribution effects using the game balls in the effect area partitioned from the game area 605 It has become possible. As shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the lower part product unit 3003 is a lower drive unit unit 3120 that performs distribution effects for gaming balls, and a guiding member 3131 of the lower drive unit unit 3120 while storing gaming balls. A game medium supply mechanism 3121 for supplying game balls to the game to be described later, and a passage forming unit 3122 for forming a passage or the like for collecting the game balls discharged from the lower drive unit 3120 and returning it to the game medium supply mechanism 3121; It can be divided roughly.

  First, as shown in FIG. 197, the lower drive unit 3120 supports the distribution effect device 3125 for distributing the supplied game balls in the left and right direction and the distribution effect device 3125 so as to be vertically slidable. The lift effect mechanism 3126 is configured to raise and lower the distribution effect device 3125 between an upper stop position (also referred to as an application position) and a lower stop position (also referred to as a standby position). As shown in FIG. 198, the distribution effect device 3125 swings the distributing portion 3130 swinging in the left and right direction around a pin 3138 (see FIG. 199) provided at the central portion, and the distributing portion 3130. And a swing drive unit 3145 for guiding the distributed game balls. In FIG. 198, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the decorative portion 3146 disposed on the front surface of the rocking driving portion 3145 is removed is shown.

  The distributing unit 3130 is, as shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a simulated shelf 3132 having a guiding member 3131 at the top, and a decoration member disposed on the front side of the simulated shelf 3132 and below the guiding member 3131 And a lower decorative portion 3137 which is a decorative member disposed below the upper decorative portion 3133. An arc-shaped rolling surface 3131a capable of rolling the game ball in the left-right direction is formed on the upper surface of the guiding member 3131, and when the distributing portion 3130 inclines toward either left or right, rolling occurs. It is possible to make the game ball flow down along the surface 3131a. A decorative frame 3136 of the upper decorative portion 3133 is disposed on the front surface of the guiding member 3131 so that the gaming ball does not deviate forward from the rolling surface 3131 a. The lower part of the pseudo shelf 3132 has a shape in which the central part in the left-right direction protrudes downward, and a cylindrical action part 3132a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end part. 3139 is inserted. In addition, a cylindrical shaft 3132 b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed at the center of the pseudo shelf 3132 at the center in the left-right direction and above the action part 3132 a, and the swinging drive 3145 (FIG. 200) ) Is connected to the central axis 3151a. In other words, the pseudo shelf 3132 is supported so as to be pivotable about the shaft 3132 b, and can be turned clockwise or counterclockwise by applying a force to the action portion 3132 a. There is. Further, a plurality of bushes 3140 and a bush presser 3141 are provided on the back surface of the pseudo shelf 3132, and arc-shaped guide portions 3151b formed on the left and right sides of the rear plate 3151 of the base member 3150 (see FIG. 200). As a result, the pseudo shelf 3132 can be swung smoothly and the swing range (turning angle) can be limited.

  The upper decorative portion 3133 includes a front decoration 3135 in which a decorative character is embedded and a decoration frame 3136 provided on the back side, and an LED substrate and a lens (both of which are illustrated in FIG. Not) is housed. The lower decorative portion 3137 has a shape that imitates the appearance of the character.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the swing drive unit 3145 includes a base member 3150, a left rack 3160 disposed on the left side of the base member 3150, and a right rack 3161 disposed on the right side of the base member 3150. The left relay substrate 3163 and the right relay substrate 3164 disposed on the lower rear surface of the base member 3150, and light directed toward the guiding member 3131 of the pseudo shelf 3132 disposed slightly above the lower front surface of the base member 3150 And a right LED substrate 3166 for emitting light. Further, in the base member 3150, the central axis 3151a described above is formed to project forward at the central position of the back plate 3151 and a pair of guide portions 3151b are opposed on the circumference centered on the central axis 3151a. It is formed. Further, a plurality of wall portions 3152 are provided to project forward on the outer side in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3151 b, and the first conveyance path 3153 is formed on the left end side of the rear plate 3151 by these wall portions 3152 A second transport passage 3154 is formed on the right end side of the rear plate 3151. In the first conveyance passage 3153, a first inlet 3153a opened toward the right (inward) is formed at the upper end portion, and the lower end of the first conveyance passage 3153 is bent substantially at right angles to the right (inward) It has a shape. Most of the front surface of the first transfer passage 3153 is closed by the decorative portion 3146 (see FIG. 198), and only the lower end portion is open. That is, the first-class outlet 3153b is formed at the lower end portion, and the gaming ball entered into the first inlet 3153a and guided by the first transport passage 3153 is made to flow forward from the first-class outlet 3153b. The first inlet 3153a is formed at a height that communicates with the left end of the guiding member 3131 of the simulated shelf 3132 when the simulated shelf 3132 rotates counterclockwise.

  Further, the second conveyance passage 3154 is a substantially linear passage formed in the vertical direction, and a second inlet 3154a opened toward the left side (inner side) is formed at the upper end portion, and the second conveyance passage 3154 is formed at the lower end portion. The second outlet 3154 b is formed to open forward. In addition, the front surface portion of the second transfer passage 3154 is also closed by the decorative portion 3146 (see FIG. 198). That is, the gaming balls entered into the second inflow port 3154a and guided by the second transport passage 3154 flow out forward from the second outflow port 3154b. The second inlet 3154 a is formed at a height that communicates with the right end of the guiding member 3131 of the simulated shelf 3132 when the simulated shelf 3132 is rotated clockwise. Further, the second outlet 3154 b is formed at a position higher than the first-class outlet 3153 b of the first transfer passage 3153.

  Further, at the lower part of the base member 3150, a swing mechanism 3170 for applying a rotational force to the actuating portion 3132a of the pseudo shelf 3132 (see FIG. 199) is provided. The rocking mechanism 3170 is disposed at the lower portion of the back surface of the rear plate 3151 and has a motor 3171 that rotates in the longitudinal direction of the rotation shaft, a rotation shaft of the motor 3171, and a pin 3139 mounted on the artificial shelf 3132 And a link 3172 for connecting the two, and by changing the rotation direction of the motor 3171, it is possible to switch the rotation direction of the pseudo shelf 3132. A flexible presser 3174 for supporting the wire is provided on the lower front surface of the base member 3150. Here, it can be said that the swing mechanism 3170 is a drive means for operating the simulated shelf 3132.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 202 and 203, the lifting mechanism 3126 includes a motor base 3127. The motor base 3127 includes a substantially flat plate-like rear plate 3127a, a left sliding portion 3127b formed on the left side thereof and slidably supporting a left rack 3160 of the rocking drive portion 3145 (see FIG. 197), and a rear plate 3127a. A right side sliding portion 3127c slidably supported on the right side rack 3161 of the rocking driving portion 3145, a left motor housing portion 3127d formed on the left side of the left side sliding portion 3127b, and a right side sliding portion And a right motor housing portion 3127e formed on the right side of 3127c. The left relay board 3128a and the right relay board 3128b are disposed on the back surface of the rear plate 3127a, and the left motor 3176 housed in the left motor housing 3127d and the right motor housed in the right motor housing 3127e. The drive signal to 3177 is to be relayed. The left motor housing 3127 d is covered by the left motor cover 3176 b, and the right motor housing 3127 e is covered by the right motor cover 3177 b. A gear 3176 a is connected to the left motor 3176, and the gear 3176 a is disposed so as to protrude into the left sliding portion 3127 b and is engaged with the left rack 3160 of the swing drive portion 3145. Similarly, a gear (not shown) is connected to the right motor 3177, and the gear is disposed so as to protrude into the right sliding portion 3127c and is engaged with the right rack 3161 in the swing drive portion 3145. ing. For this reason, when the left motor 3176 and the right motor 3177 are simultaneously rotated, power is transmitted via the gear 3176a, causing the left rack 3160 and the right rack 3161 to move linearly in the vertical direction, that is, the distribution effect device 3125 is straight. It is possible to raise and lower.

  Further, on the upper side of the left sliding portion 3127b in the motor base 3127, a guiding member 3131 (more specifically, a gaming ball guide of the distribution effect device 3125) of the game ball supplied from a game medium supply mechanism 3121 (see FIG. 196) described later. A guiding passage 3178 is provided for guiding to the passage 3155). The front surfaces of the left sliding portion 3127b, the right sliding portion 3127c, and the guide passage portion 3178 are closed by a guide cover 3179.

  By configuring in this manner, when the distribution effect is performed by the distribution effect device 3125, the player can easily visually recognize from the lower stop position (see FIG. 204) where visual recognition from the player is difficult. It becomes possible to raise the distribution effect device 3125 to the upper stop position (refer to FIG. 205) which enables the game ball K to be distributed in the left and right direction at the upper stop position. That is, as shown in FIG. 206, when the distributing unit 3130 is turned counterclockwise, the gaming ball K can be rolled to the left by the guiding member 3131 and can enter the first inlet 3153a. Become. The gaming ball K having entered the first inlet 3153 a is discharged from the first outlet 3153 b at the lower end through the first transfer passage 3153. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, when the distributing unit 3130 is rotated clockwise, the gaming ball rolls to the right by the guiding member 3131 and can enter the second inlet 3154a. . The gaming ball K entering the second inflow port 3154 a flows out of the second outflow port 3154 b at the lower end through the second transfer passage 3154. The gaming balls having flowed out of the first-class outlet 3153 b or the second outlet 3154 b are returned to the gaming medium supply mechanism 3121 by the return passage 3211 a (see FIG. 213), the details of which will be described later.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 stores a predetermined number of game balls and supplies the game balls to the induction member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 at the time of distribution effect. A flat box-like base body 3180 comprising a base upper portion 3181 and a base lower portion 3182; a cylindrical guiding portion 3183 as a substantially cylindrical passage forming member for guiding the game ball upward; A screw 3190 is provided in the guiding portion 3183 and raises the gaming ball, and a drive mechanism 3199 is configured to rotate the screw 3190 with the axial direction as the vertical direction. The cylindrical guiding portion 3183 is erected on the upper base portion 3181 and includes a front wall forming portion 3184 having a substantially semicircular arc shape in cross section and a rear wall forming portion 3186 having a substantially semicircular arc cross section disposed on the rear side. It is configured. In addition, the inflow port 3187 opened toward the rear is formed in the lower part of the rear wall forming portion 3186, and the gaming ball is cylindrically guided through the lower passage portion 3197 communicated with the return passage 3211a (see FIG. 213). It is designed to enter section 3183. Further, a discharge port 3185 opened toward the front is formed in the upper part of the front wall forming portion 3184, and the gaming balls transported by the screw 3190 are discharged from the discharge port 3185. The gaming balls discharged from the discharge port 3185 are sent to the guide passage 3178 (see FIG. 202) through the upper passage 3195. In the upper passage portion 3195 and the lower passage portion 3197, passage sensors 3196 and 3198 for detecting passage of gaming balls are provided.

  The screw 3190 is cylindrical and has a shaft 3191 having a large diameter engaging portion 3191a at its lower end, a spiral 3192 spirally formed around the shaft 3191, and an upper side of the shaft 3191 The engaging portion 3191 a is erected in a state of being inserted through the opening 3181 a of the base upper portion 3181. The notch 3193a formed in the rotary plate 3193 is for detecting the rotational position of the screw 3190.

  Drive mechanism 3199 is provided with motor 3200 mounted on base upper portion 3181, motor gear 3201 disposed inside base body 3180 and connected to the rotation shaft of motor 3200, and intermediate gear 3202 engaged with motor gear 3201. And a connecting gear 3203 having a projection 3203a engaged with the intermediate gear 3202 and engaged with the engaging portion 3191a of the screw 3190. The protrusion 3203a and the engagement portion 3191a are connected by the connection pin 3204 in a fitted state.

  Thus, the rotation of the motor 3200 is transmitted to the screw 3190 via the motor gear 3201, the intermediate gear 3202, and the connecting gear 3203, and causes the screw 3190 to rotate in a fixed direction, that is, the gaming ball having flowed into the inlet 3187. It is possible to transport toward the outlet 3185.

  By the way, in the case of performing distribution after raising the distribution effect device 3125 to the upper stop position as described above, in order to supply the game ball to the induction member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, the game ball is on the upper side. The height must be raised to the height corresponding to the stop position, and the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121, that is, the size in the vertical direction, may be increased, making it difficult to secure the arrangement space. Although it is conceivable to achieve miniaturization by raising the position of the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121, the return passage 3211 a is in communication with the inlet 3187 near the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 to Since it is necessary to flow down to the part, the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 has to be positioned to a certain extent, which makes it difficult to miniaturize by the above configuration.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of this example, the game ball is placed on the guiding member 3131 before the distribution effect device 3125 starts to rise (that is, in the state of stopping at the lower stop position (see FIG. 204)). It is supposed to be supplied. For this reason, it is possible to relatively lower the height for lifting the gaming balls, and it is possible to miniaturize the gaming media supply mechanism 3121. In addition, even if the game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131, the rolling of the game ball on the guide member 3131 is restricted until the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the upper stop position, Thus, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being distributed before reaching the upper stop position, that is, before the distribution effect device 3125 becomes visible to the player.

  Particularly in this example, the rolling surface 3131a of the guiding member 3131 is formed in a substantially arc shape, and the guiding member 3131 is held in a substantially horizontal state until reaching the upper stop position. Therefore, when gaming balls are supplied to the rolling surface 3131a of the guiding member 3131, the gaming balls are guided to the central portion in the horizontal direction, which is the lowest position in the rolling surface 3131a, and stay there. become. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game balls from deviating from the rolling surface 3131a, that is, the game balls are distributed during the ascent of the distribution effect device 3125.

  Further, in this example, since the game ball is sent from the left end side to the guide member 3131, the supply position of the game ball is lower than that sent from above the guide member 3131, and the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 Is even lower. Note that the guiding member 3131 is provided with a substantially arc-shaped rolling surface 3131 a so that the game ball can be guided to the central position of the guiding member 3131 and braked even when the game ball is sent in from the end side It is possible.

  Also, the game balls released from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 are guided to the end side of the guiding member 3131 through the game ball guide passage 3155 (see FIG. 200). And since this game ball guidance passage 3155 moves up and down integrally with the distribution effect device 3125, even if the stop position of the distribution effect device 3125 is somewhat displaced, it is possible to smoothly send in the game balls. It becomes. For example, even if the distribution effect device 3125 may start to rise before the game ball is sent to the induction member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, if the game ball is supplied to the game ball guide passage 3155, then , Can be fed onto the guiding member 3131.

  Further, the guiding member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is arranged to be positioned behind the rolling surface (so-called stage) of the shelf upper stage 2372 in the first character unit 2370 (see FIG. 174) at the lower stop position. It is done. Therefore, it is possible to evoke an image that the guiding member 3131 is a part of the stage, and it is possible to increase the impact on the stage. In addition, a transparent protection plate 2360 (see FIG. 161) is provided between the shelf upper stage 2372 and the induction member 3131, and the game area 605 in which the shelf upper stage 2372 is disposed and the effect where the induction member 3131 is disposed The area is clearly divided and the game ball is prevented from jumping into the effect area.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the passage forming unit 3122 includes a cover member 3210 that covers the front of the lower drive unit 3120 (see FIG. 196) and a return passage disposed on the upper back surface of the cover member 3210. And a forming member 3211. As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, the return passage forming member 3211 has a return passage 3211a inside, and the game balls distributed by the distribution effect device 3125 are directed toward the inflow port 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121. It is possible to make it flow down. Specifically, the return passage forming member 3211 is formed with a linear portion 3212 obliquely disposed, and a left side projecting portion 3215 and a right side projecting portion 3216 projecting upward from the linear portion 3212, The left side protrusion 3215 is provided with a first communication port 3215a communicating with the first outlet 3153b of the first conveyance passage 3153 when the distribution effect device 3125 moves to the upper stop position, and the right side protrusion 3216 is provided. A second communication port 3216a is provided which communicates with the second outlet 3154b of the second transport passage 3154 when the distribution effect device 3125 moves to the upper stop position. That is, the gaming balls distributed to the first inlet 3153a and the second inlet 3154a are sent to the common return passage 3211a.

  Thus, by combining the game medium supply mechanism 3121 for supplying the game balls to the distribution effect device 3125 and the return path 3211a for returning the game balls distributed by the distribution effect device 3125 to the game medium supply mechanism 3121. The circulation path J of the game balls is configured, and thereby it is possible to repeat the distribution effect while circulating the game balls. However, in the case where the distribution effect is repeatedly performed using the gaming ball enclosed in the circulation path J, if the dirt adheres to the surface of the gaming ball or the surface of the gaming ball rusts with use. The appearance of the game ball may be deteriorated, and the effect of presentation may be impaired. In particular, since the effect performed by the distribution effect device 3125 focuses on the behavior of the gaming ball, its dirt and rust become noticeable, which causes a reduction in visual interest. In addition, since the work of sealing the gaming ball is performed at the time of manufacture of the gaming machine, during transportation after shipment, the gaming ball rolls in the circulation path J, and the balls in the game ball collide or members in the circulation path J Collisions can also produce relatively loud sounds.

  On the other hand, in the present example, the game balls used in the game area 605 are taken in, and the game balls are supplied to the circulation path J. Specifically, the gaming ball that has won a prize in the second starting opening 2002 is sent via the supply passage 3220 to the supply opening 3213 which is the upstream end of the return passage 3211 a. In addition, since the second start opening 2002 is disposed at a position higher than the upstream end of the return passage 3211a, the game ball that has won the second start opening 2002 may naturally flow down toward the return passage 3211a. It is possible. As described above, since the gaming ball that has won a prize in the second starting opening 2002 is replenished to the circulation path J by the replenishment passage 3220, it is not necessary to enclose the gaming ball in the circulation path J in advance. And it is possible to prevent damage due to a collision. In particular, the second starting port 2002 is disposed at a position away from the gaming medium supply mechanism 3121 because it is sent to the return passage 3211 a through the replenishment passage 3220 and supplied to the gaming medium supply mechanism 3121 using the return passage 3211 a. Notwithstanding, the length of the supply passage 3220 can be made relatively short, and the overall configuration can be simplified.

  By the way, in the game ball which has won in the second start opening 2002 is sent to the return passage 3211 a through the supply passage 3220, the number of game balls in the circulation path J every time the game ball wins in the second start opening 2002. However, since there is a limit to the number of game balls that can be stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, if the number is exceeded, the game balls will be stored in the return passage 3211 a and the game balls It becomes difficult to circulate. In addition, a mechanism is further provided to distribute the game balls that have won in the second starting opening 2002 into the return passage 3211a and the discharge passage (not shown), and it is configured to send to the return passage 3211a side only when replenishment of the game balls is necessary. Although this may be considered, this requires an additional passage switching mechanism for switching between the return passage 3211a and the discharge passage, which is not preferable because the overall configuration becomes complicated and enlarged.

  On the other hand, in the present example, an overflow mechanism is provided between the game medium supply mechanism 3121 and the return passage 3211a. Specifically, the lower passage portion 3197 (see FIG. 213) is disposed between the inflow port 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 and the return passage 3211a, but the bottom surface of the lower passage portion 3197 is on the rear side. It has a downward slope toward the front, and an outlet 3197a is provided on the front side. That is, when the number of gaming balls stored in the vicinity of the inlet 3187 of the gaming medium supply mechanism 3121 is within the allowable number, the gaming balls entering the lower passage 3197 follow the inclination of the bottom of the lower passage 3197 It is sent to the inflow port 3187 side, but when the number of stored gaming balls exceeds the allowable number, it overflows from the discharge port 3197a on the front of the lower passage portion 3197 and is discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls from being stored in the return passage 3211a, and directly connect the second starting opening 2002 and the return passage 3211a by the supply passage 3220 without providing a passage switching mechanism or the like. It becomes possible. The gaming balls discharged from the discharge port 3197a roll to the out ball passage 1119 and from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from the lower rear surface of the gaming machine to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged towards the That is, the gaming medium supply mechanism 3121 including the replenishment passage 3220 and the circulation path J prevents the game ball received in the second start port 2002 from being discharged from the out ball passage 1119 as the game ball discharge mechanism and thus predetermined. It can be said that it is a game ball storage mechanism that stores a number of game balls.

  Further, in this example, the gaming balls in the circulation path J are ejected at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212 and FIG. 214, the discharge passage 3218 is provided at the lower part of the back surface of the cover member 3210, and the communication port 3219 of the discharge passage 3218 is the lower stop position of the distribution effect device 3125. , And communicate with the first-class outlet 3153b of the first transfer passage 3153. In addition, when the distribution effect device 3125 is at the lower stop position, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is controlled at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1), and the induction member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 It is designed to supply game balls on the top. In particular, at this time, as shown in FIG. 214, the distributing unit 3130 of the distributing effect device 3125 is turned in the counterclockwise direction so that the gaming ball enters the first inlet 3153a. As a result, by supplying game balls to the distribution effect device 3125 at the lower stop position, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls in the circulation path J from the pachinko machine 1. As described above, since the passages (the return passage 3211a and the discharge passage 3218) communicating with the first-class outlet 3153b are switched according to the height of the distribution effect device 3125, a complicated configuration for switching the respective passages becomes unnecessary. It becomes possible to miniaturize the whole. In particular, when discharging the game balls, since the game balls on the guide member 3131 are guided toward the first inlet 3153a, the discharge path of the game balls is specified, and the discharge passage to the second transport passage 3154 is unnecessary. Become. Therefore, it is possible to miniaturize and simplify the discharge mechanism. The gaming balls discharged from the discharge passage 3218 roll to the out ball passage 1119, and from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from the lower rear surface of the gaming machine to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged towards the

  Next, the horizontal decoration unit 3004 will be described. As shown in FIG. 215 and FIG. 216, the horizontal decoration unit 3004 is disposed on the left side and the right side of the back box 3001, respectively, so as to perform light emission decoration and to make a part movable. Describing in detail based on FIGS. 217 and 218, the horizontal decoration unit 3004 includes a decorative base 3250, a movable decorative portion 3251 disposed on the rear side, and an upper illumination arranged on the upper and lower sides of the movable decorative portion 3251. It comprises and comprises the part 3253 and the lower side electric decoration part 3254. The decoration base 3250 is provided with upper and lower illumination support portions 3250a and 3250b for supporting the upper illumination portion 3253 and the lower illumination portion 3254, and the notch 3250c is formed between the illumination support portions 3250a and 3250b. ing. The upper electrical decoration part 3253 and the lower electrical decoration part 3254 have a lens and an LED substrate (neither of which is shown) in the inside, and can emit and decorate light.

  On the other hand, the movable decorative portion 3251 includes a back base 3256, a solenoid 3257 disposed on the back base 3256, a link 3260 rotatably supported with the axial direction as a vertical direction and driven by a plunger 3258 of the solenoid 3257 And a centerpiece 3261 rotatably supported by the projection 3256a of the back base 3256 and connected to the link 3260 via the pin 3259 and the shaft portion 3262. A middle lens 3265 and an LED substrate 3266 are disposed inside the middle decoration 3261, and a red lens 3263 and a blue lens 3264 are provided through the side surface of the middle decoration 3261. That is, by operating the solenoid 3257, it is possible to rotate the inner decoration 3261 via the link 3260, and a state in which the front surface of the inner decoration 3261 (the lighting state of the middle lens 3265) can be visually recognized It is possible to switch the side surface of the decoration 3261 (the lighting state of the red lens 3263 and the blue lens 3264) to the visible state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 215, a pair of horizontal base members 3240 are disposed on the rear side of the horizontal decoration unit 3004. As shown in FIG. 219, the horizontal base member 3240 disposed on the right side of the back box 3001 is a cover member 3270, and a game ball disposed at the lower right of the cover member 3270 and winning the second starting opening 2002 as a return passage 3211a. , A right upper LED substrate 3273 and a top decoration 3276 disposed on the top of the cover member 3270, and a large right LED substrate 3274 and a small lower right LED disposed in the front center portion of the cover member 3270. And a substrate 3275. Further, in the cover member 3270, a magnetic sensor 3277 for detecting an illegal act using a magnet or the like is embedded.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 216, on the rear side of the back box 3001, a left relay substrate 3241 and a right relay substrate 3242 relaying a drive signal to the horizontal base member 3240, and a liquid crystal guide 3243 supporting the liquid crystal display device 1400. A lamp driving board 3245 for driving the LED mounted on each decoration board, a panel relay board 3247 for relaying a signal to the game panel 600, and a resistance board 3248 are attached. The lamp driving substrate 3245 is provided in a state of being accommodated in the substrate case 3246.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a block diagram of a main substrate and a peripheral substrate. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control substrate 1186 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral boards 4010 is a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. And a liquid crystal control board 4500 for controlling the display of the effect image in the unit 2350.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is the main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, the main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and And a RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, as well as a watchdog timer that monitors the operation (system) and prevents fraud It also has built-in functions to

  The main control MPU 4100a detects the gaming ball received to the first starting opening 2001, the first starting opening sensor 2011, the second starting opening sensor 2349 for detecting the gaming ball received to the second starting opening 2002, and a part A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2014 is input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, or to the gate sensor 2202, the special view gate sensor 2502, the general winning opening sensor 2014, the count sensor 2013, and the back unit 3000. A detection signal from the attached magnetic sensor 3277 is input via the panel relay board 3247 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100 b.

  Based on these detection signals, main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to start opening solenoid 2344, attacker solenoid 2016, and special winning opening solenoid 2315 via main control I / O port 4100b and panel relay board 3247. The first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage indicator 643, the first through the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3247, and the function display substrate 640a Two special symbol memory indicator 644, normal symbol indicator 645, ordinary symbol memory indicator 646, game state indicator 647, round indicator 648, the drive signal is output to the hold state indicator 3152 of center feature 2300 and the like .

  As described above, the main control MPU 4100a executes a control program stored in the ROM based on such detection signals, whereby drive signals are appropriately supplied to various actuators such as the start opening solenoid 2344 and the attacker solenoid 2016. The various games played on the pachinko machine 1 progress according to a predetermined procedure.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control substrate 1186 via the main drawer relay substrate 1107 described above, and a pachinko machine from the payout control substrate 1186 Various commands and the like regarding the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107 or the like. Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The substrates of the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral control substrate 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, as described in detail later, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 1136, the detailed description of which will be described later. The power supply substrate 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by this capacitor. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624 a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 1136, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. This blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 etc via the not-shown harness.

[3-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, the payout control board 1186 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 described above, and An error LED display 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball pull switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 220, the payout control unit 4110 for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 1186 includes a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110 c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110 c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110 a is operating normally, and a payout motor drive circuit 4110 d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above; It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and further incorporates a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout, as described in detail later, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the signal (detection signal) being input, the detection signal from full switch 916 is input, and the detection signals from out-of-ball switch 778, count switch 812 and rotation angle switch 855 are relay terminals within a prize ball unit It may be input through the plate 830.

  Further, when the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands relating to payout. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d is used to discharge (ball out) the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 described above based on the operation signal (detection signal). When a drive signal is output to the payout motor 815 or a rental ball request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal board 1150b, payout is performed based on the rental ball request signal. A drive signal is output from motor drive circuit 4110 d to dispensing motor 815 or When the detection signal from the switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops driving signal to the payout motor 815 from payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the detection signal.

  Furthermore, when the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or the detection signal from the counting switch 812 is input. Based on the detection signal, the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is a portion electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall), whereby the hall computer counts the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the number of pachinko machines It becomes possible to grasp the game information etc. of 1 and monitor the game of the player.

  According to such a payout control MPU 4110a, the control program stored in the ROM is executed based on various commands related to the payout from the main control substrate 4100, whereby the drive signal is output to the payout motor 815 as described above. As a result, the game balls are paid out by the number of winning balls indicated by the received payout command.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220, the launch control unit 4120 for performing launch control of the launch motor 695 in the payout control board 1186 has an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input and a transmission circuit that outputs clock signals at fixed time intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c outputting a reference pulse for determining the rotational speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and outputting a drive signal to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c And a launch motor drive circuit 4120 d. The firing control circuit 4120 c controls the rotation speed of the firing motor 695 so that about 99.95 gaming balls per minute are shot toward the playing area 605 based on the clock signal from the sending circuit 4120 b. . In other words, the movement of the above-described hitting rod 687 is controlled.

  As described above, the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are built in the handle device 460 (operation handle portion 410) described above, and when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 410 is touched, the touch sensor When the single-shot button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. These detection signals are input to the input circuit 4120a through the above-described handle relay terminal board 194, the detailed description of which will be described later. Also, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a through the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied from the power supply substrate 1136 to the payout control substrate 1186 in the same manner as the main control substrate 4100. The power supply substrate 1136 includes a capacitor for supplying power to the payout control substrate 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various types of payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated at power-on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, the peripheral control board 4140 for effect control in the peripheral board 4010 performs a high-quality sound performance by a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands. A sound source IC 4140 c and a sound ROM 4140 d storing sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140 c refers are configured. The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as parallel input / output port, serial input / output port, watchdog timer (WDT), etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, based on these various commands. The door frame side lighting flickering command for outputting a lighting signal or a flickering signal to the LED of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 5 is output to the lamp driving substrate 3167 or each light emitting decorative substrate 3606 provided in the game board 4 The game board side lighting blink command which outputs the lighting signal or the blink signal to the LED of the LED is output to the lamp drive board 3167, the left rotation light motor 245 of the top lamp electric decoration unit 200 provided on the door frame 5, the right rotation light Motor drive command of door frame side motor that outputs rotation drive signal to motor 265 and central rotation light motor 285 Game board side motor drive command that outputs rotational drive signals to the board 3013a or to the left / right drive motor 3042, drive motor 3061, drive motor 3108, drive motor 3112, and drive motor 3200 provided on the game board 4 Output command to the motor drive substrate 3013a, a control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d, or a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 Is output to the liquid crystal control board 4500.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4500 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in this embodiment, 19.2 km (k) as a bit rate (size of data which can be transmitted per unit time). BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter, described as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, door frame side motor drive command, game board side motor drive command output from peripheral control MPU 4140a to lamp drive board 3167 and motor drive board 3013a , And a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp drive board 3167 is configured to have a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command, and the decoration boards 126, 190, 206, 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , 225, 296, etc. Each light emitting decoration board 3606 provided on the game board 4 with a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command, the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5 Output to the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453 in FIG. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013 a rotates the rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command, and the left rotation light motor 245 and the right rotation light motor 265 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay substrate 1108. , And various motors 2380, 2416, 3094, 3095, 3100, 3101, 3171, provided on the game board 4 with rotational drive signals based on the game board side motor drive commands output to the central rotary light motor 285 or received. Output to 3176, 3177, 3200.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects a movable position of the first character unit 2370, the second character unit 2400, the shutter type character 3002, and the lower character unit 3003 of the game board 4 (a position detection sensor (photo Detection signals from the sensors 2382, 2422, and 2105 are input through the motor drive board 3013 a, and the original position is grasped based on these detection signals. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects the rotational position of the rotary lamps 244, 264 and 284 of the door frame 5, and the detection signals from the left rotational position detection sensor 250, the right rotational position detection sensor 270 and the central rotational position detection sensor 290 The rotational positions of the rotary lights 224, 264, 284 are grasped based on the detection signals of the sub drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013a. Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control substrate 4500 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control substrate 4500, or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Operation detection signals from the main button sensor 376 and the sub button sensor 378 that detect the operation of the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are input through the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. The main button 371 is provided with a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. There is.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 via the lamp drive board 3167 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. Control so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow.

  Peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) not shown, and peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the internal watchdog timer (internal WDT) in combination with external WDT. It is diagnosing whether the system of MPU4140a has runaway.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment includes a real time clock control unit 4190 (hereinafter also referred to as an RTC control unit 4190). FIG. 221 (a) is a diagram for describing particularly the real-time clock function of the functions of the peripheral control board 4140, and a part of the configuration is omitted for convenience of description. FIG. 221B is a diagram for describing a backup power supply function of the RAM, in particular, of the functions of the peripheral control board 4140. For convenience of description, part of the configuration is omitted. .

<Real time clock function>
The peripheral control MPU 4140a in the peripheral control board 4140 is provided with a built-in real time clock 4140 aa (hereinafter, built in RTC 4140 aa) as shown in FIG. The built-in RTC 4140 aa may be included in a timer function of measuring a time such as a fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display pattern in the peripheral control board 4140 of the present embodiment described later.

  The RTC control unit 4190 includes a real time clock 4192 (hereinafter, referred to as an RTC 4192), a battery 4194, and a RAM 4196. The RTC 4192 includes circuits such as a register circuit, a clock input circuit, a clock output circuit, an interrupt output circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a control circuit. The RTC 4192 can output current calendar information and time information. The calendar information includes information on dates, for example, information such as "year", "month", "day", "day of the week" and the like. The time information includes information on time, for example, information such as "hour", "minute" and "second". The RAM 4196 stores information necessary for the operation of the RTC 4192. A battery 4194 is connected to the RTC 4192 and the RAM 4196 and functions as a backup power supply for these. As the battery 4194, a primary battery such as a button battery or a rechargeable secondary battery may be used, or a capacitor with a large capacity may be used.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes a power supply substrate (not shown) for supplying power to each substrate such as a main substrate 4000 and a peripheral control substrate 4140 described later. When the power supply substrate is turned on, power is supplied to each substrate, and when the power supply substrate is turned off, the supply of power to each substrate is stopped.

  The RTC 4192 operates by receiving the supply of power from the power supply substrate when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the power supply substrate is on). On the other hand, although the RTC 4192 can not receive the supply of power from the power supply board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (when the power supply substrate is off), the power of the pachinko machine 1 is powered off by receiving the power supply from the battery 4194 Sometimes it is possible to continue operation.

  The built-in RTC 4140aa is a part that manages information concerning the current date and time, and can output current calendar information and time information. Since the built-in RTC 4140aa is a part that operates by receiving power from the power supply substrate 851, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (when the power supply from the power supply substrate 851 is stopped), the current calendar information and time Lose information. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives calendar information and time information from the RTC 4192 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated (when the power is turned on) or when a failure occurs in the power supply substrate (for example, when a momentary stoppage occurs). Set in the built-in RTC 4140aa. Thereafter, when using the calendar information and the time information, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not use the calendar information and the time information of the RTC 4192 but uses the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a can not acquire calendar information and time information from the RTC 4192, the peripheral control MPU 4140 determines that the RTC 4192 has malfunctioned and performs error processing. As the error processing, an operation may be performed by setting a predetermined initial value as calendar information and time information. The initial value may be, for example, “12:00 Saturday, January 1, 2011”.

  Here, in the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the RAM of the peripheral control RAM 4140a to be described later), "special date (for example, date after a predetermined period has passed from the delivery date)" is set in advance. The peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control board 4140) may perform the “special processing” when it is on the “special date and time”. However, even if the current corresponds to the above “special date and time”, when the RTC 4192 fails and the above error processing is performed, the calendar information and the time information are reset to the above initial value, so "Special handling" may not be performed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the peripheral control board 4140), the clerk of the game arcade (pachinko hall, game center, etc.) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed switches the above "special date" to a suitable date. It may have a function that can be performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the RTC control unit 4190 operates even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. In this way, the calendar information and time information output by the RTC control unit 4190 can be made accurate. Even if the built-in RTC 4140aa loses calendar information and time information by powering off the pachinko machine 1, calendar information and time information output from the RTC control unit 4190 are newly set when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Ru. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can perform control based on accurate calendar information and time information without inquiring of the RTC 4192 each time.

  In the present embodiment, although the RTC control unit 4190 is provided on the peripheral control substrate 4140, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTC control unit 4190 may be provided on another substrate (for example, a lamp driving substrate 3167). It is also good. In addition, the RTC control unit 4190 may have a GPS update unit that periodically acquires current calendar information and time information from GPS satellites in order to set the current calendar information and time information as accurate information. .

<RAM backup power supply function>
As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the backup power supply function of the RAM (peripheral control RAM) will be described using the peripheral control MPU 4140a. In peripheral control MPU 4140a of FIG. 221 (b), configurations other than the functional blocks described below are omitted. The peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. 221 (b), includes a capacitor BC2, a diode SD0, and a RAM (peripheral control RAM) as storage means, in addition to the CPU (peripheral control CPU) as arithmetic means. Have.

  The RAM (peripheral control RAM) is a memory for storing information which is desired to be retained without disappearing even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 (power supply substrate) is turned off. The anode terminal side of the diode SD0 is connected to the +5.25 V creation circuit of the power supply substrate, and a voltage of +5.25 V can be applied. The cathode terminal side of the diode SD0 is connected to the RAM and the capacitor BC2.

  The capacitor BC2 is an electric double layer capacitor and functions as a backup power supply of a RAM (peripheral control RAM). In the capacitor BC2, the negative terminal is grounded and grounded, while the positive terminal is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. The power from the +5.25 V generation circuit is supplied to the RAM (peripheral control RAM) and to the capacitor BC2. Thereby, capacitor BC2 is charged. Therefore, when the power from the +5.25 V generation circuit is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140, the charge stored in the capacitor BC2 is supplied to the RAM (peripheral control RAM), and the memory of the RAM (peripheral control RAM) is stored. Content is retained. In this case, the diode SD0 can prevent the charge from being supplied from the capacitor BC2 to the power supply substrate side.

  The CPU (peripheral control CPU) turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 by appropriately storing information in the RAM that it wants to hold without losing even if the pachinko machine 1 (power supply board) is turned off. When the power is turned on again, continuous control can be performed using the information stored in the RAM (peripheral control RAM) before the power is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the diode SD0, the capacitor BC2, and the RAM (peripheral control RAM) are provided on the peripheral control substrate 4140. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if provided on the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 Good. The RAM (peripheral control RAM) may be shared by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150.

[3-4. Liquid Crystal Control Substrate]
Next, a liquid crystal control substrate 4500 for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 in the peripheral substrate 4010 is, as shown in the figure, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands and various data Liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing data, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 described above, and various screens displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 A character ROM 4150 d for storing data, and a character RAM 4150 e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port and the like, and receives the display command described above from the peripheral control board 4140, although the detailed description will be described later. Then, the VDP 4150 c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, nonresident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, etc. I remember. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constructed by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in character ROM 4150 d to a non-resident area described later of character RAM 4150 e in time series. . In the nonresident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the nonresident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 as the schedule data progresses. There is.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, it extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the first screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the head screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data to be described later from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the data on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this "line buffer method", drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is held in a line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is This is a method of outputting to the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a great deal of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It becomes. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state. Here, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated in the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, data for drawing the respective persons is called "sprite". Accordingly, in the case where a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. These sprites are set in the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 in which the positions arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap are set. Is displayed. The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays the pixels in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right of the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is driven by a main scan that sets a state, and a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction intersecting with the one direction. When the liquid crystal display device 1400 receives drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control substrate 4500, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315 selects the liquid crystal display device 1400 as main scanning based on the drawing data for one line. Output to the pixels of one line sequentially from the left to the right. Then, when the output for one line is completed, it shifts to the line immediately below as the sub scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the liquid crystal display as the main scan based on the drawing data for the next line. The signals are sequentially output to pixels for one line sequentially from left to right of the device 1400.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 incorporates a backlight (cold cathode tube) which is lit by the inverter substrate 3017a.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming balls are supplied onto the guiding member 3131 in the lower accessory unit 3003 before the distribution effect device 3125 starts to ascend. Therefore, the height for lifting the game balls can be made relatively low, and the game medium supply mechanism 3121 can be miniaturized. In addition, even if the game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131, the rolling of the game ball on the guide member 3131 is restricted until the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the upper stop position, so It is possible to prevent the game balls from being distributed before the game is reached, that is, before the distribution effect device 3125 becomes visible to the player.

  In particular, the rolling surface 3131a of the guiding member 3131 is formed in a substantially arc shape, and the guiding member 3131 is held in a substantially horizontal state until the upper stop position is reached. When the gaming ball is supplied to the moving surface 3131a, the gaming ball can be guided to the central portion in the lateral direction, which is the lowest position in the rolling surface 3131a, and can be stopped at that position. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game balls from deviating from the rolling surface 3131a, that is, the game balls are distributed during the ascent of the distribution effect device 3125.

  In addition, since the game balls are fed from the end side to the guide member 3131, the supply position of the game balls is lower than in the case where the game balls are sent from above the guide member 3131. can do. Note that the guiding member 3131 is provided with a substantially arc-shaped rolling surface 3131 a so that the game ball can be guided to the central position of the guiding member 3131 and braked even when the game ball is sent from the end side it can.

  In addition, the game balls released from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 are guided to the end side of the guide member 3131 through the game ball guide passage 3155, and this game ball guide passage 3155 is a distribution effect device 3125 and Since it moves integrally, the game ball can be smoothly fed in even if the stop position of the distribution effect device 3125 is somewhat displaced.

  Further, since the upper decorative portion 3133 and the lower decorative portion 3137 are provided on the front surface of the distribution effect device 3125, the design of the distribution effect device 3125 can be enhanced. In particular, since the upper decorative portion 3133 and the lower decorative portion 3137 which are hidden and do not appear appear at the time of the distribution effect, it is possible to enhance visual interest and an expectation for the distribution effect.

  In addition, since the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is disposed behind the stage (the shelf upper stage 2372) at the lower stop position and is visible, the image that the guide member 3131 is a part of the stage It is possible to raise the impact on the stage.

  In addition, a left rack 3160 and a right rack 3161 are provided on the left and right sides of the base member 3150 that supports the pseudo shelf 3132 including the guiding member 3131 in a swingable manner. Since the gear 3176 a to which the rotational force is applied is engaged by the motor 3176 and the right motor 3177, when the pair of motors 3176 and 3177 are driven, a force acts to move the rack 3160 and 3161 in the vertical direction. Can be raised and lowered together with the base member 3150. By arranging the elevating means on both the left and right sides of the distribution effect device 3125 in this way, the distribution effect device 3125 can be smoothly moved, and a space for moving (for example, swinging) the pseudo shelf 3132 It will be possible to secure

  Furthermore, in the gaming medium supply mechanism 3121, the gaming ball entered from the lower side (inflow port 3187) of the cylindrical guiding portion 3183 is raised by the screw 3190 by rotating the screw 3190 in a fixed direction, It can be released from the upper side (outlet 3185) of the portion 3183. Thus, since the gaming ball is transported by the screw 3190, the gaming ball can be lifted with a relatively simple configuration, and the game is performed at a predetermined position in the cylindrical guiding portion 3183 even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine The balls can be stored.

  Although the preferred embodiments have been described above, the embodiments are susceptible to various improvements and design changes.

  For example, although the game ball is distributed to the first inlet 3153a and the second inlet 3154a in the above embodiment, it may be distributed to more inlets.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when raising the distribution effect device 3125 from the lower stop position to the upper stop position, the rolling member of the gaming ball is restricted by maintaining the induction member 3131 in the horizontal state. The rolling may be regulated by repeatedly and repeatedly swinging the guiding member 3131 in a predetermined rotation range.

[3-5. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 234. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing an example of processing upon power failure. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the starting hole winning process. FIG. 227 is a flowchart of the change start process. FIG. 228 is a flowchart of an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process during variation.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment). FIG. 234 is an explanatory view showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

[About main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 222, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is it a set value at the time of a power failure) or not. For example, it executes processing (return processing at power failure) to return to the state at the time of power failure according to the backup data stored in RAM, clears the RAM if backup data is abnormal, and performs device setting around CPU (normal initialization , Setting of interrupt timing, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current gaming state is stored as backup data in the RAM. Further, if the RAM clear switch 624a instructing to clear the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is turned on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed.

  Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to a transmittable state on the peripheral control board 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also executed. The power on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is stored again. When the supply is started, the power-on process is performed.

  When the power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each game process. At the start of the loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure advance signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used by the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply substrate. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply substrate. It is supplied to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply substrate falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate to the main control substrate 4100 is stopped. Will be sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power failure notification signal in step S2, the power off occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

  In the power-off process, when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power substrate after power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in a state before power failure. In order to start from the above, the state at the time of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the process contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power-off process is not an interrupt process but a branch process executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the detection of the power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random numbers updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[About power off process]
Next, as shown in FIG. 223, the power-off occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure advance signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM before the power failure is held at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a specified value indicating that the processing upon power failure has been performed (step S4c). When the above process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop power supply. It should be noted that in this process, in the case where the process at the time of a power failure has been started by the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, there is a possibility that it can not return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally, but the processing upon power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the power failure occurs, processing is initiated by a momentary power failure, and even if an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 while the main process is being executed, as shown in FIG. After executing the register save process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the process from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number updating process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command instructing payout of a game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In addition, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is varied based on the progressing state of the game, and the ordinary motorized part (that is, the wing 2337 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2002 by the starting opening solenoid 2344) is controlled. , The process of changing the open / close state of the second start port 2002 is executed. In the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variably displayed by the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 based on the progress of the game. A special motorized part (that is, an opening and closing member 2006 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2003 by the attachment solenoid 2016) is controlled to execute processing for changing the opening and closing state of the special winning opening 2003.

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the gaming state to the outside (for example, a management computer etc.) of the pachinko machine 1, a drive signal is output to a special view start storage indicator (not shown) To perform the process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting a rendering command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. Also, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power on command set in the power on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processes from step S11 to step S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process is ended.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used for the determination (whether it is the jackpot determination or the jackpot lottery) whether to generate the jackpot gaming state or not, the jackpot gaming state in the jackpot judgment A big hit symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol of a special symbol (a symbol associated with a big hit type (such as a probability variation big hit or the number of rounds)) when determined to be generated, by a big hit lottery Reach judgment random number used for judgment (reach judgment) as to whether or not to perform high expectation production such as reach production when it is judged that neither big hit nor small hit (loss) is judged, special symbol indicator 641, Variable display pattern random number used for determining the variable display pattern (such as the fluctuation time) of the special symbol displayed on the 642 ) Average per determining random number used for determining whether to control the blade 2337 in an open state to open and close the second start hole 2002 (ordinary lottery per determination), and the like.

  As will be described later, the jackpot judging random number according to this embodiment is also used for judgment as to whether or not a specific condition to be performed when it is judged that the jackpot has been dropped (lost) in the jackpot. Be done. In addition, the jackpot symbol random number is the type of jackpot that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot was won (whether or not to operate the probability variation function or time saving function, the jackpot in the jackpot game (special bonus game) It is also used for the judgment concerning the type of jackpot of which the release mode of 2003 etc. is decided.

  Of these random numbers, in random number update processing 1, the random number for the big hit judgment related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the random number for the big hit symbol, and the normal random number for judgment per symbol related to whether or not to control the wing 2337 open. Make an update. That is, the random number used to determine the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and whether or not to control the wing 2337 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing this, the probability in a predetermined period with each random number (probability of determining that a big hit gaming state is to be generated, and probability of determining that the wing 2337 is controlled to be open) can be made constant. Can be prevented from becoming an adverse condition. On the other hand, in the random number updating process 2, the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the reach determination random number regardless of the regular lottery, and the variable display pattern random number and the like are updated.

[About special control processing]
Next, special control processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

  In the special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first and second starting hole winning processes, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the first starting hole 2001 and the second starting hole 2002, for example. Then, after the first and second starting-opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the processing flag is selectively selected among the plurality of processes (step S120 to step S230) shown in the figure. Will do.

  More specifically, when the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110) is finished, it is first determined whether the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ((0) YES in step S120) and the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), after the setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol and the like are performed based on the result of the big hit lottery, the processing flag is updated to "1".

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the process flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator 642 (the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator After the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) is started in any of 642 and the variation time from the display to the stop is determined, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the processing during variation (step S180) is executed. In this fluctuation process, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 special Stop the fluctuation display of the symbol. After that, when it is determined that the big hit has been won in the change start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, the processing selection flag is updated to "4" when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied (the small hit has been won) although the big hit has been lost. However, the process selection flag is updated to “0” when the jackpot is missed and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss). That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game start processing (step S200) is executed. In this big hit game start processing, the type of the big hit is determined, and after the opening mode (number of rounds, opening time, number of times the game balls are limited, etc.) is set according to the type, the processing flag Updated to "5". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S210), small hit game start processing (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game start process, the processing flag is “6” after the opening mode (the number of opening times and opening time for controlling the opening operation of the open / close member 2006, etc.) in the big winning opening 2003 according to the small hit is set. Will be updated to

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the big hit game processing (step S240) is executed. In this big hit game process, the open / close operation on the open / close member 2006 is controlled based on the open mode in the big winning opening 2003 set in the big hit game start process (step S200). In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after it is determined whether to operate the probability variation function or the time saving function. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the small hitting game processing (step S250) is executed, assuming that the processing flag is 6. In the small hit game process (step S250), the open / close operation on the open / close member 2006 is controlled based on the open mode in the big winning opening 2003 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). In addition, when the small hitting game processing ends, the processing flag is updated to “0”, that is, in this case, in the next interruption processing, the variation start processing (step S130) is performed again.

  Thus, when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process Is terminated.

[About the first and second starting opening winning process]
Next, the first and second starting opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described based on FIG. FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing an example of the first and second starting hole winning process.

  In the first and second starting hole winning process (step S110), the process mainly relates to the determination of whether or not the game ball is won in the first starting hole 2001 and the second starting hole 2002, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there has been a process of updating the holding status of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from second start port sensor 2349. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 2349, it is determined that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2002 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second hold provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) A determination is made as to whether the value of the number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbols) obtained by the game ball winning in the second start port 2002 as the second start pending storage process (step S203). The random numbers and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S204).

  In the processing of step 203, a winning notice command is set to indicate that the game ball has been won in the second starting opening 2002 (more precisely, the kind of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.), and thus The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like displays a hold display on the second start port 2002 side through control by the peripheral control substrate 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2349 is not output in the process of step S201, or the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value in the process of step S202. If it is determined that the value is 4 then, in step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 2011. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 2011, it is determined that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2001 (YES in step S205). The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first big hit lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit A determination is made as to whether the value is less than four. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) acquired by the game ball having won the first start opening 2001 as the first start pending storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S208).

  Also in the processing of step 207, a winning notice command indicating that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2001 (more precisely, the kind of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.) The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, even when the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like displays a hold display on the first start port 2001 side through control by the peripheral control substrate 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2001, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that 4 has been reached, the first and second starting opening winning processes are ended at this time.

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) to the second starting port 2002 is performed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) to the first starting port 2001 is performed There is. However, instead of this, after the winning process on the first starting port 2001 is performed, the winning process on the second starting port 2002 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute an advance determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may transmit a command indicating the result of the advance determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a prize notification command. The precedent determination process is performed prior to a lottery using random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of a big hit lottery, a definite change lottery, a small hit lottery, a variable display pattern described later), It is a process to determine. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the precedent determination processing, the lottery result when the lottery using the random number is performed by comparing the random number with the prior determination table (big hit or small hit, type of big hit, variation display pattern, etc. Thus, the determination performed prior to the lottery is also referred to as "pre-reading determination". The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before a lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is “preread”. Also referred to as

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notice command representing the result of the prior determination processing only when the gaming state satisfies the specific condition, and when the specific condition is not met, the main determination MPU A prize notification command that does not represent the result may be sent. For example, when the variable display resulting from the winning of the first starting port 2001 is suspended without being started immediately after the winning, the main control MPU 4100a selects a winning notification command representing the result of the preceding determination process regarding the winning. It may be sent. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the time saving game state, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command not representing the result of the preceding determination processing without transmitting a winning notification command representing the result of the preceding determination processing. You may The specific conditions for the second starting port 2002 may be similar.

[About change start process]
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart of an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is "0", the main control MPU 4100a first determines the values of the two pending number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 641 and 642 (first start memory It is determined whether the number and the second start memory number) are both "0" (step S301). Here, the values in the two suspension number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 641 and 642 indicate the storage areas (the special symbol random number storage means 4515, 4532 (see FIG. 234) concerning the first start storage and the second start storage. It shows the number of random numbers stored in). Therefore, if the value of the number-of-holds counter is "0" at this step S301 (YES), it is determined that neither the first jackpot lottery nor the second jackpot lottery start condition is satisfied, and the next step As the process of S318, the variation start process is ended when the process flag is updated to "1".

  On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), the special symbol is used to update the order of execution of the big hit lottery held on hold. The shift process is performed in the random number storage means 451, 4532 (steps S302 to S310).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), Those storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the first starting memory numbers (“1” to “4”). Also, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532 a to storage area [4] 4532 d), The storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the second start storage numbers (“1” to “4”). In each storage area 4515a to 4515d, 4532a to 4532d, a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 for storing a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a fluctuation display pattern random number, etc. are stored. A big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 is provided.

  That is, when the special symbol changes, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 4532 as shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area. However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit is won in the first special symbol side lottery process and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol side lottery process Although there is no difference in the expected value of the benefit (such as the number of winning balls obtainable) to the player in the first special symbol side lottery process, the hit (small hit) without operating the conditional device While there may be a win, in the second special symbol side lottery process, the probability of winning in a small hit is "0%", by which only the second special symbol side lottery process is executed As long as it is done, a small hit game state is not generated.

  In this point, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the first special symbol lottery execution is always postponed, and the hit (small hit) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device is not won. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated so that all the drawing based on the winning on the second starting opening 2002 (the drawing of the second special symbol) are firstly settled. By this, until the number of reservations required for the second special symbol side lottery is interrupted and becomes “0”, only the game under which the small hit is not won (the second special symbol side lottery) is sequentially performed Will be able to In addition, although this will be described later, in the gaming state where the so-called time saving function is activated, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol which is to be digested first is not interrupted. Since control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the game balls to the second start port 2002, which is an opportunity to execute the game, to be in an easy-to-use state, continuous execution of only the second special symbol side lottery (variation) As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 227 and 234, during the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested as the process of step S302 A random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter (second start storage number) corresponding to the display 642 is "0". To determine if As a result, when it is judged that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second storage area from the storage area [1] 4532a The random number regarding the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random number read in this way (random number for big hit judgment, big hit symbol random number, reach judgment random number, fluctuation display pattern random number) Processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, processing for setting the opening / closing member 2006, etc. The second starting game can be advanced with the ball winning.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 4532b to storage areas to update the digestion order for the second special symbol-side lottery (variation). [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532 d) are shifted to the (n-1) -th storage area (storage area [1] 4532 a to storage area [3] 4532 c) (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4532 d becomes vacant, and new start information (pending) on the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532 d.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" to indicate that the second special symbol side game (the second starting game) is in a progressing state (step S305). ). Furthermore, the pending number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by “1” in order to update the pending number for the second special symbol side lottery (variation) (step S306). At this time, drive control for lighting the lamp 644 so that the number of reservations for the second special symbol side lottery (variation) updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol memory display 644 Is done. The special symbol variation flag thus set to "1" is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0", for example, after the variation start process is completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 227 and 234, in the process of step S302, it is determined that the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (YES in step S302), the random number relating to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 and acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way, the process concerning the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the process concerning the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, the setting of the game state As a result of being provided to such processing, etc., the first start game can be advanced, which is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area to update the digesting order of the first special symbol side lottery (variation) [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515 d) are shifted to the (n-1) -th storage area (storage area [1] 4515 a to storage area [3] 4515 c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515 d is freed, and new storage information (pending) of the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515 d.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag so that it is shown that the game on the first special symbol side (the first starting game) is in progress (step S309) ). Furthermore, the pending number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by “1” to update the pending number for the first special symbol side lottery (variation) (step S310). At this time, drive control for lighting the lamp 643 so that the number of reservations for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol memory display 643. Is done. In addition, similarly, for the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way, after the variation start processing is completed, for example, the special symbol variation flag is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0".

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether it is a probability variation state with high probability (step S312), and if it is not a probability variation state (NO in step S312) Of the big hit judgment table, that is, the table in which the probability of becoming a big hit is set low, while in the case of a probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability fluctuation operation, ie, a probability of becoming a big hit Select the table set high. In this example, the probability of becoming a big hit is set to 1/400 when probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal time), and the probability of becoming a big hit is 10 when probability fluctuation is activated (that is, high probability). It is set to / 400.

  After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the jackpot determination random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a random number (big hit value) corresponding to (step S315 (big hit lottery)). Then, if it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the type of big hit is determined based on the big hit symbol random number for any special symbol similarly acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the type of the big hit is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  On the other hand, if the obtained random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether the random number is a random number (small hit value) corresponding to a small hit (step S319). If the value is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S320) on the assumption that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (step S320), and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if the value is not a small hit value (NO in step S319), it is determined that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318 without passing through step S320. In step S318, the process flag is updated to "1", and the variation start process is ended. In this example, the probability of being a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which lottery the first special symbol and the second special symbol are, random numbers generated as random symbols for big hit symbols, for example, random numbers from 0 to 99 A numerical value is prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random numbers is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number. Then, the acquired random number value is to be subjected to the processing of determining the type of the big hit in the process of step S316, and for example, if the same random number value is 0 to 52, it is determined as a big hit A. If it is 53 to 57, it is determined to be a big hit B. If it is 58 to 63, it is determined to be a big hit C. If it is 64 to 81, it is determined to be a big hit D. If it is 82 to 99, it is determined to be a big hit E .

  According to such a determination method, as shown in FIG. 236, the probability that the type of the big hit (hit with the operation of the condition device) is determined to be "big hit A" is "53%", and the type of the big hit The probability of being judged "big hit B" is "5%", the probability that the kind of big hit is judged "big hit C" is "6%", the kind of big hit is "big hit D", "big hit The probability of being judged as E is “18%” respectively.

  Here, when the "big hit A" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of being selected, after the big hit game is played according to the winning of the big hit A, probability change function and time saving function (open The extension function is controlled to the certainty external advantage game state in which all of them operate. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit A, a long open game in which opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2006 is repeated many times (16 times in this embodiment) in a long opening and closing pattern is performed. In the long-time open / close pattern, a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the open / close member 2006 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10 pieces) When any of the conditions for the game ball of the game winning in the special winning opening 2003 is satisfied, the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state. In this long time opening and closing pattern, the time when the opening and closing member 2006 is in the open state is longer than the time when the opening and closing member 2006 is in the opening state in the short time opening and closing pattern described later. That is, in the long open winning game, a player can substantially obtain a large number of prize balls (about 1750 in the present embodiment) as a bonus.

  On the other hand, even when the "big hit B" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of being selected, after the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit B is played, probability change function and time saving function ( The open extension function is controlled to the certainty external advantage gaming state in which both are activated. However, in the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit B, opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2006 is performed as an open hit game while repeating several times in the long opening and closing pattern (in the present embodiment, nine times) . That is, in the middle open game, the player is substantially able to obtain a medium amount of prize balls (about 1000 in the present embodiment) as a bonus.

  On the other hand, when "big hit C" is won, the big hit game corresponding to the hit of the big hit C is selected only when the gaming state at the time of being selected is "external advantageous gaming state in which time saving function is activated". After being performed, the probability variation function and the time reduction function (open extension function) are both controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state in which they operate. However, when the game state when the corresponding is selected is not "the external advantage game state that the time saving function is activated", after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open extension Among the functions), it is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probable external turning disadvantage gaming state) in which only the probability variation function operates. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit C, the open / close member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned middle open game in which the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times in the long opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment).

  On the other hand, when the "big hit D" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of being selected, after the big hit game is played according to the winning of the big hit D, probability change function and time saving function (open Of the extension functions), only the probability fluctuation function is controlled to the high probability gaming state (probable external disadvantage gaming state). In the big hit game according to the big hit D, the open / close member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned middle open game in which the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times in the long opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment).

  On the other hand, when the "big hit E" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of being selected, after the big hit game is played according to the winning of the big hit E, probability change function and time saving function (open extension It is controlled to a normal gaming state (usually an external adverse gaming state) in which none of the functions) operate. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit E, the open / close member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned middle open game in which the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times in the long opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment).

  Incidentally, when a small hit (a hit without operating the condition device) is won for such a big hit A to E (a hit with operation of the condition device), the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is opened for a short time Only a small opening game (small hit game) repeated only a few times in the pattern (in the present embodiment, twice) is performed, and the same game is performed before the small opening game (small hit game) is performed. There will be no difference in gaming status later. In the short time opening and closing pattern, a predetermined small time (for example, 3 seconds to 6 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined small number (for example, 2 pieces) of games have been made after the opening and closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state. This is a pattern for returning the opening / closing member 2006 to the closed state when the ball fulfills any condition of winning in the special winning opening 2003. That is, in the small opening game (small hit game), the opening and closing member 2006 operates because only a small number of winning balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a bonus. Nevertheless, it can be said that the handling (positioning) on the game design needs attention in that the game interest may decline.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, "big hit A" to "big hit E" are prepared as the types of hits (big hits) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. Therefore, to describe the process of step S317 in more detail, the big hit flag A is turned ON (set) when the big hit type is "big hit A", and the big hit flag B is turned ON ("big hit B"). If the "big hit C", the big hit flag C is turned ON (set), if it is "big hit D", the big hit flag D is turned ON (set), and if "big hit E", the big hit flag E is It will be in the ON state (set).

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, a variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) and the like will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart of an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 228, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is "1", the main control MPU 4100a first sets the big hit flag "ON" as the process of step S401. It is determined whether or not As a result, when it is determined that the big hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), a big hit variation pattern table setting process described later is performed to set a variation pattern when winning a big hit. The operation is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the big hit flag is not "ON", it is next determined whether the small hit flag is "ON" as the process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S403), the small hit is won because it is determined that the specific condition of the lost one is satisfied. A small hit variation pattern table setting process described later is performed in order to set the variation pattern at the time (step S404).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not "ON", next, the process of step S405 is a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect etc.) with high expectation of winning to the big hit. Decide if you should do In the process of step S405, for example, it is determined that the high expectation effect is to be performed when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) is a predetermined hit value, and the acquired reach When the determination random number is not the predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is not performed. As a result, when it is determined that high expectation production should be performed (YES in step S405), high expectation loss change pattern table setting processing described later is performed to set a fluctuation pattern when high expectation production is performed. The operation is performed (step S406).

  In addition, about the number of the predetermined hit value prepared for the random number for reach determination, usually the external disadvantaged gaming state (probability change function, time saving function is inactive at all), the normal external advantageous gaming state (time saving function operates only) The odd change external disadvantageous game state (only the odd change function is activated), and the odd change external advantage game state (any of the odd change function and the time saving function is activated) may be different from each other. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantage gaming state, the probability that it is determined that high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value. It has become "1/12", but in the normal external advantageous gaming state and the probability variation external advantageous gaming state, the expectation at the time of reach can be enhanced more (or, so that efficient reserve digestion is performed) It may be determined that high expectation presentation should be performed with a lower probability. Also, conversely, in the probability variation external disadvantage gaming state, in order to be able to be made to be more likely to be aware of the possibility of being a big hit, so that it is judged that high expectation presentation should be performed with a higher probability It is also good.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S405, if it is determined that high expectation performance with high expectation of winning to a big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the lost fluctuation pattern when high expectation performance is not performed. In order to set (normal loss variation pattern), low expected loss variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S407).

  Here, the table set in the low expectation loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in a form corresponding to each of a plurality of gaming states, for example, in the normal gaming state, the number of reservations is a predetermined value When it is above, shortening variation is performed.

  However, in the gaming state where the time saving function is activated, the fluctuation time is set so that the number of reservations for the second special symbol side lottery (variation) in which the probability of winning in small hits is “0” is difficult to interrupt It is set. More specifically, when the number of reservations on the second special symbol side is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the shortening variation is not adopted despite the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, and the shortening variation is adopted in the normal gaming state Only the fluctuation time (a fluctuation time longer than the shortening fluctuation in the normal gaming state) having a length equal to or more than the fluctuation time when not being selected is selected. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol side does not adopt shortening fluctuation regardless of the number of reservations, only fluctuation time having a length equal to or more than fluctuation time when shortening fluctuation is not adopted in normal gaming state Is to be selected. As a result, when in the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, it is suppressed that the suspension of the first special symbol side where the small hit can be won is digested, and thus the small pachinko machine 1 is hit with the small hit. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the player is loaded.

  And, although it will be described later, as shown in FIG. 228, when the selection table according to the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of any of step S402, step S404, step S406 and step S407, the main control MPU 4100a Next, in the process of step S410, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the set selection table. Next, as the process of step S411, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as the effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) or the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a command to indicate the winning category, including a hit or a small hit).

  Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined above is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When the special view LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variable display of the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 642 is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended.

  By the way, the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224 as a rendering command set in the process of step S411. . As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the win information command through control described later by the peripheral control substrate 4140 side. As such, the display effect will be performed.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set as described above when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) without operation of the condition device. It extends to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display concerning the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern ( After extending the rendering time), it can be executed so as to indicate that it has been dropped in the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device (extended rendering pattern in FIG. 245 (b)). That is, in this case, after the stop of the special symbol, when the small opening is executed, the display effect such as winning the winning balls is not shown, but it is shown that it is a big hit and it is relatively early after the show It will be possible to shift to fluctuation (reserve digestion of special symbols), and extension will also be suitably avoided while there may be some expectation as an effect until the above-mentioned opening / closing member 2006 operates. .

  Moreover, although this is also mentioned later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect (extension loss effect) at the time of the above-mentioned small hit shown to be a big hit after stopping the special symbol is special A display effect (extended jackpot effect) is also provided that indicates that the jackpot has been won after stopping the symbol. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) involving the operation of the condition device, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated within the variation time of the set variation pattern, and the first special After being extended to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display concerning the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, win by the hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device It is designed to be implemented as shown (an extension effect pattern of FIG. 245 (b)).

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned display effect at the time of a small hit will be positioned as a mere loss effect (high expected loss fluctuation pattern) appearing at the time of a big hit. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and as a result, the game is entertained by the opening and closing member 2006 operating in response to the win of the small hit. Can be controlled.

  However, as the function display unit 640 of the pachinko machine 1, instead of the form shown in FIG. 87 (7-segment LED), a form (eight LED groups not forming a specific symbol) as shown in FIG. You may do so. In this example, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol storage indicator 643 and the second special symbol storage indicator 644 are each configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol storage indicator 646 is configured by two LEDs.

  In addition to the same function and effect as described above, the function display unit 640 can also be configured to include the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 with eight LEDs that do not have any symbols. Because of this, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player, as compared with the case of using the 7-segment LED having the meaning by the number symbol. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 640 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 640 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, and the movement of the game ball The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

  And, when the function display unit 640 shown in FIG. 235 is adopted, with regard to the lighting mode (during stop of special symbol) of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the small hit, the plurality of LEDs at the time of winning the big hit It is desirable to control to appear as an approximation aspect, such as being different only in whether or not one LED is lit from the lighting mode (at the time of stopping the special symbol) of (special symbol). That is, in this case, when the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol, it is immediately apparent which result (even after the effect extension) even if looking at the same symbol (a plurality of LEDs) It will be difficult to grasp) until a short time until a fall is clearly stated. Therefore, the extension to the period after the stop of the special symbol is extended by the fact that the interest for the special symbol (multiple LEDs) is reduced as well as being able to concentrate on the extended display effect (extension effect). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the displayed effect has been made. As a result, it is suppressed that the small hit is assumed to be mounted on the pachinko machine 1 by the speciality when the extension effect appears, and accordingly, according to the small hit winning. It is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest caused by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006.

[About the fluctuation pattern decision processing at the time of big hit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 237 is a chart showing an example of the normal big hit variation pattern table T1, the normal small hit variation pattern table T2, and the normal high expectation loss variation pattern table T3. In the same column of the same figure 237, ○ means big hit, △ means establishment of specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), × means failure of specific condition at loss (pure loss) means.

  As described above, if it is determined that the big hit flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 228), the main control MPU 4100a is won the big hit as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 228). In order to set the fluctuation pattern when the game is in progress, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process is performed.

  In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, first, usually the external disadvantage gaming state (probability change function, time saving function is non-operation), the normal external advantage gaming state (time reducing function only operation), the probability variation external disadvantage playing state (probability change function only It is determined which of the game states of "operation" and "probability change external advantage game state" ("probability change function" and "time reduction function are all operated"). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different big hit fluctuation pattern tables (not shown) are prepared separately for each gaming state, and normally the external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability change function and the time saving function are non When it is determined that the operation is in operation, the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 237 is selected regardless of the type of jackpot.

  Then, as described above, when the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a is acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) with reference to the selected table T1. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, if it is assumed that values from "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, the values from "0" to "99" Among them, nine specific values are assigned to variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selectivity at big hit 9%), and 20 particular values are assigned to variation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (Selectivity 20% at big hit) and 30 specific values are assigned to change number 9 (change time Tc1) (selectivity 30% at big hit) and 40 specific values are It is assigned to variation number 12 (variation time Td1) (selectivity at big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to variation number 15 (variation time Te) (selectivity 1 at big hit) %). As described above, with the exception of the variation number 15 of the jackpot determination, as the variation number increases, the number to which a specific value (big hit value) is allocated tends to increase.

  Although it will be described later, when the change number 1 (the change time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the jackpot has been won while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. To be displayed, and when variation number 5 (variation time Tb1) is selected, the jackpot is won on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the presentation "b (or b ')" appearing Is displayed and when the change number 9 (the change time Tc1) is selected, the jackpot is won on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the effect content “c (or c ′)” appears. When a display effect is displayed and the change number 12 (the change time Td1) is selected, the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the jackpot has been won is performed and the change number 15 (the change time Te1) is selected, the effect content “e” appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect is displayed indicating that the jackpot has been won. By the way, the effect content a, the effect content a ', the effect content b, the effect content b', the effect content c, the effect content c ', the effect content d, the effect content d' and the effect content e Different types of display effects that appear (for example, types of reach effects and types of story effects).

  Although this will be described later, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. Also, the fluctuation time Td1 is longer, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

  Then, as described above, in such a normal big hit variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). The effect command associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the command “01H” in the case of the fluctuation number 1) and the winning information command (including winnings and small hits depending on the winning type) And the command shown) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time Ta1 if fluctuation number 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is turned ON. The setting is made (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that it is another gaming state different from the normal external disadvantage gaming state, select the big hit variation pattern table corresponding to the determined gaming state Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands according to the determined variation pattern are set, but this description will be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, whether the big hit was won by the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side or the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side We decided to select the big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 at normal time regardless of, but when the first special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed and when the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed The display effects of different contents may be made to appear by selecting the big hit fluctuation pattern table made different contents.

  In addition, when it is determined that the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (provisional change function, time saving function is non-operational), the big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 237 is selected regardless of the type of the big hit. However, based on the state of the jackpot flag according to the type of jackpot, any of the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern tables prepared for each jackpot type may be selectively used.

  That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make the selectivity of the variation pattern different according to the type of the big hit, and when a particular variation pattern appears, it is possible to give bias such as increasing the probability of being a big hit of a particular type It will be. Also, even if the fluctuation time is the same, the fluctuation number (rendering command) can be changed according to the type of the big hit, and in this case, the fluctuation pattern is originally obtained only by confirming the rendering command. , Will be able to grasp the type of the big hit. Therefore, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 can be improved if the peripheral control board 4140 side compares the effect command and the winning information command to determine the appropriateness thereof. Will be able to

[About the variation pattern determination process at the time of small hit]
Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described based on FIG. 237.

  As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 228), the main control MPU 4100a performs the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 228). A small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed to set a variation pattern when winning.

  In this small hitting variation pattern table setting process, first, usually the external disadvantage gaming state (probability change function, time saving function is non-operation), the normal external advantage gaming state (time reducing function only operation), the probability variation external disadvantage playing state (probability function It is determined which of the two game states: only operation), and the probability change external advantageous game state (the probability change function and the time saving function are all activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, small hit variation pattern tables (not shown) different for each gaming state are prepared, and normally the external disadvantaged gaming state (probability changing function, time saving function are both available) When it is determined that there is a non-operation), the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 237 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the small hitting variation pattern table T2 at the normal time is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a acquires it in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) while referring to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the selected variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the small hitting variation pattern table T2 at the normal time, the values from "0" to "99" Among the values, 35 specific values are allocated to fluctuation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selectivity 35% at small hit), and 30 specific values are fluctuation number 6 (variation time Tb2) Of 30 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (20% selectivity for small hit), and A specific value is assigned to variation number 13 (variation time Td2) (5% selectivity for small hit). In this way, as the change number becomes larger, the allocated number of specific values (small hit values) tends to decrease.

  Although it will be described later, when variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, a display showing the result of the jackpot lottery while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears on liquid crystal display device 1400 When the effect is performed, and the change number 6 (the change time Tb2) is selected, the display showing the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content "b (or b ')" appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 When the effect is performed, and the change number 10 (the change time Tc2) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays the result of the jackpot lottery while the effect content "c (or c ')" appears. When the effect is performed, and the change number 13 (the change time Td2) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 makes a large hit while the effect content "d (or d ')" appears. Display performance the result of the lottery is shown is carried out. Incidentally, as such a display effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is shown, for example, it moves to the game state where it is possible to obtain the prize ball by the display effect in which it is shown that it was dropped by the big hit and the operation of the opening and closing member 2006 A display effect (a display effect that appears even when a big hit is shown) or the like to be shown is appropriately adopted.

  Also, although this will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When time Ta1 (variation number 1) or fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result is obtained as a big hit lottery, with presentation content "a (or a ')" appearing. A pairing rendition of what was done appears. In addition, the fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (the same or similar time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Tb1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation time When the number 6) is selected, the effect contents "b (or b ')" appear in all cases, and a pair effect concerning what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears. In addition, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a time (identical or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Tc1 as a reference, and fluctuation time Tc1 (variation number 9), fluctuation time Tc2 (variation time When the number 10) is selected, a pair effect of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears while the effect content "c (or c ')" appears. In addition, the fluctuation time Td2 is set as a time (the same or similar time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Td1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Td1 (variation number 12) or the fluctuation time Td2 (variation time When the number 13) is selected, the effect contents "d (or d ')" appear, and a pair effect of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

  Then, as described above, in such a small hitting variation pattern table T2 at such a normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). The effect command associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the command “02H” in the case of the fluctuation number 2) and the winning information Are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time Ta2 for fluctuation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is turned ON. The setting is made (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that in the small hitting variation pattern table setting process, it is determined that it is another gaming state different from the normal external disadvantage gaming state, the small hitting variation pattern table corresponding to the determined gaming state Is selected, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this explanation will be omitted. However, when a small hit is won in the gaming state (external advantageous gaming state) in which the time saving function is activated, a single variation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) without giving a sense of expectation It is desirable to make it the same display process as the low expectation effect at the time).

[About fluctuation pattern determination processing at the time of high expectation production]
Next, fluctuation pattern determination processing at the time of high expectation presentation is described based on FIG. 237.

  As described above, if it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 228), the main control MPU 4100a determines the high expectation as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 228). In order to set a variation pattern when performing an effect, high expectation loss variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S406).

  Also in this high expectation error variation pattern table setting process, first, usually the external disadvantage game state (probability change function, time saving function is non-operation), the normal external advantage game state (time reducing function only operation), the probability change external disadvantage playing state ( It is determined whether the game mode is in the probability change function only) and the probability change external advantageous game state (the probability change function and the time saving function are all activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different high expectation loss variation pattern tables (not shown) are prepared for each gaming state, and normally the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function, time saving function will be either Also, when it is determined that there is a non-operation), the normal high expectation loss change pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 237 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal high expectation error fluctuation pattern table T3 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T3 and performs the process of step S303 (refer to FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the acquired variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the high expectation loss change pattern table T3 at the normal time, these "0" to "99" Among the values of 40, 40 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selectivity 40% at the time of high expectation loss), and 17 specific values are fluctuation number 4 (variation time) It is allocated to Ta 4) (selectivity 17% at high expected loss), and 25 specific values are allocated to fluctuation number 7 (variation time Tb 3) (selectivity 25% at high expected loss) Thirteen specific values are assigned to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at high expectation loss), and three particular values are assigned to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) The selection rate at the time of high expectation loss %), Selectivity of 2% during the two specific values are assigned to the change number 14 (variable time Td3) (High disappointing). As described above, as the variation number increases, the number to which a specific value (loss value) is allocated tends to decrease.

  Although it will be described later, when the variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, it is dropped as a big hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “a, no development (or a ′)” appearing. Is displayed, and when variation number 4 (variation time Ta4) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is rejected as a jackpot under the appearance of the presentation content "a, with development" Is displayed, or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 where display content "c '" appears and it is displayed that the player has been rejected as a big hit, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When the display content “b, no development (or b ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, it is indicated that the jackpot has been dropped. When the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) is selected, a display effect or liquid crystal is displayed indicating that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has been selected as a big hit while the effect content “b, with development” has appeared. When a display effect is shown on the display device 1400 showing that the game content has been dropped as a big hit while the effect content "d '" appears, and the change number 11 (the change time Tc3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 A display effect is shown where it is shown that the jackpot was dropped while the effect content "c (or c ')" appears in the display, and when the change number 14 (the change time Td3) is selected, the liquid crystal display In the apparatus 1400, a display effect is performed which indicates that the jackpot has been dropped while the effect content "d (or d ')" appears. By the way, although it will be described later, in the case of the fluctuation numbers 4 and 8, it appears as a lost effect pattern with different effect contents according to the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side, Since the variation number of the big hit rendering pattern which is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between variation numbers 1 and 5 and variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side Accordingly, it becomes possible to make the presentation pattern different in the jackpot expectation degree appear.

  Also, although this will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When time Ta1 (variation number 1), fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2), fluctuation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is selected, any of the contents of the presentation "a" appears, as a big hit lottery A couple of effects appear as to whether the result was obtained. However, when variation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the effect content “a” is displayed until the opening period before the special winning opening 2003 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 2006. Since such effects may be extended, a fluctuation time Ta4 (fluctuation number 4) longer than fluctuation time Ta3 (fluctuation number 3) is prepared as a loss effect pattern that becomes a pair when such extension effects are performed. ing. The fluctuation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (identical or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Tc3 (variation number 11). Depending on the control on the control substrate 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the fluctuation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As described above, the variation number of the big hit rendering pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 4 of the lost effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

  Furthermore, the fluctuation time Tb3 is set as a time (identical or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Tb1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5), the fluctuation time Tb2 When variation number 6) and variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, a pair effect of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears, with presentation content "b" appearing. However, when variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or variation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content “b” is displayed until the opening period before the big winning opening 2003 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 2006. Since such effects may be extended, a fluctuation time Tb4 (fluctuation number 8) longer than fluctuation time Tb3 (fluctuation number 7) is prepared as a loss effect pattern that becomes a pair when such extension effects are performed. ing. Further, this fluctuation time Tb4 (fluctuation number 8) is also set as a time (identical or approximate time) having a length matched to this with the fluctuation time Td3 (fluctuation number 14) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control substrate 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14). As described above, the variation number of the big hit rendering pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 8 of the lost effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 5 and the variation number 12 as described above.

  Then, as described above, in such a high expectation loss variation pattern table T3 at such a normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). Then, the effect command associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the command "03H" in the case of the fluctuation number 3), and the winning information And a command indicating a species are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time Ta3 for fluctuation number 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is turned ON. The setting is made (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that it is another gaming state different from the normal external disadvantage gaming state, the high expectation variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state A variation pattern is selected based on the selected table, and various commands according to the determined variation pattern are set, but this description will be omitted.

  According to such a big hit variation pattern table T1 at normal time, a small hit variation pattern table T2 at normal time, and a high expectation loss variation pattern table T3 at normal time, the big hit expectation is a display effect b rather than a display effect a The display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the big hit is won, it is determined that the big hit is won when the same effect e appears.

[About processing during fluctuation]
Next, the during-variation process (step S180) executed when the process flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process during variation.

  As shown in FIG. 229, in the process during variation (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first sets the variation time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 228) as the process of step S501. It is determined whether the time is up. If the fluctuation time set in the timer has not timed up (NO in step S501), the fluctuation processing is ended.

  If the fluctuation time set in the timer has timed up (YES in step S501), the special view LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When the special view LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The fluctuation display (the fluctuation of the special symbol) concerning the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 642 is ended. Further, when the display effect for the big hit lottery is performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a determination stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect is to be determined and displayed on the peripheral control board 4140 in order to end this. Is set (step S503). The decision stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the rendering result in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode of the peripheral control board 4140, the display presentation on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated despite the reception of the confirmation stop command, and the opening period thereafter is performed. As described above, control may be performed so as to extend the display effect.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" as it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been fluctuatingly stopped as it is indicated that the jackpot has been won (step S505) , End the processing during the change.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON but is lost due to big hit (NO in step S504), it is then determined as the process of step S506 whether the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to “4” as it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been variably stopped so as to indicate that the small hit is won S507), the processing during the variation ends.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON and it is a pure loss (a specific condition is not satisfied) (NO in step S506), it is indicated that the big hit and the small hit are both selected. The processing flag is updated to “0” (step S508) on the assumption that the symbol is in the processing stage in which the fluctuation is stopped (step S508), and the fluctuation processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is carried out in the step S130 for the reserve digest.

[About the big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start processing (step S200) executed when the processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 230, in the big hit game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first activates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as the processing of step S2602, a function (probability fluctuation function) to increase the winning probability of hitting with a condition device (big hit) than when being in the normal external disadvantage gaming state or the normal external advantageous gaming state is active (probability fluctuation function) It is determined whether or not it is a probability fluctuation state). As a result, when it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S602), it is in the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state, or the probability variation external advantage gaming state, and it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation. The operation is stopped (step S603).

  Then, next, as the processing of step S604, while the operation of the probability variation function is stopped in this way, the function (time saving function) to make the game ball easy to enter the second starting port 2002 is in operation (time saving gaming state) It is determined whether or not If it is not determined in the process of step S602 that the probability variation function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. As a result, when it is determined that the game mode is either the normal external advantageous gaming state or the certainty external advantageous gaming state, and it is determined that the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S604), the operation of the time shortening function is performed. It is stopped (step S605).

  Then, a round game in which the big winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the same big game as the process of step S606 so that the big hit game is performed when the operation of the probability variation function and the time saving function is both stopped in this way Maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times in this embodiment), the upper limit number (predetermined large number) at which gaming balls can enter the big winning opening 2003 in each round game, and each round The open mode in the big hit game is set such as the open / close operation time limit of the open / close member 2006 in game (predetermined long time of open / close pattern). That is, in the process of step S606, first, the type of big hit is determined based on the big hit flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 227). Then, information related to the "opening mode in the big hit game" prepared corresponding to each of the determined big hit types (big hit A to big hit E) thus determined is from the ROM or the like of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) It is read out and the read out information is set. As a result, a big hit game can be made executable with the above-described opening mode according to the type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E). When it is not determined in the process of step S604 that the time saving function is in operation, the process of step S606 is performed without performing the process of step S605.

  After that, prior to the big hit game being performed, the interval effect before the big hit game is performed (for example, the opening effect such as “Congratulations”, the challenge bonus effect such as “the chance to get out!”) Is executed As made possible, a big hit interval rendering command is set in which the time from when the special symbol is stopped to when the special bonus game (big hit game) is started is indicated (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, an effect in which the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to a period after stopping the special symbol (as described above Since the extension effect can be executed, it is prepared as an interval effect command set in this way, based on this. That is, due to the relationship with the time required for the extension effect that also appears at the time of small hit winning, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, eight seconds) is set regardless of the type of the big hit. Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, so that in a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) indicated by the command. In this case, either the interval effect as described above or the extension effect as described above is selectively performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control described later by the peripheral control substrate 4140 side.

  Next, the interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S607 is set (step S608), and the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S609) , End the big hit game start processing.

[About small hit game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 231, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the small hit as the process of step S701 so that the small open game (small hit game) is performed. The number of times the special winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the game (two times in this embodiment), the upper limit number (predetermined small number) at which the game ball can enter the special winning opening 2003 at opening At the time of opening, an opening mode in a small opening game (small hit game) such as an opening / closing operation time limit (small time opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing member 2006 is set.

  After that, prior to the small open hit game (small hit game) being performed, it is possible that an interval effect before the small game is played (for example, a challenge bonus effect such as “dropout chance!”) Can be executed. As shown, an interval effect command at the time of a small hit is set, which indicates the time from when the special symbol is stopped to when the small bonus game (small hit game) is started (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to a period after stopping the special symbol (as described above Since the extension effect of can be executed, it is prepared as an interval effect command set in this way, based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific fixed time (for example, the random number for the big hit symbol) is small regardless of the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number) at the time of the small hit. Only the interval rendering command in which 8 seconds is shown is set. Such time setting when the extension effect appears suppresses that the existence of a small hit is presumed, and as a result, the game interest is reduced by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 in response to the winning of the small hit. Can be suppressed.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S704) , The small hit game start processing ends.

  Although described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, whereby the liquid crystal display device 1400 is connected to the peripheral control board 4140 side. The interval effect is performed only for the time indicated by the above-described interval effect command through the control described later.

[About the big hit game processing]
Next, the big hit game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 232, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first has a big hit game flag indicating that the big hit game has already been performed as the process of step S801. It is determined whether it is in the ON state (set).

  Here, the big hit in-game flag is operated to be in the OFF state when it is in the processing status immediately after shifting to the big hit game processing (step S240). Therefore, when it is in the processing status immediately after shifting to the big hit game processing (step S240), it is determined that the big hit gaming flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the processing of step S802. I do.

  In the process of step S802, whether or not the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect of big hit decision, challenge bonus effect of opening decision of big winning a prize opening 2003 (execution decision of bonus game) or extension effect) is finished, that is, the above It is determined whether the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) set in the process of step S 607 (see FIG. 230) has timed out. The interval effect timer (8 seconds here) has not timed up, and the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect of big hit decision, challenge bonus effect of opening decision of big winning a prize port 2003, or extension effect) is still being executed In the case (NO in step S802), the big hit game process is temporarily ended, and the process is waited until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up through the processes of step S801 and step S802 (interruption process is repeated) It will be.

  However, in main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, as a result of performing such processing, even if the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) has timed out (YES in step S802), it is a big hit with only this. As to whether the game ball has passed through the special view gate 2500 (specific receiving port) after the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up so that the game does not start being started A determination is made (step S803). As a result, when it is not determined that the game ball has passed the special view gate 2500, the big hit game processing is temporarily ended, and standby is performed until it is determined that the game ball has passed the special view gate 2500 in the processing of step S803. By repeating the interrupt process, the opening / closing means 2006 is operated until the game ball is accepted by the special view gate 2500 after the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer is up. It is made to extend and control this in the closed state without causing it.

  According to the extension control applied to the close control period of such big winning opening 2003, the close control period from when the special symbol is stopped based on the big hit being won to when the big hit game is started. The period from the time the special symbol is stopped to the time the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up, of the period in which maintenance control is performed in the closed state) When the first closed control period having the specified length is set (step S802), after the first closed control period has elapsed, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is used. The “closed control period” of “” appears further (step S 803). Therefore, it is possible to realize novel effects that mutually utilize the attribute as the closed control period having a predetermined length and the attribute as the closed control period having an indefinite length. .

  More specifically, for the first closed control period (here, 8 seconds), for example, as described above, this addition time is used as an addition time with the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol set as described above, and this addition time is used As one unit, display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended with respect to the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the effect using an attribute as a closed control period having a predetermined length is realized. become able to. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the display effect relating to the jackpot lottery may be executed with the contents of the effect for the time obtained by adding the variation time of the special symbol and the first closing control period. There is. On the other hand, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the gaming ball passes the special view gate 2500), for example, a long film movie until the opening and closing member 2006 operates using the synchronization period It is possible to realize an effect utilizing an attribute as a closed control period having an indefinite length, such as flowing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. That is, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes the special view gate 2500), it is possible to end the synchronization period appropriately by the player, so that the feature film etc. Even in the case where the redundant rendition is realized, the extension of the rendition does not cause negative effects such as a decrease in the game interest, and the width of the rendition can be expanded.

  And as a result of such processing being performed, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the special view gate 2500 in the processing of step S803, the jackpot continuous operation device operates to make a big hit (operation of the condition device It shifts to the state where the operation (big hit game) of the opening and closing member 2006 according to the winning of the accompanying hit) is enabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is to be started as the process of step S804, and the above big hit game shows that the big hit game is already being performed. The middle flag is operated (set) to the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S805.

  That is, as described later, the big hit start command thus set is transmitted to peripheral control substrate 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, whereby liquid crystal display device 1400 has peripheral control substrate 4140. Through the control described later by the side, the display effect in the above-mentioned big hit game will be performed. In addition, when the big hit game processing (step S240) is started by the interruption control after the next because the big hit game flag is operated (set) to ON state, such step S801-step S804 It does from processing of step S805 below in order to do processing concerning execution of the big hit game without processing of.

  In the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S805), then as the processing of step S806, the opening time of the special winning opening 2003 (the elapsed time after opening) is set in the processing of step S606 (see FIG. 230). It is determined whether or not the open / close operation limit time (predetermined long time or predetermined middle time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S806), the special winning opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S808).

  However, even if it is determined that the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet elapsed in the process of step S806 (NO in step S806), the same applies after the special winning opening 2003 is opened. When the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2003 is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807), the above step S808 Shift to the processing of and close the big winning opening 2003. On the other hand, if the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet passed (NO in step S806), and the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit number, (NO in step S 807), the big hit gaming process is ended while maintaining the big winning opening 2003 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S805 that the special winning opening 2003 is not being opened, the number of times the opening of the special winning opening 2003 by the opening / closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is the above-mentioned step S606 (FIG. 230). It is determined whether or not the maximum number (16 times or 9 times) set in the processing of reference) has been reached (step S809). Then, if it has not reached (NO in step S809), the open / close member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003 (step S810), and the big hit game processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S809 that the round game has already been performed a maximum number of times, the operation of the bonus product continuous operation device is stopped and a big hit (a hit with the operation of the condition device) It moves to the state where the operation (big hit game) of the opening and closing member 2006 according to being won is made impossible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S811 to step S817, thereby, for example, the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 227). The big hit game processing is ended after setting the gaming state after the big hit game on the basis of the big hit winning class which is the execution trigger of the big hit game stored in. In addition, the winning species here is about whether or not it is a winning species to operate the probability variation function and the time saving function, for example, when the big hit made the execution timing of the big hit game is the big hit C. The contents of the information on whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the gaming state when it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot will be different.

  That is, first, the big hit flag and the big hit gaming flag are operated to the OFF state (step S811), and the winning type of the big hit made the execution trigger of the big hit game is determined (step S812, step S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not it is a winning type (big hit A to D) for operating the probability variation function. As a result, when it is determined that it is not the winning type for operating the probability variation function, the process proceeds to the process of step S814 without activating the probability variation function. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S812 that it is the winning type for activating the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S813), and then the process proceeds to the process of step S814. Do.

  Further, in the process of step S 814, it is determined whether or not it is a winning type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C won when being in the short time gaming state) for activating the time saving function. As a result, when it is determined that it is not the winning type for activating the time saving function, the operation of the condition device is stopped without activating the time saving function (step S816) and the processing flag is set to "0" ( Step S817), the big hit game processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S 814 that it is the winning type for activating the time saving function, after activating the time saving function (step S 815), the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S 816). ), When the processing flag is set to “0” (step S 817), the big hit game processing is ended.

  According to such a big hit game start processing, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum number of times in the processing of step 807, the big winning opening 2003 is an opening mode according to the type of the big hit (step S806 , Step S 807, step S 809) are repeatedly opened, and consequently, the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of the big hit.

[About small hit game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 233, in the small hit game process (step S250), the main control MPU 4100a first indicates that the small hit game is already being performed as the process of step S901. It is determined whether the in-game flag is in the ON state (set).

  Here, the small hitting game in progress flag is operated to be in the OFF state when it is in the processing state immediately after shifting to the small hitting game processing (step S250). Therefore, when it is in the processing status immediately after shifting to the small hit game processing (step S250), it is determined that the small hit gaming flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Perform the processing of

  In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) has ended, ie, predetermined by the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 231) A determination is made as to whether or not the time (8 seconds in this case) is up. If the interval effect timer (8 seconds here) has not timed up and the above-mentioned interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily ended, and the process of steps S901 and S902 waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has timed out.

  However, in the small hit game processing (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the big hit game processing (step 240), as a result of such processing being performed, the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up In the case (YES in step S902), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is to be started is set as the process of step S903 to set the small hit game to start with only this. The small hit in-game flag indicating that the game is already being performed is set to be turned on. That is, in this case, if the player only confirms that the above-mentioned second closing control period does not appear (no extended control from the first closing control period having a certain length), the condition device Completely eliminate the sense of expectation that a bonus game may be played according to a hit (big hit) involving the operation of the game (not a notification by an effect with a lot of false information, etc., but control of the game progress It is possible to play the game after removing the sense of expectation depending on the presence or absence.

  As will be described later, the small hit start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. In the above, the display effect in the small hit game is performed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. Also, when the small hit gaming flag is operated (set) to the ON state, when the small hit gaming process (step S250) is started in the next and subsequent interrupt processing, such step S901. The process from step S904 below is performed to perform the process related to the execution of the small hit game without performing the process of step S903.

  In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then in step S905, the opening time of the special winning opening 2003 (the elapsed time after opening) is set in the process of step S701 (see FIG. 231). It is determined whether or not the open / close operation restriction time (the predetermined short time of the open / close pattern for a short time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S 905), closing of the opening / closing member 2006 closes the special winning opening 2003 (step S 907).

  However, even if it is determined in the process of step S 905 that the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S 905), the same applies after the special winning opening 2003 is opened. When the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2003 is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, two) set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S905), the above step Shifting to the process of S 907, the big winning opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, in the case where the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet passed (NO in step S 905), and the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit number, (NO in step S 905), the small hit gaming process is ended while maintaining the large winning opening 2003 in the open state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S904 that the special winning opening 2003 is not being opened, the number of times the special winning opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 is the processing in the step S701 (see FIG. 231). It is determined whether or not the set maximum number (two times) has been reached (step S 908). Then, if it has not reached (NO in step S 908), the open / close member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003 (step S 909), and the small hit gaming process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening number of the big winning opening 2003 by the opening and closing member 2006 has already been performed the maximum number of times in the process of step S908, the small hit flag and the small hit game flag are both OFF. The small hit game processing is ended when the state is set (step S 910) and the processing flag is set to “0” (step S 911).

  According to such small hitting game processing, until it is determined that the opening of the big winning opening 2003 by the opening and closing member 2006 has reached the maximum number of times in the processing of the step 906, the big winning opening 2003 responds to the big hit Although entering the game ball into the big winning opening 2003 is considered to be difficult in comparison with the opening mode, it is possible for the player to be able to obtain a winning ball according to such opening mode. Become.

[3-6. Control processing in peripheral control unit]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 244. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub main process, and FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process. FIG. 240 is a flowchart of an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing an example of the determination process of the stop symbol (step S 1225 a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 244 shows an example of the determination process of the stop symbol (step S 1225 b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

[Submain processing]
In the sub main process, as shown in FIG. 238, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140 e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether a 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set (step S1002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is configured to execute a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process each time 2 ms elapses. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms lapse monitor counter is incremented ("1" is added to the counter value). Then, as a result of the count-up being repeatedly performed each time 2 ms elapses, when the same counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, the process is monitored until such a 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and the 16 ms steady process described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  In this 16 ms steady process, the LEDs of the decorative boards provided on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 based on various effect commands received from the main control board 4100, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 A process of controlling the speaker is performed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and this is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the above 2 ms steady process (loop process).

[About 16 ms steady process]
As shown in FIG. 239, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first analyzes various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed rendering command, control (rendering control processing) related to rendering display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the notice effect that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

  Then, next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a sound control process applied to the sound output of the speaker to generate a sound effect (for example, BGM) for promoting the rendering effect (step S1300). Furthermore, the light emission decoration control process concerning the light emission decoration by each decoration board | substrate with which the door frame 5 and the game board 4 were equipped is performed (step S1400).

  After that, the commands (sound output command, light emission decoration command, etc., in addition to display commands described later) are transmitted to the lamp drive substrate 3167 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4500, in addition to display commands described later. Information output processing (step S1500). As a result, an effect corresponding to the set command is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speakers 121 and 391, the door frame 5, the decoration boards provided on the game board 4, and the like.

  After the information output process (step S1500) is performed, the random number update process in which random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600). End the process.

  Although the process (16 ms steady process) from step S1100 to step S1600 is set as the processing amount to be terminated within 16 ms, temporarily, the step is performed when 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 is not completed, the process in the middle of execution is continued as it is without returning to the process of step S1100 (from the command analysis process). Up to the processing of That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set after the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the 16 ms steady processing To start.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is configured to execute the random number updating process (step S1600) in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms stationary processing in the sub main processing.

[About command analysis processing]
Next, command analysis processing (processing of step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 240, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) first receives the rendering command from the main control board 4100 as the process in step S1101 that the peripheral control board 4140 receives the command. It is determined whether it is stored in the storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment receives the rendering command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processes such as the 16 ms steady process to generate a command reception interrupt process, and this command reception interrupt process is generated. In the loading process, the rendering command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the reception command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. In the reception command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the order of reception of effect commands from the main control board 4100, and in the command reception interrupt process, those effect commands are associated in the order of reception. Each of these multiple areas is stored separately.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101 described above, the content of the received command storage area is confirmed, and if the rendering command is stored, the rendering command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read out from the received command storage area. (Step S1102).

  Next, whether or not the read rendering command is a pattern command (a command indicating a fluctuation pattern) among the rendering commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 228). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1103), the fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140, and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is When set (step S1104), the command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read rendering command is not a pattern command (the command shown in FIG. 237) (NO in step S1103), the readout rendering command is processed in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 228). It is determined whether or not it is a winning information command (a winning information command indicating a winning type including a win or a small hit according to a hit) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side. Step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), the win information command is stored in the win information storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), Terminates command analysis processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read rendering command is not the winning information command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the rendering command received by the corresponding storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 is selected. When set (step S1107), the command analysis process is ended. As such effect commands, for example, a confirmation stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S 503 (see FIG. 229), step S 606 (see FIG. 230), and step S 702 An interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process (see FIG. 231) or a big hit start set on the main control board 4100 in the process of step S 803 (see FIG. 232) There are a command, a small hit start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of the step S 903 (see FIG. 233), and the like.

[About effect control processing]
Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 241, this effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game, decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210), decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), big hit One of the display processing (step S1230) and the small hit display processing (step S1240) is selectively performed.

  That is, although described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is "0", a variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is set. On the condition that it has been done, processing is performed to start display effects in the liquid crystal display device 1400, including variable display of a decorative symbol. For example, based on the pattern command and the win information command, the display effect pattern (the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the presence or absence of the above-mentioned extension effect, etc.) is determined, and according to the determined display effect pattern In addition to setting the display command), it also performs processing such as setting for taking notice effects.

  Also, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is "1", basically, it corresponds to a confirmation stop command that can be operated in the process of the above-mentioned step S1107 (see FIG. 240). On the condition that the flag is set, as shown in the result of the big hit lottery, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is ended including the variation display of the decorative symbol (for the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 And so on. Also, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is reset.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is "2", a flag corresponding to a big hit interval effect command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 240), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, a display showing that the big winning opening 2003 is opened on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, a round display etc.) Control each to make Further, at the end of the processing, a flag corresponding to the interval presentation command at the time of big hit, and a flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

  In the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is "3", a flag corresponding to an interval effect command at the time of a small hit, which can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 240). Or, on the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays an indication that the big winning opening 2003 is opened or displays an effect display during the small hit gaming state Control each one. Further, at the end of the processing, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of small hit, and a flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display effect at the time of the big hit or the small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated within the fluctuation time indicated by the received pattern command. The display after this extension is extended to a period (interval period) after the stop of the variable display applied to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 It is made to give the case where the result of the big hit lottery can be shown in the production.

  That is, in this case, although described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period is also included, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100 A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command (with respect to the liquid crystal control board 4150) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. Further, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), although the flag corresponding to the decision stop command is set, a halfway effect stage in which the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not finished appears Will end the process.

  The display effect thus extended in the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240) is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). It is necessary to carry out processing to be continuously performed according to the contents of the Therefore, in the process at the time of extension, even when the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, effect control according to the command (display control indicating that the special winning opening 2003 is released, etc.) Never do.

  As described above, the command set in the process of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control process is transmitted to the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, through the control by the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 side, the display effect of the content (display effect pattern or the like) indicated by the above-described command appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

[About decoration pattern change start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is "0" will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of decorative symbol variation start processing.

  As shown in FIG. 242, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4140a first operates a variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) as the process of step S1221. It is determined whether the reception flag is in the ON state (set). That is, in the process of this step 1221, based on the fact that a predetermined start condition (YES in step S301) is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side, the above variation pattern in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240). It waits for the reception flag to be turned on.

  Then, until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is operated to the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control relating to the demonstration effect or the effect mode by the processing of the following steps S1232 to S1237.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232), and when it is determined that it is not in the same state, the display effect such as the previous symbol variation ends After that, it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 sets a display command (for the liquid crystal control substrate 4150) to start the demonstration effect. Then, the display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 240, whereby the demonstration effect is produced in the liquid crystal display device 1400 through control by the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 side. Will be executed.

  If it is not determined that the predetermined time has elapsed in the process of step S1236, the decorative symbol variation start process is temporarily ended, and a variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221) or the predetermined time Will wait until either condition elapses (YES in step S 1236).

  Further, as a result of performing such processing (step S1236 and step S1237), if it is determined that the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the state of performing demonstration effects in the processing of the above-mentioned step S1232 (step S1232) In step S1233, it is determined whether or not the player's operation on the effect mode is permitted (step S1233).

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), About the display effect in the display device 1400, a plurality of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side. The display effect pattern (extension: whether the display effect as to whether or not the player wins a hit (with a big hit) with the operation of the condition device after extending to a period after the stop of the fluctuation display according to the lighting pattern of the LED A first effect mode capable of selecting an effect pattern) and a second effect mode capable of selecting a challenge bonus effect pattern are prepared.

  Here, an outline of an extension effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and a challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected when in the second effect mode will be described. FIG. 245 (a) is a figure for demonstrating the extension production pattern at the time of a big hit, FIG. 245 (b) is a figure for demonstrating the extension production pattern at the time of a small hit, FIG. 245 (c) These are figures for demonstrating the challenge bonus presentation pattern at the time of big hit, FIG. 245 (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus presentation pattern at the time of a small hit.

[Extended presentation pattern at the time of big hit]
In the first effect mode, when the result that the opportunity to obtain a winning ball (bonus game) is obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is obtained, the effect extended to the period after the variation stop of the special symbol. An extension display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) having contents can be selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), when the display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension is selected based on the big hit being won, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first changes the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started to match the start (based on the fluctuation pattern reception flag being set). However, after that, even if the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (at the end of variation of the special symbol) or the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (entry to the opening period) is set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The effect will be continued without ending this.

That is, as described above, in main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the closed control period from when the special symbol is stopped based on the big hit being won to when the big hit game is started,
-A time (first closed control period having a predetermined length) from the time the special symbol is stopped until the time (in this case, 8 seconds) predetermined by the interval effect timer expires (the first closed control period having a predetermined length), -The time until the gaming ball passes the special view gate 2500 (see FIG. 151) after the time set in advance by the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is up (the second with an indefinite length) 2 closed control period)
It is to control as.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), when the display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension is selected based on that the big hit is won. The time until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is up after the special symbol is stopped (the first closed control period with a fixed length), for the variation time of the special symbol In the form of extension, it is intended to perform the display effect that requires a big hit lottery. Note that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a situation in which a specific character challenges a battle with an enemy character is shown.

  Then, when the first closing control period having a predetermined length has elapsed and control is performed as the second closing control period having an indefinite length, the contents of the effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 In the present invention, it is made to switch to the hit explicit rendition in which the hit information about whether the result of the big hit lottery is the hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device. In addition, here, with regard to the hit explicit rendition, it is performed as a big hit rendition where it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It can be realized as an effect in which the appearance of winning the battle is shown. Also, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern consists of a display effect for a big hit lottery and a hit explicit effect for which the result of the effect appears, an extended effect pattern for a big hit according to this embodiment is It can be said that it is an effect pattern in which the contents of the effect are extended within the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closed control period is ended after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. .

  Then, after that, on the condition that the second closing control period having an indefinite length is still continued, by striking out the gaming ball relatively as an effect in the second closing control period. Control is performed such that an opening effect before a big hit game appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 which urges that the big hit game should be started by performing a right hitting game in which the game ball is made to flow down the right playing area 605 of the center character 2300. Do. As a result, when the player plays a right-handed game, the game ball hit in the game area 605 on the right side of the center character 2300 first passes through the special view gate 2500, and thus the jackpot start command is set. The Rukoto. Thus, by the end of the second closing control period, the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (see FIG. 232). At this time, the round indicator 648 lights to indicate the number of rounds.

  In addition, when the second closed control period having an indefinite length ends and the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (a flag corresponding to a big hit start command is set), for example, liquid crystal A big hit game showing that the first round of the round game has been started even if the content of the effect is on the halfway stage, even if the effect of the effect appearing on the display device 1400 (the present effect explicit effect or the opening effect) is in the middle stage. Execute in the form of forced switching to production. However, on the other hand, as long as the game ball does not pass the special figure gate 2500 after the end of the first closed control period having a certain length, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is Since it does not end (a flag corresponding to a big hit start command is not set), it is not forcedly switched to a big hit game playing effect indicating that the first round game has been started.

  According to such an extension effect pattern at the time of big hit, at least the operation handle portion 410 is not operated after the first closed control period having a certain length has elapsed from the stop time of the special symbol, the special figure Since the game ball does not pass through the gate 2500, the progression of the production continues to be stagnated in the effect before the start of the big hit game (the effect during the second closing control period). That is, in this case, the player does not operate the operation handle portion 410 until the player clearly understands the meaning of the effect before the start of the big hit game (the effect during the second close control period). It will be possible to keep the production progress stagnant by the production before the start. Also, on the other hand, when the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 by the operation of the operation handle portion 410, the effect before the start of the big hit game is ended, and the next effect (during the big hit game) will be progressed. From this point of view, it is possible to realize my own paced presentation matched to each player's pace, in other words, it is possible to realize the sense of speed required for the progression of the presentation to be matched to a wide customer base regardless of age or sex It will be.

  Furthermore, in such an extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit, as long as the situation is not progressed in this way from the effect before the start of the big hit game (control of stagnation of the effect by the peripheral control MPU 4140a), the main control MPU 4100a is undefined By controlling so that the second closing control period with the length of is not ended, it is possible that the game progresses and a big hit game (a bonus game in which winning balls can be obtained) is executed. I try to avoid it. Therefore, from the player's side, just by adjusting the speed of progress of the rendering to match the pace of the player, it will appear that the game proceeds to match the adjusted rendering speed, As a result, it is possible to enjoy the personal pace effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 without worrying about the progress speed of the game.

  As described above, in the case of the jackpot extension effect pattern, after the end of the first closed control period having a certain length, the second closed control period appearing in the form of extending such closed control period is It is a rendering pattern on the premise of continuing only for the time of the second, and within the second closing control period, a part of the rendering content (a winning explicit representation) in the rendering pattern and the opening rendering before the big hit game ( It is possible to carry out a right hit game effect to perform an action to start the big hit game. Then, it is possible to end the second close control period at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, and to start the big hit game at an appropriate timing.

  However, on the other hand, such a second closed control period is, for example, a period which is ended based on at least the operation of the operation handle portion 410 (a period having an indefinite length). If the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 immediately after the end of the first closed control period having a certain length, the corresponding effect is displayed. It is also possible to quickly advance to the next effect (during a big hit game) without making a cut on the way, or making the effect itself appear (appear effect). Further, as described above, when the effect is advanced earlier, the game control itself also advances earlier, and the big hit game will be started earlier. Therefore, while realizing the personal pace effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400, for a player such as a veteran, to accelerate the game earlier by skipping effects or the like to enjoy efficient and stress-free rapid game / rendering performance efficiently. To be able to

  In particular, the time (game time) required for the opening effect in which the game explanation for prompting a right-on game is performed after the hit explicit effect (big hit effect) is performed is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. It is often only time. However, according to the extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit, while preparing the time (game time) required for such opening effect, when it only functions as a useless time for the player, this is appropriately used. To make it possible to advance the effects and the game faster. As a result, it is possible to provide each player with an effect and a game suited to each player.

  By the way, the presentation time (time for the explicit demonstration effect) is also cut by showing the information on whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is the hit (big hit) with or without the operation of the condition device. In the case of advancing earlier, the final presentation result (for example, whether the character wins the battle, etc.) in the extension presentation pattern at the time of the big hit does not sufficiently appear, and even the opening presentation In the big hit game production (round production etc.) will appear suddenly without appearing. That is, in this case, the extension presentation pattern at the time of the big hit will be ended in the middle stage before the presentation result sufficiently appears, and even the opening presentation can be omitted so that the big hit game can be started early. Become.

  By the way, in the effect within the second closed control period having an indefinite length, first, a hit explicit effect is performed in which it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is the hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device. After that, by performing the right-handed game, an opening effect is performed that urges that the big hit game should be started. However, after the opening effect is performed for a predetermined time (or while performing the opening effect), a feature film dedicated to the big hit may be played. According to the second closing control period having an indefinite length, even when such redundant effects are realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in game interest due to the extension of the effects, and the effects Will be able to broaden the range of

  In addition, in the second closing control period, the operation acceptance to the predetermined operation means (main button 371 of the operation button unit 370) is permitted, and the result of the game lottery based on the operation of the main button 371 An operation-based effect (for example, an effect that indicates an expected degree of a gaming state after a big hit game, etc.) may be performed, which may indicate an expected degree of. That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation-based effect that can be operated at his own pace without worrying about the operation-enabled expiration date (period in which the operation acceptance is permitted). It will be.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is at the time of winning a big hit, and lights up at round indicator 648 when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop time of the special symbol is finished. Is controlled so that it does not take place. The round indicator 648 is turned on by canceling the control after the special closing gate 2500 passes the special drawing gate 2500 after the end of the first closing control period. As a result, in the second closing control period, it is possible to perform a striking effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the round indicator 648 is turned off. Further, it is avoided that the number of rounds in the big hit game can be easily grasped by the player regardless of how much effect stagnation has occurred in the second close control period.

[Extra production pattern for small hits]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), even when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (the extension effect pattern at the time of the small hit) is selected based on that the small hit is won, the special symbol The time until the interval effect timer (in this case 8 seconds) is up after the time is stopped (the first closed control period with a fixed length), the form is extended with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol And, it is made to perform the display effect which requires a big hit lottery. Note that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a situation in which a specific character challenges a battle with an enemy character is shown.

  However, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, closing control from when the special symbol is stopped based on the small hit being won to when the small open hit game (small hit game) is started. About period (opening period), it consists only of time (the first closed control period with a certain length) until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is up after the special symbol is stopped Control. Therefore, in the extension effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, the first closing control period (8 seconds in this case) having a certain length has passed, and the small open hit game (small hit game) When it is started, the effect content appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed as a win-win indication that indicates information on whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device. To switch to. In addition, here, with regard to the explicit demonstration effect, it will be performed as a loss effect in which it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is a lose that was dropped in the hit (big hit) involving the operation of the condition device. This can be realized as an effect in which a state of defeat in a battle with an enemy character is shown. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern consists of a display effect for a big hit lottery and a hit explicit effect for which the effect results appear, an extended effect pattern for a small hit according to this embodiment and Is an effect pattern in which the contents of the effect are extended within a period during which a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be said.

  According to the extension effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, it can be made to shift to the display effect according to the next fluctuation (the special game of the reserve processing of the special symbol) relatively quickly after being shown that it is a lost for the big hit become. Furthermore, since the effect content is extended within the period during which the small opening game is being played (small hitting game), the liquid crystal is generated during the small opening game (small hitting game) period. The movement of the opening / closing member 2006 is less likely to be noticed as much attention is directed to the display device 1400. That is, in this case, the contents of the presentation progress in the same manner as in the case of a so-called high-expected loss presentation (loss presentation with the open / close member 2006 not working). It becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2006 is similar to or the same as when the small open hit game (small hit game) is performed according to such small hit wins. A big hit game for operating the opening / closing member 2006 with the operation mode of, and a latent effect state (a latent effect state using a so-called small hit) or the like on the premise of this are not prepared. That is, the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 245 (a)) at the time of the big hit when in the first effect mode and the extension effect pattern at the time of the small hit (see FIG. 245 (b)) It is made based on the technical idea (the technical idea opposite to the conventional one) to make it hard to grasp that it is the pachinko machine 1 being used, and based on such a technical idea, the special symbol In view of the fact that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closed control period, and the opening of the big winning opening appear in the big hit as well, the rendering contents in each rendering pattern are respectively extended .

  In addition, in the extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to this embodiment and the extension effect pattern at the time of the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 245 (a) and (b), after the special symbol is stopped, the interval effect Whether the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device only after the time (first closed control period) before the timer (8 seconds in this case) has timed out has passed The information on the is to be shown. However, with regard to these extended effect patterns, if the display effect according to the big hit lottery is performed in the form of being extended within the first closed control period, within the first closed control period of the same display effect In the effect portion that appears, it may be possible to indicate crash information as to whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (big hit) involving the operation of the condition device. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next fluctuation (the special symbol withholding and detention) relatively quickly after it is indicated that the loss is at least a big hit. In this case, in the case of a big hit at the time of the big hit, a special hit at the time of the big hit to encourage the character to win the battle while already knowing that the big hit has already been won, or urge to hit the right A presentation for the game explanation appears, and in the explicit demonstration at the time of a small hit, the appearance that the character loses the battle and regrets that it has already been recognized that it is the lost who lost the big hit. A special effect at the time of a small hit will appear.

[A big hit challenge bonus effect pattern]
As compared with the extension effect pattern in the first effect mode, in the second effect mode, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 provides an opportunity (bonus game) to obtain a prize ball. In the case where it is determined, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a challenge bonus effect pattern may be selected, which indicates that it has been won when it is possible to obtain a winning ball. The challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which not only a big hit but also a small hit is treated as one type (a type of hit) as a hit for which winning balls can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), in the second effect mode, when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on that the big hit is won, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts changing the special symbol. In order to match (based on the fluctuation pattern reception flag being set), the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started. Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set) to match the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  However, this display effect does not show the lottery result for the big hit of the big hit, but the winning prize winning opportunity given by the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is awarded (big hit or small hit) It is indicated whether or not it has been done (draft effect for the challenge bonus). More specifically, it is shown that when the jackpot or jackpot is won, an opportunity to win a prize ball is given by the opening of the big winning opening 2003 within the fluctuation period of the special symbol. Specific display image will appear. In this case, although the player can not know how many prize balls the player is able to obtain by opening the big winning opening 2003, the winning balls are obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003. It will be possible to understand what is possible.

  As described above, after a specific display image appears in the drop effect concerning the challenge bonus, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of the big hit), the big winning opening 2003 Perform a pre-start presentation to start the challenge bonus presentation on how much the number of prize balls that the player can obtain by opening the game. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, a time (a first closed control period having a predetermined length) from the stop of the special symbol to the time-up of the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) elapses. After that, it is started on condition that the game ball passes special feature gate 2500.

  Here, in the pre-start effect for starting the challenge bonus effect, the operation amount of the operation handle portion 410 (the first closed control period until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up is used Description of aiming at the special drawing gate 2500) and operation timing is performed by right-handed game.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, as such pre-start effect, a countdown effect is performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In this countdown effect, for example, a countdown display of, for example, about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining aiming at the special view gate 2500 by right-handed game, and the countdown display is changed to "0". When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation, the game ball passes through the special view gate 2500 immediately after the end of the first closing control period.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the big hit start command is set relatively quickly after the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) has timed out. The second closed control period is ended by the game, and the challenge bonus effect and the big hit game (special bonus game) on how much the number of prize balls that the player is able to obtain is eventually started early. Become so. At this time, the round indicator 648 lights to indicate the number of rounds.

  That is, according to such a progression of the bonus bonus at the time of the big hit, the time until the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 after the interval production timer (here 8 seconds) has timed up (indeterminate Even if the second closed control period with a length is compared with the case of the later-described challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 245 (d)) in which the time does not exist, this can be rendered It can be made as short as negligible. That is, the above-described countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and is completed by terminating the second closed control period having an indefinite length at an early stage and cutting it, which will be described later. As in the case of the small bonus hit pattern (see FIG. 245 (d)), only the first closed control period having a certain length appears as an interval period before the big hit game (before the challenge bonus effect). It is made to promote the game progress (progression progress) in the form. Thereby, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit that can be obtained winning balls by the opening of the big winning opening 2003, in the challenge bonus production, long open It becomes possible to perform an effect display on which game mode appears including a small opening hit game as well as a hit game and a middle open hit game.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is at the time of winning a big hit, and lights up at round indicator 648 when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop time of the special symbol is finished. Is controlled so that it does not take place. The round indicator 648 is turned on by canceling the control after the special closing gate 2500 passes the special drawing gate 2500 after the end of the first closing control period. As a result, prior to the challenge bonus effect being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player is awarded the jackpot winning by turning on the round indicator 648 or the number of rounds in the big hit game (special bonus game). It becomes possible to avoid being easily grasped.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display changes to "0", the following leading effects (not shown) of the time from the game ball being launched to passing through the special view gate 2500 ), And the time it takes for the game ball to pass the special view gate 2500 after the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) has timed up (the second with an indefinite length) Of the closed control period) can be further concealed in a dramatic manner.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, a portion (backflow preventing member 604) at which the game ball is hit in the game area 605 in the outer rail 602 (front component member 601). A sensor (not shown) capable of detecting gaming balls passing through the same portion is provided at a location X) in the vicinity. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the liquid crystal display device 1400 indicates that the game ball launched after the countdown display changes to "0" indicates that the game ball has passed the same place X by the detection signal from the same sensor. At the beginning of the production. According to such an advance effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the countdown effect, the countdown display changes to "0" immediately without waiting for the game ball to pass the special view gate 2500. When the game ball passes through the above location X, the content of the effect is developed, and a bonus bonus effect pattern (see FIG. Between the case of 245 (see (d)) and the case of 245 (d)), it is made difficult for a shift to occur in the content of the effect and the appearance timing thereof.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the countdown effect according to this embodiment, the timing when the countdown display changes to “0” is slightly earlier than when the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up ( It is set in the closed control period 1). According to such a countdown effect, at least a part of the time from when the game ball is fired by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 to when the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 is the first closing control period. It becomes possible to play the game so that it can be included as the time on the side of the first closed control period among the second closed control period, and the second closed control period having an indefinite length is It becomes possible to shorten by a minute (a minute included as a time on the first closed control period side). In this case, with regard to the leading effect, the second closing control period is also started prior to the second closing control period, and there is a possibility that the first closing control period and the second closing control period may be crossed. It will be positioned.

Here, for example, as a series of effect contents leading from such a countdown effect to an advance effect to a challenge bonus effect, for example,
・ In the countdown effect, attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing when the countdown display becomes “0” in conjunction with the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400! The effect display such as
・ After the countdown display becomes “0”, for example, based on the game ball having passed through the portion X by the operation of the operation handle portion 410, an attack such as launching a rocket launcher against the enemy character The advance effect to be started is started, and the bonus bonus effect to show the result of the attack made is started based on the fact that the game ball passes the special drawing gate 2500 (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set).
And so on.

  However, as for the leading effect, if the gaming ball that has passed through the place X passes the special drawing gate 2500 as it is, only the time of about “0.5 seconds” can be given, so the contents of the presentation are It is desirable to prepare as something to be developed (connection effect until the challenge bonus effect is started).

  In addition, as a bonus bonus effect, for example, when an attack on an enemy character is avoided, it indicates that it is a small opening hit game as a result of a mounted attack, and although an attack on an enemy character was hit, it could not be defeated. Sometimes it can be realized by showing that it is a middle open hit game and indicating that it is a long open hit game when an enemy character falls down due to an attack. Alternatively, when the attack against the enemy character is hit but can not be defeated, it indicates that it is either a middle open hit game or a long open hit game, and in the subsequent round effect, the middle open hit game and long open It may be made clear whether it is a hit game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as the attack against the enemy character is hit, not only the winning amount that can be obtained but also the possibility of a small hit is advantageous to the player. It is possible to dramatically increase this with regard to the expectation of transition to a good gaming state.

  However, in such a big hit challenge bonus effect pattern, it may be assumed that the operation handle portion 410 is not operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect changes to “0”. That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in the second closed control period, the countdown display is “0” in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable in order to weaken the player's interest which causes such a situation, to prevent new appearances from appearing, such as being displayed as “”.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern appears, such a situation that the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the jackpot is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( It can not occur in the case of FIG. 245 (d). That is, in this case, the amount of award balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is eliminated while being in a state of stagnation (no stage) in which no effect is newly performed. In addition to this, this will be dramatically enhanced with regard to the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Although the countdown effect is realized by the countdown display, it is not necessarily counted as long as it is performed so that the specific timing at which the operation handle portion 410 should be operated can be grasped. It is also good.

[Pattern bonus presentation pattern for small hit]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 245 (d), even when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a also performs special processing. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started to match the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set) to match the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  Also, in the same way, even in the case of the small bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003 in such an effect (draft effect for the challenge bonus) performed in the variation period of the special symbol. A particular display image appears that is shown to be given an opportunity for acquisition. As a result, although the player can not know how many prize balls the player is able to obtain by opening the big winning opening 2003, the winning ball can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003. It will be possible to understand what is to be done.

  In addition, after the specific display image appears in the falling effect concerning the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of the small hit), and A presentation before start is performed to start a challenge bonus presentation on how much the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003.

  However, as mentioned above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a fixed length), and when the timed up of the timer, the special drawing gate A small open hit game (small bonus game) is started regardless of the passing of the game ball to 2500 (see FIG. 233).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the challenge bonus effect pattern of the small hit, the operation of the operation handle portion 410 (passing of the game ball to the special view gate 2500) originally advances the game and the effect Even though it is not necessary to make it happen, as a pre-start effect to start the challenge bonus effect, the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up as in the case of the above-mentioned big hit challenge bonus effect pattern By using the first closed control period up to the point in time, the countdown effect whose operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed.

  Therefore, according to the countdown effect at the time of the small hit performed during the first closing control period, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the effect, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) ) A small opening (with a small hit start command set)) is relatively early (or just before the opening of a small opening game) since the small opening game (small bonus game) is started. The gaming ball comes to pass through a portion (a portion near the backflow preventing member 604) X where the gaming ball is struck out to the gaming area 605 in the constituent member 601).

  And even in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit, the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects from the sensor that the game ball hit since the countdown display changed to “0” has passed the same place X When indicated by the signal, the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts the leading effect. Also, in the same way, in the countdown effect, the timing when the countdown display changes to "0" is slightly earlier than the time-up of the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) (within the first closed control period) It is set in. However, when the leading effect is started, regardless of whether the game ball passes special drawing gate 2500 or not, it is necessary for the game ball which has passed the same place X to be able to pass special drawing gate 2500 as it is When a predetermined provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled to start the challenge bonus effect.

  According to such a small hit challenge bonus effect pattern, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the big hit challenge bonus which leads from the countdown effect to the advance effect and the challenge bonus effect. The challenge bonus effect is started by the same series of effect contents as in the effect pattern. Thereby, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit that can be obtained winning balls by the opening of the big winning opening 2003, in the challenge bonus production, long open In addition to winning games and medium opening winning games, it is possible to perform effect display on which game mode appears, including small opening hits.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game ball passes the special view gate 2500, the gaming ball having passed the place X can pass through the special view gate 2500 as it is. The challenge bonus effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when a predetermined temporary rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) required for the passage of time is over, but the detection signal of the special view gate sensor 2502 is directly monitored By doing this, the challenge bonus effect may be started based on the fact that the game ball has passed the special view gate 2500 even in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern in the case of a small hit.

  However, in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit, although the small open hit game (small hit game) is started immediately after the end of the first closing control period, the countdown is displayed by the countdown effect It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the operation handle portion 410 is not operated for a long time even after the change to "0". In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment causes the liquid crystal display device 1400 to provide an advance effect when the gaming ball does not pass the portion X within a predetermined time after the countdown display changes to "0". The false bonus is started, and when a predetermined temporary rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed after false start of the preceding effect, control is further performed to falsely start the challenge bonus effect.

  That is, in this case, in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit, regardless of whether or not the operation system effect requiring the operation to the operation handle portion 410 is performed, in the liquid crystal display device 1400 A series of production contents linked to the challenge bonus production will appear falsely (False production). Therefore, the player determines the presence or absence of an operation on the operation handle portion 410, the presence or absence of passage of the gaming ball to the special view gate 2500, and the difference between the passage timing of the portion X and the start timing of the leading effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is possible to grasp that the game is played per small opening in advance of the surrounding field horse trying to check the liquid crystal display device 1400 by confirming the etc., and it is known that the game is immediately interrupted Will be able to show off

  Thus, the extension effect pattern in the first effect mode is, as described above, the presence of a small hit itself by continuing the second closed control period having an indefinite length for a certain amount of time. It is an effect pattern aimed at concealing, and after extending the effect contents to within a first closed control period with a certain length which is also present in the effect pattern at the time of small hit, In the second closing control period that can not exist in the effect pattern, an opening effect before the big hit game (a effect that urges the player to start the big hit game by performing a right-handed game) is performed. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat a small hit as one of the hits by making the second closed control period with an indefinite length appear as little as possible. The opening pattern before the big hit game (a play that urges that the big hit game should be started by playing a right-handed game), and also has a certain length which is also present in the small hit game pattern It is carried out so that it can be completed within the first closed control period.

  Such an effect based on the premise that there is a second closed control period having an indefinite length by the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (the effect structure which makes the timing for promoting the right-handed game different in the second closing control period different), even if the display effect pattern (the variation time of the special symbol is the same) based on one effect command, It is possible to make the length of the rendering time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode to the start of the big hit game largely different As a result, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the side of the main control MPU 4100a one by one.

  By the way, according to such a challenge bonus effect pattern for big hit (refer to FIG. 245 (c)) and a challenge bonus effect pattern for small hit (refer to FIG. 245 (d)), a display effect for hit (specific) When the display image appears, at least a specific number (for example, a small number of balls (about 40 to 50 in the present embodiment)) of balls can be provided so that the balls can be obtained. The game will be played as a challenge bonus effect with elements of a round lottery, such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus after the player knows that the game will be played .

  Furthermore, when there is an increase in the number of winning balls, there is a possibility that a change to a game state (a game state in which the probability variation function or the time reduction function is activated) advantageous to the player may be made. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that the winning probability with operation of the conditional device (1/400) is added to the winning probability without operating the conditional device (3/400) With (1/100), not only that a winning ball can be paid out to the player (in other words, that the opening and closing member 2006 operates), it can be shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You will also be able to make them aware. As a result, it is avoided that only a monotonous loss effect is repeatedly displayed by the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, and the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed. .

  In addition, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even when the player wins the big hit, when the specific condition is satisfied, the hit display effect (specific display image) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In spite of the fact that the player can control the player to pay out the winning balls and make the player aware of the change to the gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the jackpot during the operation of the big winning opening 2003 is A specific image (such as an image that appears when a false effect such as a leading effect or a challenge bonus effect is made despite the fact that there is no operation on the operation handle portion 410) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I am trying to get it. That is, in this case, until the big winning opening 2003 is opened in response to the jackpot winning, it can also function as a waiting effect period whether or not a specific image (false effect) appears. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, not only there is no change to the gaming state advantageous to the player, but also as the number of winning balls that can be acquired by the player, the same specific image (false effect) It will be shown that the big hit has been won, combined with the size of such a gap in the profit that the player can get, as it will only be possible to obtain a much smaller number of balls than when it does not appear It becomes possible to further enhance the game interest when the effect (the stagnation effect from the first close control period) appears.

  Then, according to the configuration in which two such effect modes are adopted, in the first effect mode in which the extension effect pattern can be selected, the player is asked to perform the small opening hit game (small hit game) in the first effect mode. While effects can be made that do not cause the player to be aware that the winning balls can be paid out (in other words, the opening and closing member 2006 operates), the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected is small. At the time of execution of the open hit game (small hit game), an effect can be made to make the player aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening and closing member 2006 operates). . As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, the probability (small win probability of “big hit” “1/400”) is higher than that in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected. With such a probability that the winning ball can be paid out to the player comes to appear with a higher probability "1/100)" plus the winning probability of "3/400", and such a rendering mode Execution probability of the bonus game (the opening of the big winning opening 2003 by the opening and closing member 2006) that the winning balls can be paid out to the player without causing the change of the gaming state accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It is possible to realize a deeper effect as if each time it changes. In addition, after making it difficult for a player to notice that such a pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit in the first effect mode, it is possible to realize such effects in the second effect mode, This is because not only the big hit but also the small hit is treated as one type of display effect as a hit for which winning balls can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) according to this embodiment, the first effect mode in which such an extended effect pattern can be selected and the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected A forced mode control means is provided for creating a forced mode period in which any effect mode is forcibly determined and change by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode is not permitted.

  For example, a first predetermined period (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as one month elapses) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined to be the first effect mode. To forcibly determine a second predetermined period (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as the next one month has elapsed) after the first predetermined period has elapsed as the second effect mode If the control to create the above-mentioned mode forced period is performed, for the first one month, the effect is performed so as to hide that the small hit is mounted as described above. The pachinko machine 1 operates as a pachinko machine 1 capable of delivering a winning ball to the player based on the probability of winning. On the other hand, during the next one month, the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is treated as a kind that allows a small ball to be obtained as one type of winning ball that can be won, rather than the jackpot probability of being a big hit. The pachinko game machine 1 can be operated as a pachinko machine 1 capable of paying out a prize ball to a player under a high probability, and the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with only one game specification, but the first predetermined first It is as if another pachinko machine with a different game specification for taking out balls as well as the contents of the presentation on the liquid crystal display 1400 is newly operated, coupled with the fact that the existence of the small hit was made difficult to be noticed during the period. Can give the player an impressive impression. In addition, after the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the operation of the player on the operation means during the demonstration effect.

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 242, in the process of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not it is in the mode compulsory period forcibly determined in any of the effect modes with the effect mode. As a result, when it is determined that the first effect mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall, etc.), the second effect When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed), the change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is not permitted. (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is once ended. That is, in this case, while the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232), the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221).

  On the other hand, based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140 aa, it is determined that the above-described mode forced period, which is forcibly determined to either the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode If it is determined that the player is allowed to change the effect mode (for example, if the second predetermined period has already elapsed) (YES in step S1233), then step S1234 is performed. Perform the processing of

  In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not the player has operated to change the effect mode. Here, the operation by the player is, for example, an operation on the main button 371 or the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 (see FIG. 20), and the main button 371 or the sub under the demonstration effect. When the button 372 is operated, display control may be performed to cause the liquid crystal display device 1400 to display a selection screen of the effect mode. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, a specific effect mode is selected by the operation on the sub button 372, and the selected specific effect mode is determined by the operation on the main button 371. It is determined that the player has made an operation to change the mode (YES in step S1234), and the setting process according to the same effect mode is performed to change to the determined effect mode (step S1235).

  The means to be operated by the player may not be the main button 371 or the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 (see FIG. 20), and may be a predetermined action by the player, including a proximity operation using a touch panel. It is sufficient that the operation of is possible. In addition to the control for causing a change in the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (display of selection screen, display upon selection, display upon determination, etc.) as processing when a player performs an operation, for example, transparency The player is notified that the effect mode has been switched by changing the effect mode of a predetermined decorative member, such as changing the color of light emitted from the back of the game panel 600 having the character (such as changing from blue to red). You may make it show against.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1221 that the fluctuation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side Assuming that the predetermined start condition (NO in step S301) is satisfied, the following steps S1222 to 1227 are performed to start display effects on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the player is in the normal external disadvantage game state (step S1223). The gaming state flag is operated to indicate the type of gaming state to be controlled after the big hit game, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1230)).

  When the gaming state flag indicates that the game is in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (YES in step S1223), the setting mode of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC 4140aa is next processed as the process of step S1224. It is determined whether or not the first effect mode is set based on time information such as calendar information and time information. As a result, when it is in a period when the first effect mode is forcibly determined, or when the first effect mode is set in a period in which a change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is permitted. It is determined that the first effect mode is set (YES in step S 1224), and the process of step S 1225 a is performed.

  In the process of step S1225a, the variable display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) is stored while referring to the effect pattern table when the first effect mode is set. Based on the information on the fluctuation pattern and the win information stored in the win information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined.

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether to perform the notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1226a). That is, between the time of the first effect mode and the time of the second effect mode, not only the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the execution frequency of the advance effect and the contents of the effect change. In the selection process, in the notice effect table when the first effect mode is set, an effect mode (notice effect pattern) for the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number.

  Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern determined in the first effect mode thus set is set (step S 1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is ended. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 239, whereby the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Through control, a display effect of the content (such as an extended effect pattern) indicated by the display command appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the advance command appears.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set in a period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined, or in a period in which the player is allowed to change the effect mode. When it is in the state, it is determined that the first effect mode is not set (NO in step S1224), and the process of step S1225b is performed next. In the process of step S1225b, the variable display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) is stored while referring to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. Based on the information on the fluctuation pattern and the win information stored in the win information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined. Subsequently, in the notice effect table in the setting state of the second effect mode, an effect mode (notice effect according to the notice effect according to an appropriate notice determination random number, including a determination as to whether or not to execute the advance effect). A notice selection process in which a pattern is determined is executed (step S1226b).

  Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, stop symbol and notice effect pattern determined in the second effect mode thus set is set (step S 1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is ended. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 239, whereby the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Through control, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and a preview effect of the content indicated by the advance command appears.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1223 that the gaming state flag does not indicate that the gaming state flag is normally in the external disadvantageous gaming state (NO in step S1223), detailed description is omitted, but in the current gaming state While determining the effect pattern and the stop pattern based on the corresponding effect table (step S1229), in the advance effect table according to the current gaming state, including the determination of whether to perform the advance effect, appropriate advance notice An advance notice selection process is performed in which an effect mode (notice effect effect pattern) for the advance notice effect is determined based on the judgment random number (step S1230).

  Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern determined according to the current gaming state thus determined is set (step S 1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1 (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is ended. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 239, whereby the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Through control, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and a preview effect of the content indicated by the advance command appears.

  FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and the stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 243, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is read, and this variation pattern command is The effect pattern associated with is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one fluctuation pattern command (see FIGS. 249 and 250), or 1 Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 246 and 247). In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are associated, one of the effect patterns is determined based on the result of the effect drawing using a predetermined effect random number, or any effect based on the type of the big hit It will determine the pattern.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, a stop symbol (symbol combination at stop) appearing when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described later, the decoration symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to the variation stop of the special symbol including the case where the above-mentioned extension effect pattern whose display effect is not finished when the special symbol is stopped is adopted. It is supposed to stop based on the stop command being set.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, it may be prepared as a combination effect of the “extension effect pattern” and the “extension effect pattern although not being an extension effect pattern”. A determination is made as to whether any effect pattern with the "lose effect pattern" has been determined in the process of step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when one of the effect patterns is determined, when the predetermined stop symbol (such as a specific reach loss symbol) is determined (step S1303), the step S1225a (FIG. 242) is determined. End processing). That is, in this case, in the opening period, the content of the display effect centering on the story of the character or the like is extended (developed) in a state where the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with the stopping symbol at the time of extension. It will continue to appear, after which the results will be made clear as to whether or not the jackpot was won.

  On the other hand, a normal effect pattern (see FIG. 11) different from any effect pattern of "an extension effect pattern" and "a loss effect pattern which is not an extension effect pattern but can be prepared as a pair effect of the extension effect pattern". When 246 (c) (see FIG. 249) is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery indicated by the win information command will be determined through the processing of steps S1304 to S1310.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit based on the win information command stored in the win information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 240) (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the stop symbol exclusively for big hit is determined (step S1305), the processing of step S1225a (see FIG. 242) is ended.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), a determination is made as to whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and if the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit A stop symbol dedicated to small hits will be determined (step S1307). However, when in the first effect mode, for the small hit, the effect commands are all associated with the extension effect pattern so that the presence is concealed, so in the process of step S1306 Then, it is judged that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and next, in the processing of step S1308, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a display effect (a high expectation loss effect) in which a reach is formed.

  And as a result, when it is the display production in which reach is formed, when the stop symbol of reach loss is decided (step S1309), while the processing of the said step S1225a (refer to figure 242) is completed, reach is formed. When it is not a display effect to be performed, when the irregular stop symbol with no reach formed is determined (step S1310), the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 242) is ended.

  FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and the stop symbol determination process (step S1225 b) in the second effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 244, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is read out, and The effect pattern associated with is determined (step S1321). Here, even in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. It may be In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are associated, one of the effect patterns is determined based on the result of the effect drawing using a predetermined effect random number, or any effect based on the type of the big hit It will determine the pattern.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, a stop symbol (symbol combination at stop) appearing when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to the stop of the variation of the special symbol when the lottery result in which the winning ball can be obtained is obtained ( Based on the fact that the fixed stop command is set, the stop symbol (specific display image) at the time of hitting is to be stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, a big hit is made based on the win information command stored in the win information storage area in the process of step S1106 (see FIG. 240). A determination is made as to whether the result of the lottery is a hit (a big hit or a small hit) for which a winning ball can be obtained (step S1322, step S1324). Then, as a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit or small hit) for which winning balls can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324) When the bonus challenge stop symbol which can be grasped is determined (step S1323), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 242) is ended. In addition, as a bonus challenge stop symbol, for example, a special symbol that is not a component of a big hit symbol combination is made to appear in its variation, and the symbol combination at the time of stop includes the same special symbol, etc. can do.

  In this case, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small number of award balls (about 40 to 50 in the present embodiment)) of award balls can be obtained in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears. The player is provided with an opportunity to obtain a winning ball as it is played, and the other is a round lottery element such as how many winning balls can be added as a bonus. The challenge bonus effect will be performed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the big hit lottery is not the hit (big hit or small hit) for which the winning balls can be obtained (NO in any of the step S1322 and the step S1324), the next step S1325 is performed. A determination is made as to whether the display effect is to form a reach.

  And as a result, when it is the display production in which reach is formed, when the stop symbol of reach loss is decided (step S1326), while the processing of the said step S1225b (refer to figure 242) is completed, reach is formed. When it is not the display effect to be performed, when the irregular stop symbol with no reach formed is determined (step S1327), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 242) is ended.

  Hereinafter, an example of the display effect that appears when the various types of processing (steps S1210 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is advanced will be described. FIG. 246 is a time chart showing an example of display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

[About an extension effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command "01H"]
As shown in FIG. 246 (a), the variation time shown in FIG. 237 is based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a has won a big hit when it is currently set to the first effect mode. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of big hit corresponding to the effect command "01H" (for example, a specific mission a The dynamic presentation of the extended rendering pattern is started with the content of whether or not the character A can succeed (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy). And the extended effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is in a situation where the timing t1 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1 This is continued without ending the display effect a (without making the specific mission a success or failure).

  Further, at the time of the dynamic display of the extension effect pattern at the time of the effect command "01H", the variation of the decorative symbol is also started. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is decided and stopped at the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the lost stop mode at the time of extension.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is determined and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the losing stop mode during extension within the fluctuation time Ta1. Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1. For example, continued expectation effects (for example, whether or not the character A which has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can stand up) whether or not this is continued are performed.

  That is, in this case, the display effect a (not developed, lost) corresponding to the command “03H” shown in FIG. 237 is prepared, so that the display effect a is obtained even after the timing t1. When this is continued, this will function as “display effect after development a (representation in which the chance for the specific mission a to be successful is left)”. Therefore, when the "display effect after development a" appears, the special symbol is displayed from the player's side despite the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be understood as something that is still fluctuating. Further, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also be understood as being in the state of temporary stop, although it is in the situation after being decided and stopped, and thus, at the time of the above-mentioned extension It is possible to show that the chance to be shown that the jackpot is won in the form of being overturned is still left.

  However, at this time, the extended rendering pattern (rendering command “01H”) having the content of the display rendering a is performed in the large display region (the center or the entire display region) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Above, with regard to the variable display of the decorative symbol, such display effect a should be performed only in a small display area (an inconspicuous place such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. But let the player know the result of the big hit lottery by whether or not the specific mission a in the display effect a can be made successful without letting the player pay attention to the movement of the decorative symbol (display the result by the character) More desirable for doing.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the actual effect Even though the decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production at the time of temporary stop (for example, the character A which has been attacked by the enemy and fallen) has such a sense of expectation While being held, "display effect after development a" will appear. In this “display effect after development a”, the time until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used to display, for example, a situation in which the character A faces the enemy again, and so on. An instruction is made as to whether the mission a can be made successful.

  However, as described later, such “display effect a after development (effect on whether or not a specific mission a can be made successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100 a side is shown in FIG. 237. It is performed also in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command "02H". And as described above, in the display effect a (small hit), it is a big hit in the display effect a (small hit) so that it is difficult to notice that the small hit is the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the small hit when in the first effect mode. It is more desirable to shift to the next change (reserve digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", the specific effect is given until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period arrives. An indication as to whether or not a specific mission a can be made successful (a character A mounts an attack on the enemy and this succeeds) without showing how the mission a succeeded (the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown Only the effect (such as whether or not to appear). As a result, a big hit explicit rendition a can be appeared in a form showing that a specific mission a succeeds after the end timing t2 of the first closed control period, and is associated with the rendition command "01H" The display effect pattern that is being played comes to function as "a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

  However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closed control period having a fixed length is finished, the closed control period is extended in a form of having an indefinite length. The closed control period of 2 is to appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents (big hit explicit effect a) in the extended effect pattern at the big hit and the opening effect before the big hit game (starting the big hit game by performing the right hitting game) It is designed to be able to be performed) Then, when the game ball passes through the special view gate 2500 (timing tx) as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, the second closing control The period is over, and thus the big hit game and the big hit game in-progress will be started. The details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (a), but the second closed control period from timing t2 to timing tx is ended based on the operation handle portion 410 being operated. (For example, since the first closing control period having a fixed length is completed, the special view gate 2500 is played by operating the operation handle portion 410. If you play a game to pass the ball, the big hit explicit production a and the opening production etc are cut at that point, or the production itself is almost not made to appear (play production), to the next production (production in the big hit game) It will be forced to proceed.

[About an extension effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command "02H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won, as shown in FIG. 237. Assuming that the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the variation time Ta1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 And display effect a at the time of a small hit corresponding to the effect command “02H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission a can be made successful (a character A can defeat an enemy, etc.) Dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having contents is started. And in the case of the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 246 (a)), the extended effect pattern (the effect command "02H") having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is also associated with the effect command "01H" Similarly, even in the situation where the timing t1 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2 comes, without ending the display effect a (without making the specific mission a success or failure) ) Let this continue.

  In addition, also at the time of the dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H", the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, an extension effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” (FIG. 246) also regarding the point at which the change of the decorative symbol is decided and stopped at the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped. It is the same as the case of (a) reference). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the single display mode is adopted although the lottery result of the big hit is different, and the display modes are distinguished. It has not been done.

  Furthermore, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension in this way, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2. As for a, as to the continuation expectation effect as to whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can stand up) The same as in the case of the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 246 (a)) associated with the effect command “01H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H", in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, In fact, although the decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production at the time of temporary stop (for example, character A which has been attacked by an enemy and has fallen) such expectation Under a sense of feeling, "a display effect after development a" will appear. Then, in this “display effect after development a”, for example, the situation in which the character A confronts the enemy again is displayed using the time until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, etc. An indication is made as to whether or not the specific mission a can be made successful.

  Furthermore, in the same way, until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period arrives, the situation in which the specific mission a succeeds (the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the specific An effect on whether or not the mission a can be made successful (an effect such as whether the character A attacks the enemy and this succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (b), the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H" has a fixed length. After the end of the first closing control period, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t2 of the first closed control period, it is specified until the end timing t3 of the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening game (small hitting game) at the time of the effect command "02H". The loss explicit rendition a will appear in a form showing that the mission a has failed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a”.

  In this loss explicit production a, for example, the attack by the character A is diverted and the enemy escapes, and then, a scene that the character A regrets is projected, etc., and it is performed as a hit effect of a big hit.

  According to the extension effect pattern associated with such effect commands "01H" and "02H", the opening end timing t3 of the special winning opening 2003 from the start timing t0 of the special symbol (or the second closed control period Since the time until the end of the jackpot explicit effect a) in the inside will function as one effect depending on the hit of the big hit, it becomes possible to direct the player's gaze to such an effect, It is possible to make it hard to notice the opening of the big winning opening 2003 when the loss explicit presentation a is being performed and, consequently, the pachinko machine 1 on which the small hit is mounted.

  In addition, in order to obtain such effects, even if the player confirms that the special winning opening 2003 is open, no information is obtained (an event that may be a reason for confirming the opening). It is important to keep the configuration excluded. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 where a big hit game can be executed to open the big winning opening 2003 in the same or similar opening mode as a small opening game (small hit game), by confirming the opening, After that, it becomes possible to recognize that the gaming state may be changed on condition of the operation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that can be an opportunity to quit the game, that the player has won the jackpot with a small number of games that do not meet the low winning probability of the jackpot, he pays attention to the opening of the big prize port 2003. It may also contribute to causing

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command "03H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (a pure loss Based on the fact that the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of the loss corresponding to the effect command "03H" (for example, whether a specific mission a can be made successful (character A The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the content of whether or not the player can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is displayed when the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped by the elapse of the change time Ta3 This is ended without extending the effect a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative symbol is also started at the time of the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (without development) at the time of the loss corresponding to the effect command "03H". In addition, in this variation of the decorative symbol, when the final symbol is stopped at the extension at the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the missing period at the extension. ing. In addition, as for the lost stop mode at the time of extension, a single display mode is made to appear at the time of the big hit, the case of the small hit, and the time of the lost.

  In addition, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta3. As for the point that it is made to perform continued expectation rendering (for example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can rise and stand, etc.) as to whether or not this is continued. The same as in the case of the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 246 (a) and (b)) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command "03H", the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example It is shown that the fallen character A does not stand up in response to an attack), and the player is made to know that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern continued even after timing t1 shown in FIGS. 246 (a), (b), (d) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development become.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode, the effect command "04H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (d), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (pure Based on the fact that a loss) has been obtained, a variation on a special symbol having a variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 237 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t3) Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a (for example, whether a specific mission a can be made successful (character The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of whether or not A can defeat the enemy is started. However, in the case of the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, although the display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is a non-extended display effect pattern Even when the timing t1 has arrived by the passage of the fluctuation time ta1 to ta3 of the special symbol, the display effect a is not ended (without the success or failure of the specific mission a) being continued. . Furthermore, in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern (render command “04H”), although the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the variation of the decorative symbol is also continued without ending at the timing t1. It has become.

  That is, in the case of a loss (pure loss), unlike in the case of a big hit or a small hit, the time required for the opening control of the big winning opening 2003 is maintained as well prior to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 It is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol since the first closing control period is also immediately prepared for the next fluctuation without preparation.

  Regarding the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with this point, the effect command "04H", in the main control MPU 4100a, from the fluctuation start timing t0 at the time of small hit to the open end timing t3 of the big winning opening 2003. It is prepared as one to be adopted when a fluctuation time Ta4 of a length matched to this is selected with reference to the time. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) corresponding to the effect commands "01H" to "03H", the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 Although the effect with the content of appears, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, and it is a display effect having a longer time in the first place.

  That is, in this case, with regard to any of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, although any of these variations is not decided to stop with the lost stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1, among the symbols, the decorative symbol is selected. As in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", the fluctuation time Ta4 is extended before the timing t1, which is only a halfway stage, with respect to the fluctuation time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the lost stop mode. Then, whether or not the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 arrives while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension in this way. For example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can rise can be performed. In addition, the lost stop mode at the time of extension is a single display even though the result of the big hit and the variation time are different between the time of the big hit, the time of the small hit and the time of the loss (pure loss). An aspect is adopted, and the display aspect is not distinguished.

  And, in this way, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production (for example, the character A which has fallen due to the attack from the enemy has risen up) such a feeling of expectation is held By this, “display effect a after development” will appear. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the fluctuation state again, and similarly to the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, for the display effect a Stop in a small display area (an end portion of the display area, etc.) in the small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (determination stop in the case of “01H” to “03H”, temporary in the case of “04H” Stop) is maintained until the timing t2.

  In this "display effect a after development", there is an effect as to whether or not the specific mission a can be made successful, for example, a situation in which the character A confronts the enemy again is projected within the fluctuation time Ta4. To be done. However, as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the situation in which the specific mission a succeeds (the character A is an enemy until the timing t2 comes) Not to be shown, but to make only a rendition as to whether or not the specific mission a can be made successful (a rendition such as whether the character A attacks the enemy and this will be successful) ing.

  Then, after timing t2, the specific mission a fails until the end timing t3 of the control for opening the large winning opening 2003 in the small open hit game (small hit game) for the effect command “02H”. The loss explicit rendition a will appear in the form shown. In this lost explicit effect a, as in the case of the effect command "02H", for example, the attack by the character A is diverted and the enemy escapes, and then the character A shows a state of regret, etc. It is performed as a disappointing effect. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a”.

  As described above, in the first effect mode, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a specific loss effect pattern (rendering command “display effect a (display effect a)) appears When performing display control according to “04H”), when a specific variation time (variation time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side, within the determined particular variation time (variation time Ta4) Display control according to a specific loss effect pattern is performed in a form in which a specific effect content (display effect a) appears. Nevertheless, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit, a specific effect content (display effect a) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the specific lost effect pattern (rendering command “04H”) When performing display control according to the hit effect pattern (render command “01H”), the main control MPU 4100a determines a fluctuation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the above-mentioned specific fluctuation time (variation time Ta4). Not only the determined short variation time (variation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closed control period, second closed control period) as the presentation time To perform display control concerning a specific hit presentation pattern in the form that a specific presentation content (display presentation a) appears within this presentation time It was.

  According to such an effect method, the falling effect as to whether or not the hit is won and the opening effect are performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 even in the predetermined interval period after the stop of the special symbol. Become. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut to advance effects and games, and it is possible to realize a good tempo progression (game progress). In addition, when the display effect pattern of such specific effect contents (display effect a) appears, a noteworthy effect element will be added also in terms of whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle stage, When it is confirmed that the stop is confirmed, it is possible to grasp that the opportunity to obtain the winning balls by the opening of the big winning opening 2003 can be grasped, so that it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In addition, for the extended rendering pattern for the rendering command "01H" and "02H", the "display rendering a after development" is made by preparing the display rendering pattern for the rendering command "04H". It becomes possible to avoid having to set the big hit expectation at the time of appearing within the range restricted by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, it is avoided that the small hit is installed Even under such a rendering system that makes it difficult to recognize things, it is possible to perform rendering design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG. 237.

  Further, in the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H", since the special symbol is also changing after the timing t1, there is no problem even if the fluctuation state of the special symbol is confirmed by the player. Absent. Then, by preparing such non-extension effect patterns in combination with the extension effect patterns, it is possible for the player, even when the stop state of the special symbol in the extension effect patterns is confirmed. It will be possible to encourage awareness that may be a mistake.

  Further, in the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H", since the special winning opening 2003 is not opened when the loss explicit effect a is being performed, the case where the special winning opening 2003 is confirmed for the player There is no problem even if it exists. Then, by preparing such a non-open loss explicit presentation a in a form to be mixed with the loss explicit presentation a at the time of the above production command “02H”, the opening of the special winning opening 2003 in the loss explicit presentation a Even if is confirmed, it is possible to encourage the player to be aware that it may be a mistake.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern for the effect commands "01H", "02H", and "04H", a specific mission a is required until the timing t2 arrives. Whether or not the character has succeeded (if the character A defeats the enemy) is not indicated, but whether or not the specific mission a is succeeded prior to the arrival of the timing t2 (the character A is It may be shown whether or not to defeat the enemy. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, a big hit explicit rendition or a loss explicit rendition will be performed. In addition to the fact that most of the first closed control period of is used for the display effect a, after that, the appearance of the big hit such as showing the appearance that the character A regrets appears, the lost selection effect of the big hit It can be made to shift to the next change (reserve digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being sent.

  By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a in the first effect mode. It is. And, the player is not aware of the existence of a small hit which is not particularly required to realize such game characteristics (representation) in the first effect mode, and the big hit is won with the winning probability of the big hit. You will enjoy the game about whether or not you

  However, even when one of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a The effect command from the side “01H” to “04H” The contents of this itself as well as the fact that there is no change in that it is usually an external disadvantage gaming state, a large winning opening 2003 by winning a small hit Opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening of the big winning prize port 2003 as compared with the time of being in the first presentation mode by reversing and positively adopting the display presentation pattern of the presentation contents assuming the opening of To achieve a playability (rendering effect) as if it had been significantly increased.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the second effect mode, the effect command "01H"]
That is, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), it is shown in FIG. 237 based on the big hit being won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second effect mode is set now. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having fluctuation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of display effect a 'at the time of big hit corresponding to effect command "01H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative symbol are respectively started.

  However, the content of the display effect a ′ in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect a in the first effect mode, and for example, can a specific mission a ′ be successful (this implementation? In the form of, a display effect pattern (challenge with a content such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the special winning opening 2003 is open and determined) It is prepared as a bonus effect pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least at a central portion of the display area or the like, which is easily noticed). As described above, in the second effect mode, the movement of the decorative symbol is focused on, and the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line, depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed. The player is made to grasp the result of the lottery.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display mode of the decorative symbol is made different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, while the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly consisting of characters In the second effect mode, etc., the decorative symbol is set as a display form that is more easily noticed.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern for the effect command "01H", such a decorative symbol is stopped, for example, with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a 'having contents such as an appropriate character struggles to appear is displayed, and at the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003. In order to make it possible for the player to know what is being done, the decoration symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is decided and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closed control period, and the player wins by opening the big winning opening 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect about how much the number of award balls to be made is possible, the countdown effect a 'in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed It is like that.

  Here, with the countdown effect a ', as described above, for example, while aiming at the special view gate 2500 by right-handed game, a countdown display of, for example, about 3 to 5 seconds is performed. When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation when the countdown display changes to "0", the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 immediately after the first closing control period ends. become.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a ', when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the same effect, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the end timing t2 of the first closed control period is When the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 immediately after the arrival of the second symbol, the end timing tx of the second closed control period comes earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect regarding how much the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closed control period comes. In the effect, it is indicated which opening mode (game for long opening, game for medium opening, game for small opening), etc. will be displayed when the special winning opening 2003 is opened. That is, in this case, the player will launch a game ball to the large winning opening 2003 even in the small opening hit game (small hit game) as well as the big hit game, and thereby the first effect mode Compared with the above, the game effect (rendering effect) as if the opportunity frequency of winning balls for winning balls by opening the big winning opening 2003 is greatly increased will be realized. The details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, this is also described above with reference to FIG. 245 (c), but in such a big hit challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect a 'changes to "0" It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the handle portion 410 is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in the second closed control period, the countdown display is “0” in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable in order to weaken the player's interest which causes such a situation, to prevent new appearances from appearing, such as being displayed as “”.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern appears, such a situation that the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the jackpot is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( It can not occur in the case of FIGS. 245 (d) and 246 (b). That is, in this case, the amount of award balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is eliminated while being in a state of stagnation (no stage) in which no effect is newly performed. In addition to this, this will be dramatically enhanced with regard to the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the second effect mode, the effect command "02H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), when the second effect mode is set, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side, FIG. Assuming that the fluctuation corresponding to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta2 (described here as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a 'at the time of the small hit corresponding to the effect command "02H" and the fluctuation of the decorative symbol are respectively started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the contents of the display effect a ′ started in this way is also, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Ta2 until the timing t1 comes. A display effect a 'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop pattern appears is displayed, and at a timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the winning ball can be obtained by opening the winning opening 2003. It becomes. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  However, as mentioned above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a fixed length), and when the timed up of the timer, the special drawing gate A small open hit game (small hit game) is started regardless of the presence or absence of passing of the game ball to 2500 (see FIG. 233).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "02H", as in the case of the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "01H", the decorative symbol When the game is decided and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the first closed control period is used, and the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening 2003 is As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect as to whether it is an object, a countdown effect a ′ in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed.

  That is, in the display effect pattern in the second effect mode, the big hit and the small hit are both treated as opening for the big winning opening 2003, and the variation of the decorative symbol is started. It is not distinguished in the effect contents from the timing t0 until the challenge bonus effect is performed, and when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the effect, the countdown effect a 'is preceded by an advance effect (not shown) and the challenge is made. The challenge bonus effect is started by the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big hit challenge bonus effect pattern (render command “01H”), which leads to the bonus effect. Therefore, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit that can be obtained winning balls by opening the big winning opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, the long open hit From the game and the middle opening game, it is possible to perform the effect display on which game mode appears, including the small opening hit game as well as the game. As a result, as compared with the case in the first effect mode, the game characteristic (rendering ability) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning balls by opening the big winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. . In addition, among the big hit A to E and the small hit, it is small in view of the fact that the small open per game will end in a relatively short time among the long open per play, middle open per play, small open per play games. As to whether or not the hit is won, the player may be made comprehensible by displaying a specific image which does not appear at the time of the big hit in the effect in the first closing control period.

Thus, although the display effect pattern for the effect command "02H" is a display effect pattern based on one effect command,
・ Extended rendering pattern in the first rendering mode, which is treated as a no-chance loss (in the same manner as the rendering pattern for pure loss (rendering command “04H”)) in which the small hit is won and the opportunity to acquire the ball is not given. Non-extendable display effect pattern (second effect mode) treated as a high chance hit where a small hit is awarded and an opportunity to acquire a ball is granted (similar to a big hit effect pattern (render command “01H”) Challenge bonus effect pattern)
Is selectively executed as That is, in this case, the effect information pertaining to the event is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side, whereby the effect of the main control MPU 4100a can be varied widely without changing the logic one by one. It can be realized.

  Furthermore, speaking further, small open games (small hit games) are not only the fact that only a small number of winning balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a bonus. Since the game state is not shifted to a game state more advantageous to the player than before the small opening game (small hit game) is performed, the game interest is lowered despite the opening and closing member 2006 being operated. It can be said that the handling on the game setting needs attention at a point that is important. Therefore, in the prior art, when loading a small hit, a small opening per play (small hit game) and a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a game (small hit game), and a specific function functioning to shift to an advantageous gaming state thereafter First, prepare a winning type, and in a situation where a small opening game (small hitting game) is performed, make the player aware of the possibility of being a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type. Therefore, it was supposed that the main purpose was to maintain the fun of the game when a small open game was played (small hit game). However, even if it is such a conventional gaming machine, when it is elected to a specific winning type, it is finally decided to be a big hit at the probability of winning the big hit which is set extremely low in the normal gaming state Nevertheless, the decline in game interest (the decrease in game interest due to the gap between the jackpot probability and the jackpot real probability) due to the fact that the prize balls commensurate with this low probability can not be obtained is becoming inevitable The

  In this respect, with the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when carrying a small hit, a big hit game is performed with a behavior similar to a small open hit game (small hit game) and an advantageous game state thereafter With the conventional gaming machine, the technical idea is to suppress the decline in the fun of the game when a small open game is played (small hit game), in that a specific winning species that functions to shift to the second game is not prepared. In the first place it is a big difference.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when installing the small hit, the jackpot type (big hit) so that a plurality of types of big hit games different in the amount of prize balls obtainable by the player can be executed. A, jackpot B to E) will be prepared. And, when opening the big winning opening 2003, first, the lottery result where the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is determined in the big hit lottery (big hit A, which is expected to get a large amount of payouts, middle volume is expected to be won Display effect on whether or not a big hit B to E, a small hit expected to obtain a small amount of withdrawal balls has been obtained is performed (a challenge bonus I have to). As a result, when it is indicated that the lottery result is obtained, it is possible for the player to be able to grasp that at least a small amount of balls can be obtained. After that, there will be more challenge bonus effects on how much extra balls can be piled up (can be piled up from getting a small amount of balls out to medium or large amounts of balls out) It is like that.

  Furthermore, when there is an increase in the number of winning balls, there is a possibility that a change to a game state (a game state in which the probability variation function or the time reduction function is activated) advantageous to the player may be made. In this respect, in this embodiment, depending on how many balls are piled up (big hit A where a large amount of balls are expected to be obtained or big hit B to E where medium amounts of balls are expected to be obtained) The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function (the probability of transition to the game state in which the probability variation function is activated) is made different. That is, in this case, after the opening of the special winning opening 2003 is finished, the challenge is as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes are provided so that the probability of changing to the gaming state where the probability fluctuation function operates is different. It will function as a bonus effect. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus presentation, a higher probability that the winning probability "3/400" without the activation of the conditional device is added to the winning probability "1/400" with the activation of the conditional device Not only that a winning ball can be paid out to the player with "1/100" (in other words, that the opening and closing member 2006 operates), it can be shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You will also be able to make them aware.

  In this embodiment, the expectation for the operation of the probability variation function (probability variation expectation at the time of big hit A) when being stacked until it is possible to obtain a large amount of balls is 100%, and at least the middle The expectation (the probability change expectation for big hit A to E) for the operation of the probability fluctuation function when it is piled up until it is possible to get out the amount of balls is 82%, and it is possible to obtain medium amount of balls out The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (when it is jackpot B to E) is 61.7%, and there are many expectations for the number of balls that can be acquired. The more you are in the situation, the higher the probability change expectation.

  Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus effect, since it is positioned as a default effect state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, it is possible to obtain a large amount of balls according to the jackpot winning. Unlike a conventional gaming machine in which whether or not a basic game (basic effect) is made, even when a small opening game (small hit game) is performed in which a small amount of balls can be obtained, Since only the big winning opening 2003 is opened in a form in line with the default rendering state, the decrease in the game entertainment will be suppressed. Furthermore, when it is in the second effect mode, the probability of appearance of a hit effect (probability of entering into a challenge bonus) is determined by the fact that it is positioned as a default effect state that a small amount of withdrawal balls can be obtained. ) Is also set to a higher probability (the probability of winning a big hit to the probability of winning a big hit plus the probability of winning a small hit), and this makes it possible to play the game by not being able to obtain a prize ball for a low probability. Deterioration of interest is also avoided.

  And, in order to be provided with a challenge bonus effect pattern that realizes such game and effect in the second effect mode, a lottery for a small hit is performed also in the first effect mode, as a matter of course, At the time of the small hit, the variation time Ta2 to Td2 having a length matched to the variation time Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, essentially no small hit is necessary, and a display effect as to whether or not a big hit has been won is basically performed based on the big hit probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the player is a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit, but the variation of the special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 In the case of simply adopting the presentation method in which the result of the big hit lottery appears at the time of stop, after the stop of the special symbol, the opening period in the execution of small open hit game (small hit game) and the open period of the big winning opening 2003 thereafter The presence of the game may be noticeable, and the game interest may decline.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, there is a timing t1 at which the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set (at the end of the variation of the special symbol) Also, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended but is continued. In addition, when entering the first closed control period, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at timing t1, but peripheral control MPU 4140a indicates that special winning opening 2003 is opened. The setting of the same command is ignored without switching to interval production, and the display presentation on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. Then, when it is at timing t2 when the first close control period ends and the second close control period starts, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big hit lottery is the hit with the operation of the condition device It is executed in the form of switching to an explicit presentation where the information on whether or not it is (big hit) is shown, and further an opening presentation.

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned small hit production is positioned as one production that appears at the time of the big hit, but also after the stop of the special symbol, the first closing for the small open hit game (small hit game) A display effect concerning the next fluctuation (the special symbol's reserve and digest) relatively quickly after showing that it is a big hit by showing the control period and the opening period of the big winning a prize mouth 2003 thereafter. Will be able to shift to As a result, the presentation proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called high expectation lost presentation, so the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not accompany the operation of the condition device. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that, in turn, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 in response to the small hit.

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, in particular, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is the first effect mode. And a second effect mode, and the mode forcible control means is provided for creating a mode forcible period in which a change by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode is not permitted. ing. Then, on this, the first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hole is forcibly determined to be the first effect mode, and the first predetermined period has elapsed. The control according to creation of the mode forcible period is performed so as to forcibly determine the second predetermined period (for example, for the next one month) after that to the second effect mode.

  According to such a mode compulsory period, the hole side conceals the player against the small hit even though the small hit is loaded by the appearance of the extension effect pattern as described above during the first predetermined period. The player is presented with the winning ball to the player under the jackpot probability of "1/400" by performing the hit display in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the jackpot probability of "1/400" while making the jackpot. It is possible to start the operation of the first gaming specification pachinko machine that can be paid out (the first renewal opening store). Also, in this way, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed, the opening of the large winning opening 2003 enables the winning ball to be obtained, and the big hit as well as the small hit is one of the types. By making the above-mentioned challenge bonus effect pattern to be treated appear, combined with the fact that the presence of the small hit is made difficult to notice in the first predetermined period, the jackpot probability is higher than the “1/400” winning probability. The hit display is performed in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the probability “1/100”.

  That is, in this case, the winning balls can be paid out to the player under the higher probability "1/100" obtained by adding the small hit probability "3/400" to the jackpot probability "1/400" It will be possible to start the operation of a new second game specification pachinko machine (second new store opening). Thereby, although it is the pachinko machine 1 which is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine having a different game specification for taking out balls as well as the contents of presentation on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is newly operated. It will be possible to give the player an impression like a vibes.

  Furthermore, according to such a forced mode period, it is determined that the predetermined month and day (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and it is determined that the specified date and time (second predetermined period) are present. Not only the change control from the first effect mode is not permitted, but also the effect control with some of the effect modes (second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes still hidden without appearing Will be done. That is, in this case, as the date passes since the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall, the rendering function which has been hidden until then becomes gradually exposed, and finally it becomes Since it becomes possible to selectively use the rendered function by the operation of the player, it is possible to maintain the game interest over a long day.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the second effect mode, the effect command "03H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (a pure loss Based on the fact that the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is If it is started (timing t0), in liquid crystal display device 1400, dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of display effect a 'at the time of loss associated with effect command "03H" , And start the variation of the decoration pattern.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a ′ started in this way is also, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Ta3 until the timing t1 comes. A display effect a 'appears with content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is decidedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without any effort by the appropriate character. It becomes (a challenge bonus presentation pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "03H" functions as "a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a '".

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H” is set to “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit when the “extension effect pattern” is adopted. Because there is a gap in the rendering time at the event, it can not function as a rendering pattern at the time of losing to the rendering pattern with the content of the display rendering a at the time of the big hit, and the content of the display rendering a develops As described above, it will function only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a 'at the time of the big hit when the effect command "01H" is "non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern Since it appears as “), there is no shift in the rendering time with the same rendering pattern (rendering command“ 01H ”), and a rendering pattern (rendering command“ with rendering a 'at the time of a big hit ” 01H ′ ′) functions as an effect pattern (a bonus challenge stop pattern does not appear on a predetermined symbol line) at the time of losing. Also, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a 'at the time of the small hit when the effect command "02H" is also the effect at the time of the hit Since it appears as a pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line), a effect pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined one) at the time of losing also for this effect pattern (render command “02H”) It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the symbol line.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the second effect mode, the effect command "04H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (d), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (pure Based on the fact that a loss) has been obtained, a variation on a special symbol having a variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 237 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t3) Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "04H" Is started.

  That is, for the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H", when the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H" is in the first effect mode, it has the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit. In view of the fact that it can not function as a rendering pattern at the time of loss with respect to the rendering pattern (rendering command “01H”), in order to compensate this (the rendering pattern at the time of losing in the first rendering mode) It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" adopts the "non-extended effect pattern" when in the second effect mode, contrary to the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H". There will be a gap in the rendering time between the rendering pattern (rendering command "01H") with the content of the display effect a 'at the time of the big hit being performed, and the rendering with the content of the display effect a' at the big hit It can not function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the pattern.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time Tc1 for the fluctuation number “9” shown in FIG. 237 and the fluctuation time Tc2 for the fluctuation number “10” are indicated by the fluctuation number “4”. Is prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 at the time of. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (a) described later) having the content of the display effect c 'at the time of the big hit when the effect command "09H" Since it appears as an extended display effect pattern, there is no occurrence of a gap in the effect time with the same effect pattern (render command “09H”). Therefore, with regard to the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "04H", when it is in the second effect mode, it is not having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of the loss associated with the effect command "04H" By starting it as a dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus at the time of losing) to the effect pattern (rendering command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit The challenge stop symbol is made to function as an effect pattern) which does not appear on a predetermined symbol line.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern (render command “04H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ started in this way, such a decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the fluctuation time Ta4 until the timing t3 comes. A display effect c 'appears with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is decidedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without any effort by the appropriate character. Become.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" appears when the specific lost change time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (change time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It becomes a thing that can function as each missing display effect pattern for the big hit display effect pattern of two types of effect contents a and c ', and functions as a missing display effect pattern for any of those big hit display effect patterns The selection is selectively made based on which of the first effect mode and the second effect mode is set. Thus, with regard to the two big hit presentation commands "01H" and "09H", the big hit presentation commands "01H" in the first production mode and in the second production mode. The appearance probability of the lost display effect pattern prepared for the big hit display effect pattern of “09H” can be changed.

  More specifically, with regard to the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "01H", in the first effect mode, although the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is adopted as the loss effect pattern, the second In the effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of the loss is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, with regard to the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "01H", the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command "04H" is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Also, with regard to the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "09H", in the first effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern although it is not adopted. In the effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is adopted as the missing effect pattern. Therefore, with regard to the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "09H", the appearance probability for the loss effect pattern of the effect command "04H" is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, without changing the logic on the side of the main control MPU 4100a one by one, it is possible to cause a variety of display effect patterns having different degrees of expectation to appear in accordance with the effect mode (see FIG. 248).

  In addition, as a reason that such special effects can be realized, a production command in which the lengths of the respective effects are adjusted by using up to the stop timing t3 of the special symbol for one lost fluctuation time Ta4 as the production time Even with the jackpot effect pattern of "09H" and a fluctuation time Ta1 shorter than the relevant loss fluctuation time Ta4, by using at least the first closed control period after stopping the symbol as an effect time, each other's effects The big hit rendering pattern (first rendering mode) of the rendering command “01H” whose length has been adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the big hit presentation pattern adjusted in this way, the big hit presentation patterns of the presentation commands “01H” and “09H” having different fluctuation times Ta1 and Tc1 are associated with one lost fluctuation time Ta4. When this lost fluctuation time Ta4 is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can determine which of the effect contents a and c 'appear. Furthermore, even in such a first closed control period to be added as a rendering time, when it is elected to open the large winning opening 2003 (big hit or small hit), a certain length regardless of its type It is important to set it as a long time (for example, 8 seconds), in particular, to realize such a special effect by including an effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  FIG. 247 is a time chart showing an example of display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

[About the extension effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command "09H"]
As shown in FIG. 247 (a), the variation time shown in FIG. 237 is based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100 a has won a big hit when it is currently set to the first effect mode. Assuming that the variation related to the special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of big hit corresponding to the effect command "09H" (for example, a specific mission c The dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having the content of whether or not the character C can succeed (such as whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. And the extended effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c started in this way is in a situation where the timing t3 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc1 This is continued without ending the display effect c (without making the specific mission c succeed or fail).

  That is, as described above, the variation time Tc1 for the variation number "9" shown in FIG. 237 is prepared as a variation time having the same length as the variation time Ta4 for the variation number "4". Since there is such an “extended effect pattern” when it is set to the first effect mode, there is a gap in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command “04H”). Is supposed to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is in the first effect mode, the relativistic relationship (big hit effect pattern, lost effect effect) with the display effect pattern at the time of the change number "4" Pattern is not given.

  Further, at the time of the dynamic display of the extension effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H", the variation of the decorative symbol is also started. However, with regard to the variation of the decorative symbol, at the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the determination is made to stop with the lost stop mode at the time of extension.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is determined and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the losing stop mode at the extension time within the fluctuation time Tc1. Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc1. For example, continuous expectation rendering (for example, whether or not the character C falling down due to an attack from the enemy can rise) is performed as to whether or not this is continued.

  That is, in this case, the display effect c (not developed, lost) corresponding to the command “11H” shown in FIG. 237 is prepared, and the display effect c is also performed at the time when the timing t3 has passed. When this is continued, this will function as “display effect after development c (representation in which the chance for the specific mission c to be successful is left)”. Therefore, when the "display effect after development c" appears, the special symbol is displayed from the player's side, even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be understood as something that is still fluctuating. Further, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also be understood as being in the state of temporary stop, although it is in the situation after being decided and stopped, and thus, at the time of the above-mentioned extension It is possible to show that the chance to be shown that the jackpot is won in the form of being overturned is still left.

  However, at this time, the extended rendering pattern (rendering command “09H”) having the content of the display rendering c is performed in the large display region (the center or the entire display region) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Above, with regard to the variable display of the decorative symbol, such display effect c should be performed only in a small display area (an inconspicuous place such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. However, it is more desirable in order to make the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be made successful without letting the player pay attention to the movement of the decorative symbol.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the actual effect Even though the decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production at the time of temporary stop (for example, the character C that has fallen due to the attack from the enemy has risen up) such a sense of expectation While being held, "demonstration effect after development c" will appear. In this “display effect c after development”, the time until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used to display, for example, a situation in which the character C faces the enemy again, and so on. A presentation is made as to whether the mission c can be made successful.

  However, as described later, such “display effect c after development (representation as to whether or not the specific mission c can be made successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100 a side is shown in FIG. 237. It is performed also in the extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command "10H". And, as described above, in order to make it difficult to notice that the small hit is the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the small hit when in the first effect mode, the display effect c (small hit) is a big hit It is more desirable to shift to the next change (reserve digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", the specific effect is given until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period arrives. An indication as to whether or not a specific mission c can be made successful (a character C makes an attack on the enemy, and this succeeds) without showing how the mission c succeeded (the character C defeats the enemy). To make it appear. As a result, the jackpot explicit effect c can appear in a form showing that the specific mission c succeeds after the end timing t4 of the opening effect, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "09H" Is to function as "a hit presentation pattern of the presentation pattern having presentation content c".

  However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closed control period having a fixed length is finished, the closed control period is extended in a form of having an indefinite length. The closed control period of 2 is to appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents (big hit explicit effect c) in the extended effect pattern at the big hit and the opening effect before the big hit game (starting the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) It is designed to be able to be performed) Then, when the game ball passes through the special view gate 2500 (timing ty) as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, the second closing control The period is over, and thus the big hit game and the big hit game in-progress will be started. The details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (a), but the second closed control period from timing t4 to timing ty is ended based on the operation handle portion 410 being operated. (For example, since the first closing control period having a fixed length is completed, the special view gate 2500 is played by operating the operation handle portion 410. If you play a game to pass the ball, the big hit explicit production c and the opening production etc. are cut at that point, or the production itself is almost not made to appear (play production), to the next production (production in the big hit game) It will be forced to proceed.

[About the extension effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command "10H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200 (b), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won, as shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Tc2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the variation time Tc1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 A display effect c (for example, whether or not a specific mission c can be made successful (a character C can defeat an enemy, etc.) or the like) corresponding to the effect command “10H” Dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having contents is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (the effect command "10H") having the contents of the display effect c started in this way is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (a)) associated with the effect command "09H" Similarly, even in the situation where the timing t3 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2 comes, without ending the display effect c (without making the specific mission c succeed or fail) ) Let this continue.

  In addition, also at the time of the dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H", the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, an extension effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” (see FIG. 247) also for the point at which the change of the decorative symbol is decided and stopped at the timing t3 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is the same as the case of (a) reference). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the single display mode is adopted even though the lottery result is different between the big hit and the small hit. As described above, it is not done.

  Furthermore, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension in this manner, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2. As to c, as to the continuation expectation effect as to whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character C which has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can rise), etc. The same as in the case of the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (a)) associated with the effect command “09H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H", in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, In fact, although the decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production at the time of the temporary stop (for example, the character C which has been attacked by the enemy and has fallen) such expectation Under a sense of feeling, "development display effect c" will appear. Then, in this “display effect c after development”, for example, the situation in which the character C confronts the enemy again is displayed using the time until the end timing t4 of the first close control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, etc. An indication is made as to whether or not the particular mission c can be made successful.

  Furthermore, in the same way, the situation in which the specific mission c succeeds (the character C defeats the enemy) is not shown until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period comes, and the specific An effect on whether or not the mission c can be made successful (an effect such as whether the character C attacks the enemy and whether this succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (b), the extended rendering pattern having the contents of the display rendering c (small hit) associated with the rendering command "10H" has a fixed length. After the end of the first closing control period, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t4 of the first closed control period, it is specified until the end timing t5 of the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the effect command "10H". The loss explicit production c will appear in a form showing that the mission c of has failed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c”.

  In this loss explicit production c, for example, the attack by the character C is diverted and the enemy escapes, and then, a picture showing that the character C regrets is displayed, etc. To be done.

  According to the extended effect pattern associated with such effect commands "09H" and "10H", the opening end timing t5 of the special winning opening 2003 from the start timing t0 of the special symbol (or the second closed control period Since the time until the end of the jackpot explicit effect c) in the inside will function as one effect depending on the hit of the big hit, it becomes possible to direct the player's gaze to such an effect, It is possible to make it hard to notice the opening of the large winning opening 2003 when the loss explicit effect c is being performed and, consequently, the pachinko machine 1 on which the small hit is mounted.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command "11H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (a pure loss Based on the fact that the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” (for example, can a specific mission c be made successful (character C The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the content of whether or not the player can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command “11H”) having the contents of the display effect c started in this way is displayed when the timing t3 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped by the elapse of the change time Tc3 This is ended (in the form of failing a specific mission c) without extending the effect c.

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative symbol is also started at the time of the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (without development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command "11H". In addition, in this variation of the decorative symbol, when the final symbol is stopped at the extension at the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the missing period at the extension. ing.

  In addition, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc3. As for the point that it is made to perform the continuous expectation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C which has fallen due to the attack from the enemy can rise and stand etc.) about whether or not this is continued. This is the same as the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 247 (a) and (b)) associated with the commands "09 H" and "10 H".

  However, in the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (without development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command "11H", the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy It is shown that the character C falling down due to an attack does not stand up) and the player is made to know that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues even after timing t3 shown in FIGS. 247 (a) and (b) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, whether or not the specific mission c has succeeded until the timing t4 comes, even in the display effect pattern for the effect commands “09H” and “10H” Whether (character C defeats the enemy or not) is not shown, but it is determined whether or not the specific mission c is successful prior to the arrival of timing t 4 (character C defeats the enemy Or not may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, a big hit explicit rendition or a loss explicit rendition will be performed. In addition to the fact that most of the first closed control period of is used for the display effect c, after that, the appearance of the big hit such as showing the appearance that the character C regrets appears, the lost selection effect of the big hit It can be made to shift to the next change (reserve digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being sent.

  As described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a in the first effect mode. It is. And, the player is not aware of the existence of a small hit which is not particularly required to realize such game characteristics (representation) in the first effect mode, and the big hit is won with the winning probability of the big hit. You will enjoy the game about whether or not you

  However, even if one of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a From the side of the effect command "09H"-"11H" itself itself, in addition to the fact that usually there is no change in the external disadvantaged gaming state, there has been no change in the big winning opening 2003 by winning a small hit Opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening of the big winning prize port 2003 as compared with the time of being in the first presentation mode by reversing and positively adopting the display presentation pattern of the presentation contents assuming the opening of To achieve a playability (rendering effect) as if it had been significantly increased.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the second effect mode, the effect command "09H"]
That is, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), it is shown in FIG. 237 based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a has won a big hit when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the change related to the special symbol having the change time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of big hit corresponding to the effect command "09H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative symbol are respectively started.

  However, the content of the display effect c 'in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect c in the first effect mode. For example, whether a specific mission c' can be made successful In the form of, a display effect pattern (challenge with a content such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the special winning opening 2003 is open and determined) It is prepared as a bonus effect pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least at a central portion of the display area or the like, which is easily noticed). As described above, in the second effect mode, the movement of the decorative symbol is focused on, and the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line, depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed. The player is made to grasp the result of the lottery.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) for the effect command "09H", for example, such a decorative symbol is a bonus challenge stop symbol in the fluctuation time Tc1 until the timing t3 comes. The display effect c 'with contents such as an appropriate character struggles to make a stop display with a stop display mode appear, and at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the big winning opening 2003 is opened. In order to make it possible for the player to be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is decided and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closed control period, and the player wins by opening the big winning opening 2003. A countdown effect c 'in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect c' on how much the number of award balls allowed is. To do.

  Here, with the countdown effect c ', as described above, for example, while aiming at the special figure gate 2500 by right-handed game, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds is performed, for example. When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation when the countdown display changes to "0", the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 immediately after the first closing control period ends. become. However, although this countdown effect c 'is different from the countdown effect a' described above, the countdown effect c 'will be performed as different effect contents (for example, different background colors, etc.) since the degree of expectation is different. I have to.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c ', when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the same effect, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), the end timing t4 of the first closed control period is When the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 immediately after the arrival of the second symbol, the end timing ty of the second close control period comes earlier than in the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect regarding how much the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closed control period comes. In the effect, it is indicated which opening mode (game for long opening, game for medium opening, game for small opening), etc. will be displayed when the special winning opening 2003 is opened. That is, in this case, the player will launch a game ball to the large winning opening 2003 even in the small opening hit game (small hit game) as well as the big hit game, and thereby the first effect mode Compared with the above, the game effect (rendering effect) as if the opportunity frequency of winning balls for winning balls by opening the big winning opening 2003 is greatly increased will be realized. The details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, although this is also described above with reference to FIG. 245 (c), in such a big hit challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect c 'changes to "0". It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the handle portion 410 is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in the second closed control period, the countdown display is “0” in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable in order to weaken the player's interest which causes such a situation, to prevent new appearances from appearing, such as being displayed as “”.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern appears, such a situation that the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the jackpot is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( It can not occur in the case of FIGS. 245 (d) and 247 (b). That is, in this case, the amount of award balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is eliminated while being in a state of stagnation (no stage) in which no effect is newly performed. In addition to this, this will be dramatically enhanced with regard to the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the second effect mode, the effect command "10H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), when the second effect mode is set, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100 a side, FIG. Assuming that the fluctuation corresponding to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of the small hit corresponding to the effect command "10H" and the variation of the decorative symbol are started respectively.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “10H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ started in this way is also, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Tc2 until the timing t3 comes. In addition, a display effect c 'having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop pattern appears is displayed, and at a timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "10H" functions as "a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c '".

  However, as mentioned above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a fixed length), and when the timed up of the timer, the special drawing gate A small open hit game (small hit game) is started regardless of the presence or absence of passing of the game ball to 2500 (see FIG. 233).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "10H", as in the case of the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "09H", the decorative symbol When the game is decided and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the first closed control period is used, and the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening 2003 is As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect as to whether it is an object, a countdown effect c 'is performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in the display effect pattern in the second effect mode, the big hit and the small hit are both treated as opening for the big winning opening 2003, and the variation of the decorative symbol is started. It is not distinguished in the effect contents from the timing t0 until the challenge bonus effect is performed, and when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the effect, the countdown effect c 'is preceded by an advance effect (not shown) and the challenge is performed. The challenge bonus effect is started by the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big hit challenge bonus effect pattern (render command “09H”), which leads to the bonus effect. Therefore, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit that can be obtained winning balls by opening the big winning opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, the long open hit From the game and the middle opening game, it is possible to perform the effect display on which game mode appears, including the small opening hit game as well as the game. As a result, as compared with the case in the first effect mode, the game characteristic (rendering ability) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning balls by opening the big winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. . In addition, among the big hit A to E and the small hit, it is small in view of the fact that the small open per game will end in a relatively short time among the long open per play, middle open per play, small open per play games. As to whether or not the hit is won, the player may be made comprehensible by displaying a specific image which does not appear at the time of the big hit in the effect in the first closing control period.

Thus, although the display effect pattern for the effect command "10H" is a display effect pattern based on one effect command,
・ A small hit is given as an extension effect pattern in the first rendering mode that is treated as a loss of no chance that a chance of winning a ball is not given, and ・ ・ A small hit is a chance of winning a high chance to be given a chance of winning a ball ( It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the second effect mode treated in the same way as the effect pattern (when it is the effect command "09H") at the time of the big hit. That is, in this case, the effect information pertaining to the event is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side, whereby the effect of the main control MPU 4100a can be varied widely without changing the logic one by one. It can be realized.

[About the display effect pattern in the case of the second effect mode, the effect command "11H"]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (a pure loss Based on the fact that the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is If it is started (timing t0), in liquid crystal display device 1400, dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of display effect c 'at the time of loss associated with effect command "11H" , And start the variation of the decoration pattern.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “11H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ started in this way is also, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Tc3 until the timing t3 comes. A display effect c 'appears with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is decidedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without any effort by the appropriate character. It becomes (a challenge bonus presentation pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “11H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c ′”.

  As described above, the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command “11H” is set to “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c at the time of the big hit when the “extension effect pattern” is adopted. Because there is a gap in the rendering time in the game, it can not function as a rendering pattern at the time of losing to the rendering pattern with the content of the display rendering c at the big hit, and the content of the display rendering c develops As described above, it will function only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when it is in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of the big hit when the effect command "09H" appears as "non-extension display effect pattern" There is no difference in the rendering time between the same rendering pattern (rendering command “09H”), and for the rendering pattern (rendering command “09H”) having the contents of the display rendering c ′ at the time of the big hit It will function as a presentation pattern (a presentation pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line) when the player loses the game. As described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of a small hit when the effect command "10H" is also the effect at the time of the hit Since it appears as a pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line), a effect pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined pattern) at the time of losing also for this effect pattern (render command “10H”) It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the symbol line.

  Thus, the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "09H" corresponds to the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 246 (a), and in the case of the effect command "10H" The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 246 (b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command “11H” is shown in FIG. 246 (c) It corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H", and among the corresponding effect patterns, although the effect contents differ from each other, the effect series addressed to itself (effect content a series, effect contents In the case of the c series), it functions as a rendering pattern having almost the same role as each other.

  However, in the effect content c series (effect command “09H” to “11H”), a display effect pattern corresponding to effect command “04H” in effect content a series (effect command “01H” to “04H”) is prepared Not. That is, even in the effect content c series, when the display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command "04H" is prepared, in the first effect pattern, for the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H" Although this can be made to function effectively as a loss display effect pattern, in the second effect pattern, it can not be functioned as a loss display effect pattern for the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H" Therefore, despite the relatively long time being given, the jackpot symbol combination would exist as a display effect pattern dedicated to the loss without appearance, and I was concerned that the game interest might be reduced by this. It is a thing.

  Therefore, when it is in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern for the effect command "09H", the effect pattern at the time of loss (pure loss) in which a specific condition is not satisfied is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Being removed, and only the effect pattern (display effect pattern when effect command "10H") when a specific condition is satisfied functions as the only existence in place of the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss) You will come to That is, in this case, in the effect content c series (rendering commands “09H” to “11H”), “rendering display effect c after development” appears, unlike the effect content a series (rendering commands “01H” to “04H”) There is no choice but to set the expected level of big hit when the number of hits is limited by the ratio of occurrence of big hit and small hit. However, for the effect content c of the effect content c series (rendering command “09H” to “11H”), a longer time than the effect content a of the effect content a series (rendering command “01H” to “04H”) is held Even if the jackpot expectation is, it is executed as a rendition having a higher expectation than the rendition content a. Therefore, with regard to the jackpot expectation when “display effect after development c” appears, this is required as an appropriate value described later even within the range restricted by the appearance ratio between the jackpot and the jackpot. Setting is relatively easy.

  Also, for the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "04H" of the effect contents a series (effect command "01H" to "04H"), the effect content a when in the second effect mode By acting as a missing effect pattern for the hit effect pattern (rendering command “09H”, “10H”) of the effect content c series, not for the hit effect pattern of the series (rendering command “01H”, “02H”) As described above, the jackpot symbol combination is prevented from being present as a display effect pattern exclusively for the loss that does not appear. Therefore, in the effect content c series (rendering commands “09H” to “11H”), when in the second effect mode, the game is prepared for the hit rendering pattern (rendering commands “09H”, “10H”) The loss effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the loss effect pattern (render command “11H”) by the addition of the selection probability of the display effect pattern of the effect command “04H”.

  Also, although details will be omitted, each display effect pattern corresponding to the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H” and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 237 is effect content Display having the same mode as each of the display effect patterns (see FIGS. 246 (a) to (d)) corresponding to the a series production commands "01H", "02H", "03H" and "04H" It is set as an effect pattern. Furthermore, each display effect pattern corresponding to the effect commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 237 is the effect command “09H” for effect content c series, It is set as a display effect pattern having the same mode as the display effect patterns (see FIGS. 247 (a) to (c)) respectively associated with "10H" and "11H". That is, each of the display effect patterns corresponding to the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect contents b series shown in FIG. 237 and the effect contents d shown in FIG. 237 The relation between the effects of the series and the display effects patterns respectively associated with the effect commands "12H", "13H" and "14H" is the effect commands "01H" and "02H" of the a series of effect contents. Each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 246 (a) to (d)) corresponding to "03H" and "04H" (see FIGS. 246 (a) to (d)) and effect commands "09H", "10H" and "11H" of the effect contents c series It is set so that it may become the above-mentioned presentation relation with each display production pattern (refer to Drawing 247 (a)-(c)) matched with each.

  FIG. 248 (a) is a table showing the big hit expectation etc. when in the first effect mode separately for each effect content series, and FIG. 248 (b) is a challenge when in the second effect mode It is a table which shows bonus rush expectation degree etc. separately for each production content series. In addition, about the numerical value which shows probability, rounding off the 2nd decimal place and showing as a numerical value to the 1st decimal place, the probability total value of each element may not be 100%.

  According to the setting aspect according to such a display effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), the jackpot expected degree, which is the degree of expectation that the hit effect appears in the first effect mode, The big hit expectation when the display effect pattern appears is "0.5%", and the big hit expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is "1.5%". The big hit expectation when the display effect pattern appears is “13.7%”, and the big hit expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is “33.1%”. In addition, since the big hit expectation will be "100%" when the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, this is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect content e, a determined effect of having been won by the big hit appears regardless of the effect mode.

  In addition, with regard to the jackpot expectation degree (the expectation degree for which a hit effect appears) when each display effect pattern that can appear when in the first effect mode is developed, when the effect content a after development appears Big hit expectation degree of “1.3%”, Big hit expectation degree when the production content b after development appears is “3.7%”, Big hit when the production content c after development appears The degree of expectation is “25%”, and the degree of expectation for a big hit when the effect content d after development appears is “72.7%”.

  On the other hand, with regard to the challenge bonus entry expectation degree, which is the expectation degree for hitting effect to appear in the second effect mode, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), when the display effect pattern of the effect content a 'appears The challenge bonus rush expectation of is “7.9%”, and the challenge bonus rush expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ appears is “11.8%”, and the effect content c ′ is displayed The challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the effect pattern appears is “15.4%”, and the challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears is “10%”.

  That is, as described above, the jackpot effect pattern (effect command "01H" and effect command "05H" set as the extension effect pattern is limited to the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d. In contrast to this, the non-extended display effect pattern (rendering command “04H”, effect command “08H”) can be prepared which can function as a losing effect pattern only in the first effect mode. Then, on this, the non-extended display effect pattern (render command “04H”, effect command “08H”) prepared in this way is generated, and in the second effect mode, a hit effect pattern (render command “render 09H ′ ′, the presentation command “10H”, and the hit presentation pattern (streaming command “12H”, presentation command “13H”) of the presentation content d ′ are diverted as each lost presentation pattern.

  According to the display effect patterns associated with such effect commands "04H" and "08H", when in the first effect mode, it is expected that a hit effect will appear, including the contents of effects a and b after development Although the degree (big hit expectation degree) is lowered, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is enhanced (with respect to each display effect pattern of effect contents c and d), and thereby the against big hit It can be made to avoid that only an unexpected display effect pattern is repeatedly performed. Furthermore, for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d, although the appearance probability is low including the effect contents c and d after development, a hit effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d The degree of expectation (big hit expectation) is enhanced (with respect to each display effect pattern of the contents a, b), whereby the game entertainment when a specific display effect pattern (display contents c, d) appears Can be improved.

  Also, conversely, the display effect patterns associated with such effect commands "04H" and "08H" are used in reverse as display effect patterns of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the effect contents c and d series can be increased by that amount (operation on the appearance probability). This makes it possible to reduce the probability of occurrence between the presentation contents a to d and the difference in the degree of expectation in which the hit presentation appears compared to when in the first presentation mode, and the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side Even if it does not change one by one, it will be possible to realize a wide variety of effects that are largely different in the contents of the effect.

  Moreover, when in the second effect mode, the display effects associated with the effect commands "04H" and "08H" are for the disparities among the effect contents regarding the degree of expectation (the challenge bonus entry expected degree) at which the hit effect appears. In addition to being used as a display effect pattern of the production contents c and d series, the pattern is used in reverse as well as a big hit as well as a big hit that can be obtained as a winning ball by the opening of the big winning opening 2003 It is made to reduce it further by being treated as (operation to reduce the difference in the degree of expectation that the hit presentation appears).

  According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, display effect patterns of effect contents a 'to d' are relatively easy to appear regardless of the types of effect contents a 'to d' Become. In addition, with regard to the entry probability (the execution probability of the hit effect) of the challenge bonus effect in which the awarding of the winning ball acquisition opportunity is decided, it will be equalized as compared with the case in the first effect mode (here, the contents of the effect game, even if any of the effect contents a 'to d' appear, combined with the fact that the above difference in appearance probability is filled in the range of ± 10% between the types of a 'to d' People are more likely to expect to be given the opportunity to win a prize ball.

  In this respect, when in the second effect mode, when the rush into the challenge bonus effect (execution) "large winning opening 2003 is open with any mode (long open game, middle open game, small open game) It is better to make it relatively easy to appear, even as a display effect pattern of effect contents a 'to d', because it is characterized by the effect such as "Is it done?" It is more desirable to control the decline in gaming interest.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), in the display effect pattern of the effect contents a 'to d' according to this embodiment, the effect content a 'is the most for the appearance probability of the game per opening in the middle and middle open It becomes smaller and becomes larger in the order of the rendering contents b ', c' and d '. Further, with regard to the appearance probability of the small opening per game, the effect content a 'is the largest, and the effect content b', c 'and d' are gradually smaller in the order. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a 'appears, the possibility of the large winning opening 2003 being opened by the small opening per game is certainly high, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment) , About 40 to 50) is determined to be obtainable, it is determined that the winning opening 2003 is open by long play per open game or per open play You will be able to enjoy it as a production. In addition, when the display effect pattern of the effect contents d 'appears, the probability that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the long open per hit game or the middle open game is the large open per winning opening 2003 by the small open per game As a bonus, it is not decided that at least a small amount of prize balls can be earned as a bonus, but rather the big winning opening 2003 by long open play or medium open play per game It will function as an effect of color tone whether it is released or not. And, the display effect pattern of the effect contents b 'and c' respectively functions as the effect of the color shade between the display effect pattern of such effect contents a 'and the display effect pattern of effect contents d'. The color of the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a 'is darker, and the direction of the display effect pattern of the effect content c' is the color of the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d ' Is dark. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the effects of various colors by making the display effect patterns of such effect contents a ′ to d ′ relatively easy to appear.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for the above-mentioned operation for reducing the difference in the degree of expectation of occurrence of a hit effect among the contents of the effect than in the first effect mode, a hit effect is expected to appear It is assumed that the magnitude relationship of the degree is reversed according to the rendering mode. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 248 (a) and (b), when in the first effect mode, the expectation degrees of the effect contents b and c are “1.5%” and “d”, respectively. "13.7%", which is smaller than the expectation "33.1%" of the effect content d, but in the second effect mode, the expectation of the effect content b 'and c' Are respectively “11.8%” and “15.4%”, which are larger than the expectation “10%” of the effect content d ′. Also according to such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with largely different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a one by one.

  However, when the effect pattern of the effect content d 'appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the hit effect (challenge bonus effect) is executed is certainly higher than when the effect pattern of the effect contents b' and c 'appears. Although it is low, as long as you enter into the challenge bonus effect, the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game with a long, medium open probability with a higher probability than in the effect pattern of the effect contents b 'and c'. , It is easy to get a lot of balls out. Therefore, with regard to the effect patterns of the effect content b 'and c' and the effect pattern of the effect content d ', the preferences are divided according to the player, and such various color tones are given according to the display effect pattern. In this way, a decrease in game entertainment will be suppressed.

  Next, an effect example that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is being performed will be described based on the result of the big hit lottery when in the normal external disadvantage game state.

  As shown in FIG. 237, FIG. 246 (a) and FIG. 247 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first effect mode, types of big hit (big hit A to big hit E) Control according to the opening of the big winning a prize port 2003 (here, control concerning a big hit game) is started while the content of the effect does not differ depending on) and the type is kept confidential without being shown It will be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first effect mode, the type of the jackpot and the corresponding period are determined using the period when the control for opening the large winning opening 2003 is performed. An effect may be presented that indicates the gaming state after the end.

  That is, as described above, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantage gaming state is either a big hit A or B, after the big hit game is over, both the time saving function and the probability varying function are activated It will be controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when one of jackpots A and B is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first clearly indicates that the jackpot has been won as a jackpot explicit effect ad, and then the long-time opening / closing pattern and the middle time An effect is presented in which information (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) concerning the amount of pop-out regarding which of the opening and closing patterns and the opening pattern with the opening and closing pattern is displayed (outside effect in big hit game). It should be noted that a big hit has been won in the big hit explicit effects a to d, even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed as the big hit game-on-production relating to such payout amount. When clearly indicating, the information (the type of the big hit) concerning the amount of dispensed balls may be displayed together (simultaneous display).

  In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery when in the normal external disadvantage game state is any of the big hit C ~ E, after the big hit game is finished, the external disadvantage game state (probability variation function also activated) time saving function does not operate Not be controlled to the normal external disadvantage gaming state, or the probability variation external disadvantage gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated). Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed whether or not the probability variation function is in operation. Therefore, when any of jackpots C to E has been won, first, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, after clearly indicating that the jackpot has been won as jackpot explicit effects a to d, either jackpot A or B is issued By performing an effect different from the effect during the jackpot game when the is won, an effect is shown that it is shown that one of the jackpots C to E among the jackpots A to E is won ( Production during the big hit game). In addition, at the time of winning the big hit C-E, since the opening mode of the game is adopted per open in any medium, it only indicates that the big hit C-E has been elected, the information related to the amount of balls also It will be shown. In addition, with regard to the effects that are shown to have been won by one of the big hit CE also, even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects ad are performed, the big hit in the big hit explicit effects ad It may also be displayed (simultaneously displayed) when specifying that the player has been won.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 237, FIG. 246 (a) and FIG. 247 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second effect mode, an opportunity to open the big winning opening 2003 and Control content does not differ according to the type of hit (big hit A-big hit E, small hit), and the type does not show the control concerning the opening of big winning a prize port 2003 while being kept concealed In this case, the control for the big hit game or the small hit game will be started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second effect mode, the type of hit (big hit, small using the period when the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is being performed) The above-described challenge bonus effect can be provided, which can indicate the type of hit, the type of jackpot), the game state after the period is over, and the like.

  That is, in the in-opening effect (challenge bonus effect) in the second effect mode, first, in what manner the large winning opening 2003 is opened (in long open play, middle open play, small open play) An effect is presented in which information (a big bonus, a regular bonus, a small bonus, etc.) relating to the amount of payout is displayed. And as a result, when it is indicated that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by long opening per game (big bonus), it is naturally shown that it is controlled to the positive external variable gaming state based on the winning of the big hit A Will be In addition, when it is indicated that the large winning opening 2003 is opened by small opening per game (small bonus), it is a small hit and it is naturally shown that the gaming state is not changed. It becomes.

  However, when it is indicated that the large winning opening 2003 is opened by the middle opening game (regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as an effect during opening. As a result, when the character wins in the same battle effect, it is shown that the game is controlled to the probability varying external advantageous gaming state based on the winning of the big hit B. On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the same battle effect, it is indicated that the jackpot is won by one of the big hit C to E, and after the open effect (big hit game) is over, the time is reduced It is controlled to the external disadvantageous gaming state where the function does not operate (normal external adverse gaming state where the probability variation function does not operate, or the probability changing external disadvantageous gaming state where the probability variation function operates). Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed whether or not the probability variation function is in operation.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent effect state is limited to a period until the special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) changes. For example, when it does not encounter a specific enemy character until the end of the same period, while indicating that it is in a probability variation external disadvantage game state, when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed It is like that. Then, when the character wins in this battle effect, it indicates that the jackpot has been won, and when the character is defeated, it indicates that the player is normally in the external disadvantageous gaming state, and waits for the end of the same period. It is made to end the said latent presentation state without.

  As described above, according to the latent effect method in which the current gaming state is indicated at the latest until the period until the special symbol changes at a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) ends at the latest, as a player It becomes easy to enjoy purely whether it is in the gaming state, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amusement due to the gaming state being concealed for a long period even though the time saving function is not activated.

  By the way, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 246 (a), the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 237 in the first effect mode has “display effect a” having the contents of the display effect a Although only “is associated,” as shown in FIG. 249, “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of display effect a is also associated in addition to the “extended effect pattern”. You may

  That is, in this case, when the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the "extended effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a and the display effect a. One of “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of “1” is selected, and dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

Here, as a method for selecting the “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a, for example,
(A) Based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on random numbers, any of the "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a or the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a How to choose
(B) Based on the type of the jackpot winning in the jackpot lottery, the "extended effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a and the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a In addition to the method of selecting any of the above, etc., a method combining (i) and (ii) can be adopted.

  Among these, when adopting the method of (i), any value of the values of the random numbers that can be acquired is associated with the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” respectively. The “extension effect” having the contents of the display effect a when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode by the ratio of the random number values associated beforehand such as The appearance probabilities of the “pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a are determined. With regard to the setting of the appearance probability, it is possible that the jackpot expectation is higher when the “extended effect pattern” appears than the “non-extended display effect pattern” until the end of the display effect pattern More desirable for entertaining the production.

  In addition, in the case of adopting the method of (b), when a specific winning kind (for example, the big hit A) is won, the dynamic of the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a The display is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400. According to such an effect method, at timing t1, a hit result for at least a specific winning kind (for example, the big hit A) is shown.

  For example, when a big hit symbol (a big hit explicit effect that is clearly indicated to be a big hit) appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol by the "non-extended display effect pattern", the "big hit A" which is the highest for the player. In the first closing control period, an opening effect to congratulate the player such as "Congratulations!" Is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Then, for example, at timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, switching to an effect display to the effect that the big hit game should be started by the right-handed game is achieved. The timing tx when the game ball passes through the figure gate 2500 is relatively easy to arrive earlier than in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of extension, and in the subsequent big hit game, the big hit effect dedicated to the "big hit A" is performed. It becomes. However, if there is no hit rendition (a big hit explicit rendition that clearly indicates a big hit) by the “non-extended display rendition pattern” at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A with the highest advantage for the player” On the contrary, it is possible to grasp that it has not been won. And in this case, after the above-mentioned continuation expectation production by "the extended production pattern", when the big hit explicit production appears, it is made possible to grasp that either "big hit B"-"big hit E" was won It will be.

  Also, when adopting a method combining (i) and (ii), a presentation lottery table is prepared for each big hit type, and based on the acquired random value while referring to this presentation lottery table Therefore, one of the "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a and the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is selected. That is, by preparing the effect lottery table for each big hit type, it becomes possible to make the selection rate of the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” in each table different. Thereby, for example, the degree of expectation of the type of jackpot which is won is different depending on which of the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” is clearly indicated that the jackpot is won. In addition to being able to do that, when the “non-extendive production pattern” is clearly shown to be a big hit, although the big hit is lower, the highest gain “big hit A” is more likely. Big "Expected effect pattern" is a big hit expectation, but when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit, the expected level of "big hit A" with the highest degree of advantage is low, etc. Is also possible.

  In addition to the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command "01H", the effect command "05H" shown in FIG. 237, concerning the method of selecting the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern", The display effect patterns "09H" and "12H" can be similarly adopted. However, when adopted as the display effect pattern of the effect commands "01H" and "05H", the display effect pattern of the effect commands "03H" and "07H" is lost with respect to the display effect pattern as the hit effect pattern. It will be able to function as a pattern.

  Further, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 247 (a), the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 237 in the first effect mode has “display effect a” having the contents of the display effect a Although only “is associated,” as shown in FIG. 250, even if “extension effect pattern” having the contents of display effect c is also associated in addition to the “extension effect pattern”. Good.

  That is, although "the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c" associated with the effect command "02H" in this manner, the stop effect t1 of the special symbol is extended and the display effect is performed. The content of the effect is only the display effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (c)) of the effect command "11H" when in the first effect mode, and the display effect after development in which the jackpot expectation becomes higher It will be taken as the effect contents which do not appear. Therefore, in the first effect mode, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 237 is received, a part of the effect command “02H” is allocated to effect contents in which such a display effect after development does not appear. While holding the appearance probability of the display effect after development when in the first effect mode low, it is possible to set the winning probability of the small hit higher. In this case, when in the second effect mode, the entry probability to the challenge bonus effect (the expectation for the hit effect to appear) can be enhanced by the portion where the winning probability of the small hit is set higher. By this, it becomes possible to give the chance of winning balls by opening the big winning opening 2003 with a higher probability.

  In this case, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects "the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a" and "the display effect One of the extension effect patterns having the contents of c is selected, and the dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, as a method for selecting "the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and "the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c", for example, the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on random numbers Based on the above, it is possible to adopt a method of selecting one of “an extension effect pattern having contents of display effect a” and “an extension effect pattern having contents of display effect c”. When this method is adopted, the value of the random number that can be acquired is "the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and "the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" In the first effect mode, the content of “display effect a in the case where the effect command“ 02H ”shown in FIG. The appearance probability of each of the extension effect pattern having the symbol “and the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c” is determined.

  Moreover, about the method concerning the selection of "the extended production pattern with the content of the display production a" and the "extended production pattern with the content of the display production c", the display production pattern of the above-mentioned production command "02H" Besides, the display effect pattern of the effect command "06H" shown in FIG. 237 can be adopted in the same manner. When adopted for the display effect pattern of this effect command "06H", the selection between "the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect b" and "the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect d" should be performed It becomes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number “15”, effect command “15H”) shown in FIG. 237 for determining the big hit is prepared. You may omit it. That is, in this case, when opening the special winning opening 2003 in the second effect mode, it is possible to make the challenge bonus effect pattern always appear.

[4. Game content]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 151, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the operation handle portion 410 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5 to store the storage tray of the tray unit 300. The game ball stored in 311 is driven into the upper part in the game area 605 disposed on the front of the game panel 600, and a game by the game ball is started. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at a suitable position in the front of the game panel 600 with a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball is in contact with the obstacle nails to cause the flow While the speed is suppressed, various motions are given to the game ball and the motions can be enjoyed. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the left side or the right side of the center character 2300 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction.

  That is, a game in which the game balls are made to flow down to the game area 605 on the left side of the center character 2300 by launching the game balls relatively weakly is called a left-handed game. On the other hand, a game in which the game ball is made to flow down to the right play area 605 of the center character 2300 by striking the game ball relatively strongly is called a right-handed game. The left hitting game and the right hitting game can be switched by the player adjusting the rotation amount of the operation handle portion 410.

  Here, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002, a special random number is acquired in addition to the starting opening that has entered the ball. That is, when the game ball enters the first start opening 2001, a first special random number is acquired, and when the game ball enters the second start opening 2002, a second special random number is acquired.

  Then, the special random numbers acquired based on the entry into the starting openings 2101 and 2102 are temporarily suspended before being subjected to the acceptance determination process. When the start condition is satisfied and the hold is released, the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the variation of the decoration symbol is also displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so as to be synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol. Display starts. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with it, and when the second special symbol is displayed stopped, the decorative symbol is displayed stopped in synchronization with it . At this time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the result of the yes / no determination process for the first special random number. Similarly, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with it, and when the second special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is stopped displayed in synchronization with this. Ru. At this time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the result of the yes / no determination process for the second special random number. Thus, the decorative symbol functions as a symbol common to both the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol and the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not to operate the probability variation function by the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number) acquired based on the winning on the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, The number of rounds and the like in the big hit game are determined.

  However, it is considered difficult to enter the second starting slot 2002 in the external disadvantageous gaming state (normal external adverse gaming state, positive externality gaming state) in which the time saving function (opening extension function) is inactivated. Thus, the player plays a game while adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410 so that the left strike game is performed. And, as a result of such left-handed game being played, the result of the judgment of the special random number according to the entry into the first starting hole 2001, the opportunity to win the prize ball is awarded (big hit or small hit When it is), regardless of the winning type, the opening and closing member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003.

  As described above, for special symbols, the lighting modes (when special symbols are stopped) of multiple LEDs (special symbols) at the time of winning a small hit and the lighting modes of multiple LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning a big hit (When special symbol is stopped), it appears as an aspect that approximates each other, such as being different only as to whether or not one LED is lit (see FIG. 235). On the other hand, as for the decorative symbol, the result of the judgment on the special random number according to the entry into the first starting opening 2001 is the hit (big hit or small hit) given the opportunity to obtain the winning ball. Even in this case, the handling at the time of the big hit and the time of the small hit is largely different according to the above-mentioned effect mode (the first effect mode, the second effect mode) (see FIG. 245). ).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the result of the judgment on the special random number is the hit (big hit or small hit) to which the opportunity to obtain a winning ball is given, the type of the same hit When is a big hit, the big prize winning opening 2003 is not opened with this alone (the execution of the big hit game is not started). That is, although this is also mentioned above, when the big hit is won, the closing control period (the opening and closing member 2006 is closed) from when the special symbol (first special symbol) is stopped until the big winning opening 2003 is opened. In addition to the "first closed control period with a fixed length" that also appears when a small hit is won, the "second closed control period with an indefinite length" It also appears in the form of extending the closed control period. The second closing control period is ended based on passage of the game ball through the special drawing gate 2500 after the lapse of the first closing control period having a predetermined length.

  Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the game ball passes through the special view gate 2500 at an arbitrary timing after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed (right ) And to adjust the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410 at an arbitrary timing to play a game. As a result, when the game ball passes the special view gate 2500, the big hit game will be started by the end of the second closing control period, but the player can maintain such a right-handed game. By continuing the operation of the operation handle portion 410, the gaming balls are successively entered into the opened big winning opening 2003.

  And when the jackpot is a non-specific winning type, after such a jackpot game is played, the game under the control of the external disadvantage game state where the time saving function (opening extension function) is not activated is played again Become. On the other hand, when the big hit is a specific winning type, the external advantageous gaming state (normal external advantageous gaming state, certainty external extrinsic gaming state) that the time saving function (opening extension function) is activated after such a big hit game is played The game under the control of) will be played.

Here, in the external advantageous gaming state, winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2002 which becomes an execution trigger of the same lottery (variation) so that the suspension state of the second special symbol lottery (variation) is not interrupted Control is performed to increase the frequency of changing to an easy state. As such control, for example, the following first to third methods can be considered, but the frequency of “normal hit” is increased, and the blade 2337 for closing the second start port 2002 is expanded for a predetermined time. Any method may be adopted as long as the frequency of winning a prize can be increased.
The first method of setting the probability of being judged as “normal hit” to be higher when the time saving function is working than when the time saving function is not working.
・ When the time saving function is activated and the time shortening function is not activated, the probability that it is determined as a "normal hit" is the same, but the variation time of the normal symbol is not activated A second method in which the time saving function is activated is shorter than the second method.
A third method that employs both the first method and the second method.

  That is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the time saving function (opening extension function) is activated, the game ball can enter the second starting opening 2002 more easily than the first starting opening 2001 by such control. Therefore, the player can play the game while adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410 so that the game ball passes through the gate member 2200 (gate 2201) (as right play is performed). It becomes. As a result, when the gate sensor 2202 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate member 2200 (gate 2201), the main control board 4100 generates an ordinary random number as a result of the ordinary lottery based on the detection signal. . Then, based on the ordinary random number, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 is variably displayed, and the ordinary lottery result is shown after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) has elapsed. It will be displayed as stopped. In addition, the fluctuation display of this ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern selection table.

  As a result, when the normal symbol suggesting a normal hit is stopped and displayed, the start port solenoid 2344 spreads the blades 2337 for a predetermined time, thereby being driven into the game area 605 by the right-handed game. The game ball comes to enter the second starting opening 2002.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second special start opening 2002 does not necessarily win the hit (small hit) that does not accompany the operation of the condition device because the execution of the drawing of the first special symbol is always delayed. As described above, it is controlled that all the drawing based on the winning (the second special symbol drawing) are consumed first (see FIG. 227). Therefore, until the number of reservations for the second special symbol side lottery is interrupted and becomes “0”, only the game under which the small hit is not won (the second special symbol side lottery) is sequentially performed When the result of the judgment of the special random number according to the entry into the second starting opening 2002 is the hit that the opportunity to win the winning ball is given, ie, it is determined that the big hit was won, the big winning opening The opening and closing member 2006 is operated to open the opening 2003.

  However, also in the case of the lottery of such second special symbol, the big winning a prize port 2003 is not opened just with the fact that the big hit is won (the execution of the big hit game is not started), it is special As a closed control period (period in which the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled to be maintained in the closed state) from when the symbol (the second special symbol) is stopped to when the big winning opening 2003 is opened, A first closed control period and a second closed control period with an indefinite length appear.

  Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the game ball passes through the special view gate 2500 after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed (when a right-handed game is played ), The game is performed while adjusting the rotation amount of the operation handle portion 410 at an arbitrary timing. In this case, in order to further increase the lottery efficiency when the time saving function (opening extension function) is activated, in the first closing control period, the same period as the challenge bonus effect pattern at the big hit ends. It is desirable to perform a countdown effect or the like so that the game ball passes the special drawing gate 2500 immediately.

  As a result, when the game ball passes the special view gate 2500, the big hit game will be started by the end of the second closing control period, but the player can maintain such a right-handed game. By continuing the operation of the operation handle portion 410, the gaming balls are successively entered into the opened big winning opening 2003. And, when the big hit is a non-specific winning species, after such a big hit game is played, the game under which the time saving function (opening extension function) is not operated is controlled to the external disadvantage gaming state (left handed game) under the control It will be done. On the other hand, when the big hit is a specific winning type, after such a big hit game is played, the game under the control of the external advantageous game state where the time saving function (opening extension function) is activated (right-handed game) Will be done again.

  Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments, the above-described embodiments of the present invention are for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention. The present invention can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and the scope of the claims, and the present invention includes the equivalents thereof.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the player is awarded when a big hit is won in the first special symbol side lottery process and when a big hit is won in the second special symbol side lottery process. Although there is no difference in the expected value of the profit (the number of awardable balls etc.), the expected value may be different. For example, when the lottery process on the first special symbol side is performed, the probability that the largest (or the smallest) jackpot game that can be acquired by the player can be executed is relatively high. Or, while it is set low, when the second special symbol side lottery processing is performed, the most (or the least) jackpot game of the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player is executed Cases where the probability of being set is relatively low (or high) are set.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the second effect mode, the opening effect before the big hit game (the action to prompt the player to start the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) is also included in the small hit game pattern It could be completed within the first closed control period with a certain length present. However, even if the same effect is performed in the second closed control period even in the second effect mode, for example, the first effect is not completed within the first closed control period. If prompting the right-handed game at a timing earlier than when in the effect mode, even in the case of the display effect pattern (the variation time of the special symbol is the same) based on one effect command, in the first effect mode It is possible to make the length of the rendering time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) in the second rendering mode to the start of the big hit game largely different.

  In addition, among the lottery for the game progress regarding the number of rounds when the big hit is played, the number of rounds when the big hit game is played, etc. It may not necessarily be determined based on the symbol random number. For example, after the first closed control period has elapsed, a random number for determining a round is acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the special figure gate 2500, and the round number is determined based on the acquired random number. A lottery may be made. According to such a configuration, even in the state that the special symbol is stopped based on the jackpot winning, the lottery (big hit lottery) concerning the game progress that may affect the profit itself that can be enjoyed by the player is processed halfway It becomes possible to be left behind in the stage. And, in such a halfway processing stage as a big hit lottery, since the game ball is newly launched by the player and can be maintained until the same game ball is received in a specific receiving slot, a big hit is won. Even after the special symbol is stopped on the basis, until the jackpot game is started, for example, the exposure of the information by the round lamp etc. is made infeasible, and the lottery of the jackpot lottery has already been made It becomes possible to perform the expectation effect of the result of the lottery part (the jackpot hit, whether or not it is a random hit, etc.), and this makes the game entertaining until the jackpot game is actually executed. Can be suitably maintained.

  In the above embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is used as the operation target (operation means) by the player to end the second closing control period, but as such an operation target, for example, Other operation means such as the main button 371 and the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 may be adopted. However, in this case, the game ball can be held in the game area 605, and the special drawing gate 2500 is operated based on the operation of the appropriate operation means (for example, the main button 371) for the held game ball. A releasable retention device to be allowed to pass through is disposed in a region immediately above the special drawing gate 2500 or the like.

  In addition, in the second effect mode, at the time of the big hit or the small hit, the false countdown effect so that the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 earlier than the end of the first closing control period. There may be cases where As a result of such a false countdown effect being performed, the special view gate 2500 (or, by the operation of the predetermined operation means (operation handle portion 410) at a stage earlier than the end of the first closed control period. When the game ball passes through the area X), even if the peripheral control MPU 4140a is selected as a big hit, the attack content against the enemy character is avoided as a result of the effect when the small hit Etc.) will be controlled. That is, when the player confirms the contents of such a small hit, the player will be disappointed once, but after that, when the small hit is won, the big winning opening 2003 is automatically opened. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won, the special winning opening 2003 is opened unless the game ball passes the special drawing gate 2500 by operating the predetermined operation means (the operation handle portion 410) again. Absent. In addition, the reserve of special symbols is not digested, and no new symbol variation is started. Therefore, the player can grasp the possibility of being won by the big hit due to such a change in the gaming state (the stagnation state of the game), and the feeling can be greatly enhanced from the state of being discouraged once It will be. On the other hand, depending on the player, some players may immediately quit the game without confirming such a change in the gaming state upon confirming the contents of the small hit, and in this case, the condition device It becomes possible to create a very unusual state (a state advantageous to other players), such as the pachinko machine 1 in the operating state becoming empty, thus being installed in the hall The operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is suitably maintained. In addition, at the start of the game, a game technique that allows the special view gate 2500 to pass first can be established, and for the player, a big hit game can be started without having the game ball enter the starting opening. This is advantageous in some cases, and is also advantageous for the hole side in that the ball of the player can be digested only for the portion where the game ball passes through the special view gate 2500.

  In addition, for the first closed control period, it is prepared as a time having a predetermined length after the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped (time until time-out of interval effect timer). For example, it may be determined based on values of the acquired jackpot symbol random number, the variable display pattern random number, and the like when the special symbol changes. That is, in this case, when the special symbol changes, any one of a plurality of closed control periods (a plurality of interval effect timers for counting different times) having different lengths prepared in advance is selected as the first closed control period. Will be used in Thus, if the time is at least a predetermined time when the special symbol fluctuates, the addition time between the time determined in this way and the fluctuation time of the special symbol (or this addition time is used as the maximum effect time, It is possible to perform display effect by selectively using a display effect pattern in which a short time) is used as one effect unit (rendering time).

  In addition, for the first closed control period, different times may be predetermined for the big hit and the small hit. For example, when the interval presentation timer at the time of big hit is to clock the first time, when the interval presentation timer at the time of small hit is to clock the second time longer than the first time, the following Such an effect can be realized. That is, in any case of the big hit time and the small hit time, it is after the first time has elapsed from the time the special symbol (identification pattern) is stopped until the second time passes If an opening effect such as the above-described countdown effect is performed so that the game ball passes the special drawing gate 2500, the game ball does not pass the special drawing gate 2500 immediately after the same effect is performed. However, it is possible to prevent the special winning opening 2003 from being opened until the second time period has elapsed, and such operation system effects can be given time allowance. In this case, when the small hit, after the first time has elapsed and before the second time has elapsed, the game ball passes the special view gate 2500 (or the point X), When any one of the conditions that the second time and the second time elapse is satisfied, the challenge bonus effect will be performed. However, when the game ball passes special drawing gate 2500 (or location X) before the second time elapses, the challenge bonus effect is started without the special winning opening 2003 being opened. Become. Further, since the time until the big winning opening 2003 is opened is relatively long, it becomes easy to be grasped that it is the pachinko machine 1 equipped with a small hit than in the case of the above embodiment. There is a disadvantage that it will

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, may be used. The invention can be applied. Incidentally, in consideration of the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the "game ball" in each of the above configurations may be used as a "game medium".

  A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an insertion medium, such as a game ball, which is a medium that a player inserts into a game machine, and a game medium, which is a medium used for a substantial game played by a player, are the same. This is a type of gaming machine of the type in which gaming is performed using a medium such as a gaming ball inserted, for example. Specifically, “The launcher that launches the game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and a suitable device such as a large number of obstacle nails, a center role, a display means, etc. are incorporated, a start winning opening, a big prize A game area provided with a proper ball entry port where game balls such as a mouth, a passing port, and an arrival port enter, a rail for guiding the game ball from the launch device to the game area, and a game ball led to the game area According to entering the ball into the ball entrance, according to the ball entering aspect of the game ball into the plurality of ball entrance, it is something which is equipped with the payment means which pays out the specified number of game balls as the winning balls.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, and a ball entering state detecting means (i.e., a gaming state detecting a ball entering state to a ball entering port) is represented by one generally referred to as a "digital". Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the ball entry is detected by the ball entry state detection means, special symbol display means for varying the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the variation "In addition to the above," is further provided with effect image display means for causing a character or the like to appear at a predetermined timing while fluctuating display of a decorative symbol row consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols during fluctuation of a special symbol " In general, represented by what is referred to as a "multi-function machine" "also provided with a lottery means for performing a lottery by the distribution of gaming balls in the character and a lottery means for performing a lottery by winning in the starting opening Generally, it is represented by what is referred to as "arepachi" "For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls such as 16 pieces, and the ball entering mode of the game balls to a plurality of ball entrances in one game" In accordance with this, it is possible to exemplify “a game player who pays out a predetermined number of game balls” and the like.

  On the other hand, with pachislot machines, medals, which are game media, are inserted, and after the medals are inserted, a pattern row consisting of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game such as stopping the variation of the symbol array in response to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). In addition, when the operation means for a stop is not operated even if predetermined time passes, the fluctuation | variation of a symbol row may be stopped according to having passed predetermined time. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out or a player can obtain a large amount of medals according to the satisfied condition. In addition, it generates a special advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused has a plurality of (for example, five) gaming balls as one unit of inserting medium, and after inserting the inserting medium, starting operation means (for example, operating lever According to the operation of), the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and thereafter, the variation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). In addition, when the operation means for a stop is not operated even if predetermined time passes, the fluctuation | variation of a symbol row may be stopped according to having passed predetermined time. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition or the player can obtain a large number of medals. , Generate a special advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, it seems as if there is no game medium in a game machine in which a substantial game is not performed depending on the medium inserted, such as a pachislot machine or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even with such a game machine, it can be assumed that a game played using game balls or other appropriate articles is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using gaming media.

  Further, the effect display device in the above embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to the liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 1400 liquid crystal display device 3011 decoration board 3012 upper electric decoration 3013 lower electric decoration 3014 flat cable 3015 upper LED substrate 3016 lower LED substrate 3017 recessed portion 3018 protrusion 3018 a irregular reflection surface 3019 upper frame decoration 3020 lower side Frame-shaped decorative body 3021 Groove forming portion 3021a Draw-out port 3023 Rack 3031 Decorative plate 3034 Flat cable 3051 Decorative plate 3090 Driving portion 3094 Motor inside left 3069 Gear 3097 Pinion 3110 Lower support 4140 Peripheral control board

Claims (1)

The game area where the game ball is hit,
A starting opening capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area;
A large winning opening disposed in the gaming area and in which the reception of the gaming ball is facilitated by the operation of a predetermined opening / closing means,
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the reception of the game ball to the starting opening;
Game control means for performing control related to a bonus game in which the acceptance of the game ball at the big winning opening is facilitated by the operation of the predetermined opening / closing means when the result of the drawing by the drawing means is a hit;
Effect control means capable of controlling result information about the result of the lottery by the lottery means so as to be indicated by a display effect on a predetermined effect display device;
The above mentioned hits include a first hit with the operation of the condition device and a second touch without the operation of the condition device,
The game control means
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a hit, a period during which the bonus game is not executed is generated regardless of whether the hit is the first hit or the second hit in executing the bonus game. Nevertheless, with regard to the conditions that allow the bonus game to be executed by ending the period, the first hit with the activation of the condition device is won, and the operation of the condition device does not occur. There is a closed state maintenance control means that differs from when the second win is won,
The effect control means is
When a hit is obtained as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, regardless of whether the hit is the first hit or the second hit, a display effect at the time of hit is performed, and the closed state maintenance control means A bonus effect control means for performing a challenge bonus effect as to whether the predetermined opening / closing means operates based on which of the first and second hits is made, when execution of the bonus game is permitted through control by A game machine characterized by